JP2019150283A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To inexpensively manufacture a game machine without providing new operation means and to enhance interest in a game such that a player can bodily sense joy of operation.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: setting change means capable of changing a setting value corresponding to setting regarding a game; and operation detection means capable of detecting a player's operation. Performance control means includes: operation value calculation means for calculating an operation value as a value that changes according to detection of the player's operation by the operation detection means according to a setting value; and notice performance execution means capable of reporting predetermined performance contents and executing a notice performance when the operation detection means detects the player's operation. The notice performance execution means can allow an execution ratio of a notice performance to differ in connection with a setting value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 173

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a control means capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when a display result of a variable display game for variably displaying identification information becomes a special result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can execute an effect related to a game by a player operating an operation means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-105770 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improving the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to the effect executed when operating the operation means.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to the effects executed when operating the operation means.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine including an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect relating to a game, a setting changing means capable of changing a setting value according to a setting relating to a game,
Operation detecting means capable of detecting the player's operation, wherein the effect control means sets the operation value as a value that changes in response to the operation detecting means detecting the player's operation according to the set value. And an operation value calculation means for calculating and a prediction effect execution means capable of executing a prediction effect for predicting and notifying the content of the predetermined effect when the operation detection means detects a player's operation. And the said prediction production | presentation execution means can vary the execution ratio of the said prediction production | presentation in relation to the said setting value.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of a special figure change display game with respect to each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 2). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of probability setting change (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 6). It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit system command process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the chance eye stop symbol aspect in the chance eye look-ahead effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which selects the chance eye stop symbol aspect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the screen transition diagram which concerns on 2nd Embodiment (the 1). It is the screen transition diagram which concerns on 2nd Embodiment (the 2). It is a reverse view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view when the board production | presentation apparatus of the game board which concerns on 3rd Embodiment operate | moves. It is a front view when the frame direction production apparatus of the glass frame concerning a 3rd embodiment operates. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial stage operation control processing concerning the comparative example of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a table for determining the initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare production | presentation setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ending effect setting process which concerns on the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the out ball number reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the RTC read process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of a big hit. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows another example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of a big hit. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the display mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall | game / player setting mode process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in hall setting mode. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when it is in player setting mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is a screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when the special-fluctuation pending display of a reserved digest area changes. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined | prescribed effect generate | occur | produces in an effect display area. In 5th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and another example of the screen transition of the whole game when a predetermined | prescribed effect generate | occur | produces in a reservation digest area or an effect display area It is. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the character code (character code) which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and the character corresponding to it. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED driver initial setting process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and a latch. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, FIG. 78 (A) is a figure which shows the detail of the accessory ratio display part which comprises a state display apparatus and displays an accessory ratio. FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing the details of a discharge ball number display unit that constitutes a state display device and displays the number of discharged balls, and a ball output rate display unit that displays a ball output rate. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for ratios which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for ratios which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for ratios which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the cascade connection of the LED driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the collective driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, the driver for ratio, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initialization process of the collective driver which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, the driver for role ratios, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for package which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment, the driver for ratios, and the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the LED data transmission process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device and the test firing test signal transmitted to the test firing test device when changing the setting of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying the lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability set value display device and the test fire test signal transmitted to the test fire test device at the time of setting change of the first modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram at the time of changing the setting of the 2nd modification of a 7th embodiment at the time of displaying lighting pattern data transmitted to a probability set value display device, and a trial test signal transmitted to a trial test device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 1) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example (the 2) of the game control system which concerns on 8th Embodiment. Timing chart showing an example of external information output timing at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the external information output at the time of the setting change which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the external information output at the time of the setting decision which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the external information output at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the external information output at the time of the setting change which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is another example in which the external information output timing at the time of setting change according to a modification of the ninth embodiment is changed. In 10th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 of the collective display apparatus corresponding to the said symbol number, and the lighting pattern of a probability setting value in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the information regarding the payout rate which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the detail of the state display apparatus which displays the number which shows the probability setting value which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is the figure (the 1) which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure change display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is the figure (the 2) which illustrates with respect to each setting (each setting value) the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure fluctuation display game which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the open mode (small hit release pattern) of the special variable prize-winning apparatus in the small hit state. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the hit probability of a common figure change display game with respect to each setting (each setting value). In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display apparatus waiting for a customer. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the light emission aspect of a special figure fluctuation | variation display part. It is a figure which shows the external device which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a mode that the detachable part which concerns on 12th Embodiment is attached to the gaming machine. It is a figure showing roughly an example of composition of a game board and parts concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification board | substrate which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the presentation control apparatus which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the parts collation process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. In a 12th embodiment, it is a figure showing a reference table which matches a model specification command and model identification information. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power activation (power restoration) of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process concerning 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of the setting change of the state display apparatus which concerns on the 2nd modification of 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 13th Embodiment. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of a fixed display period of probability setting values at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 1st modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is the 2nd modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine of 14th Embodiment, Comprising: The display mode of the probability setting value at the time of setting change compared with the display mode of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram showing the 3rd modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 4th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the game machine of 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 5th modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine of the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the 2 byte distribution process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end process which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and small hit probability which concern on 15th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) based on 15th Embodiment with respect to each setting. It is a figure which shows the selection rate table which prescribes | regulates the selection rate of the number (variation pattern group number) of the fluctuation | variation group table AE which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table A (in the case of a probability variation state and a deviation) concerning 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table B (in the case of a probability variation state and a deviation) concerning 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table C (in the case of a probability variation state and a deviation) concerning 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group tables D and D '(in the case of a probable change state and a deviation) concerning 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group tables E and E '(in the case of a probability change state and a deviation) concerning 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table A (in the case of a probability variation state and a small hit) based on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table B (in the case of a probability variation state and a small hit) which concerns on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group table C (in the case of a probability variation state and a small hit) based on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group tables D and D '(probability change state and the case of a small hit) based on 15th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation group tables E and E '(probability change state and the case of a small hit) based on 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end process which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end process which concerns on the modification of 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot probability and effect pattern which concern on 16th Embodiment with respect to each setting (each setting value). It is a figure which illustrates another example of a jackpot probability and production pattern concerning each setting (each set value) concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation production setting process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half notice distribution group table change process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the latter half notice distribution group table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch fluctuation system command processing which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch effect distribution table setting process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch effect distribution table setting process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the prefetch effect distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the lucky number distribution table which concerns on 16th Embodiment. In a 16th embodiment, it is a figure which illustrates the change pattern of the lucky number distribution table set corresponding to a set value and the last lucky number. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process which concerns on 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process which concerns on the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change group table change process which concerns on the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the change group table change process which concerns on the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the change group table which concerns on the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of the game machine which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the presentation control apparatus which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch sensor input process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the prediction effect process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the prediction effect process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the affection degree alert | report effect process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of one announcement lottery concerning a 17th embodiment, a hold content announcement lottery, and SP reach content announcement lottery with respect to each love degree. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of change contents notice lottery concerning 17th embodiment, continuation suggestion notice lottery, and setting suggestion notice lottery with respect to each degree of love. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of line lottery concerning each 17th embodiment to each degree of love. In 17th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when each character appears by the effect of SP reach. It is a figure which illustrates the win rate of the degree-of-love increase value lottery concerning 17th embodiment to each set value. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol type command processing which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single system command processing which concerns on 17th Embodiment. In 17th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and is an example of the screen transition of the whole game when notification lottery is performed in multiple times in the variable display game in a single suspension. . It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch fluctuation system command processing which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the change effect setting process which concerns on 17th Embodiment. In 17th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and the screen transition of the whole game when a variable display game is played in multiple times based on the some start memory memorize | stored It is an example (the 1). In 17th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and the screen transition of the whole game when a variable display game is played in multiple times based on the some start memory memorize | stored This is an example (No. 2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production button input process which concerns on the modification of 17th Embodiment. In the modification of 17th Embodiment, it is a front view of the game board during a button operation effective period. It is a front view of the game board concerning the 2nd modification of a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the touch game process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 17th Embodiment. In the 2nd modification of 17th Embodiment, it is a front view of the game board during a touch game period. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation production setting process which concerns on 18th Embodiment. It is a table which shows the priority of the several character display displayed on the simultaneous period which concerns on 18th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the expectation degree of the big hit of the character display without a reading and the character display with a reading which concerns on 18th Embodiment using the character display of a line as an example. It is an example of the screen transition figure which showed the display screen concerning 18th Embodiment in time series (the 1). It is an example of the screen transition figure which showed the display screen concerning 18th Embodiment in time series (the 2). It is a modification of the screen transition figure which showed the display screen concerning an 18th embodiment in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation production setting process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the prefetch fluctuation system command processing which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect button input process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is an example of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen which concerns on 19th Embodiment in time series (the 1). It is an example of the screen transition figure which showed the display screen concerning a 19th embodiment in time series (the 2). It is a timing chart explaining the no operation effect and the operation effect in 19th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. Protrusion production unit 1
3 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. Protrusion production unit 13
The illumination member disposed in the interior also forms part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state means, for example, a state where the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (
Special gaming state) and small hit gaming state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher is a force (speed) for launching a game ball into the game area.
The firing force can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be fired in various launch modes with different firing forces. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. An effect display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner (variable display) behind the window portion formed in the center case 40.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In addition, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40 in the center case 40.
There are provided an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the game, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning apparatus 37,
The game ball that rolls on the stage portion 40b is easy to win in the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 35 is a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal variation winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called velo-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via a general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. And the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball tends to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Note that the probability variation state (
Even in the case of the latent probability changing state), the short time state (the public power support state) occurs repeatedly.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, a large winning opening solenoid (39b) (
As shown in FIG. 3, a special variable winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the front side is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, the special prize winning device 39 illuminates the big prize opening in the big prize opening or in the vicinity of the big prize opening (around the big prize opening).
One or a plurality of large winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) are arranged.

General prize opening 35, start prize opening 36, ordinary variable prize apparatus 37, and special variable prize apparatus 39
When the game ball wins the prize winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning mouth from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Ordinary variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, an out port 30 for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port etc.
b is provided.

In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is a first special figure variation display section 5 for a variation display game, which is composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and second special figure fluctuation display part 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D
2) and the fluctuation display section 53 for the usual figure fluctuation display game (the universal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D
18), and a memory display section (Special Figure 1 Hold Display 54, Special Figure 2 Hold Display 55, Universal Map Hold Display 56) for notifying the start (hold) storage number of each variable display game. ing. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 hold indicator 55, lamp D
13 and D14. The general-purpose hold indicator 56 includes lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first gaming state display unit 57 (first gaming state indicator, lamp) for notifying whether the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-timed). D7),
The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, the jackpot probability state becomes a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. 3rd game state display part 59 (3rd game state display, probability state display part, lamp D9) which displays that it is, the round display which displays the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of special variable winning device 39) A portion 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by variable display in which identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be composed of an assembly of multiple LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (simultaneously blinking of all LEDs) or cyclically turned on (any 1 LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the normal display 53, the variation display game is executed by variation display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general map display 53 is also a special map 1 display 5.
1 and the special figure 2 display 52 can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (flashing) that repeats turning on and off as symbols (fourth special symbol described later), and starting each special diagram variable display game. (Pending) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the game control device 100 measures the change time of the change display in the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the general display display 53 of the collective display device 50, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (the special figure 1 hold LED 1 and the special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (the first start memory number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED1, special figure 2 hold LED2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit. However, in the case other than during the big win state (including the case where the reach described later is generated in the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, wins the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30 b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is passed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball in the special figure 1 variable display game,
A predetermined upper limit number is stored as a limit, and a game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored with a predetermined upper limit number as a limit.

When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and the display device 4.
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 display 52 to display the special figure 2 based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run the variable display game.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). Also,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. In addition, in the special display variation display game, as the other special display design (identification information), the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 display the fourth special design by repeating turning on and off (flashing). fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined time from the start when the light is off and “lights off” and when it is a big hit or a small hit, it is “lit”.

When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed design, and the big hit state (
Special gaming state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Note that the total opening time of the big prize opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state Value (number of balls acquired)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is in an open state, but the big hit state may be referred to as a first special game state, and the small hit state may be referred to as a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36 is not limited.
a. The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is a gaming control device 10
0 (main board), the game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111 and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal resonator and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , Gaming microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is a game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like, and a setting key switch 93 for changing a setting value related to the game condition (game) can be changed according to the operation of the operator. Setting value change switch 102 that can change the setting value related to gaming conditions
And comprising. In this embodiment, the setting value related to the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation entry rate) other than the big hit probability also depend on the probability setting value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game conditions is configured. In this embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. However, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. It may be provided in the game control device 100 and a signal from the confirm button switch may be used as a confirm signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that they can be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Is done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In this embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is provided.
2 (main body frame) may be provided at a position that cannot be accessed unless it is opened.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9
When 3 is in the on state, the operator sets the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
By operating, it is possible to change settings (setting values) related to gaming conditions such as the probability of jackpot and the probability variation entry rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is a setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state in which the setting is being changed is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set variable.

In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in six stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). Setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the set value change process, the operator changes the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).
Each time is operated, the setting value (setting) is changed as follows: setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 →. Change to and select. Instead of operating the setting value changing button, the setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. The set value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. The probability set value display device 143 is connected to the set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit.
The display may be changed directly in conjunction with the operation. As will be described later, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Also good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, a touch switch signal is generated from the game control device 1.
When the value is input to 00, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability set value area in the RWM (storage means), and the set value changing process ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, setting). It is also possible to configure.

On the other hand, after the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change from the off state to the on state.
become. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The set values 1 to 6 selected may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for the fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 for confirmation. . The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by sound from a speaker.

The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA
M clear switch), an initialization switch signal is generated when the initialization switch is on when power is turned on (power recovery), and the gaming microcomputer 11 is based on this signal.
Processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the RAM 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and read / write RA at any time
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as ROM 111b or RAM 11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode (a big hit mode) is different (expected value is different).
N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach. Note that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is such that no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least when a special result mode is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game (
In the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a performs the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the variation pattern tables is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, the CPU 11
When executing a special figure fluctuation display game, 1a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning prize port 37
Are connected to the prize opening switch 35a and the large prize opening switch 39a of the special variable prize winning device 39,
An interface chip (proximity I) that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.
/ F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
21 output signals from the gate switch 34a, start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, winning port switch 35a, and big winning port switch 39a are detected at the third input port 1.
24.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Also, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), or the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and uses the data bus 140 for the gaming microcomputer. 111.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held in the third input port 124 is stored in the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read out by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Also, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The gaming microcomputer 1 receives the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch, via the data bus 140.
11, a first input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not. In this embodiment,
The out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once inputted to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the output unit 13.
0 is supplied to each port. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is sent from the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 are not supplied. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. The port on the relay board 70 is connected to the gaming microcomputer 11.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37, and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON / OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information from the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information of the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display (LED lamp), but information on the setting value (probability setting value) is sent from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may be output to the probability setting value display device 143 via the LED driver).

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c, a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal in response to an opening / closing data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 39b, and a segment on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135 Second driver 1 that outputs a line on / off drive signal
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the collective display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b for driving the segment line. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V, and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so as to be lit. 4th which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
9 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and a driver 150 that drives the status display device 152. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (
Including a point part, it is an 8-segment type display, and it is possible to display an accessory ratio, a payout rate, and a number of discharged balls. Note that the status display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the ratio of the bonuses, the yield rate, and the number of discharged balls, but may be the one that indirectly displays the number of discharged balls, the yield rate, and the percentage of bonuses. Good.
That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information related to the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
And the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting (counting) a signal from the out-ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the prize winning opening includes a general winning opening 35,
A start winning port 36 (first start winning port, start port 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second start winning port, start port 2), and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning port) are included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100−number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of discharged balls may be counted up from “00” to “99”.

The yield rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of balls released (or the number of balls launched)
The number of acquired balls divided by the number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of prize balls).

In the present embodiment, the payout rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls until the number of discharged balls reaches 0 to 100 each time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest output rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the acquired number of balls (the total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the status display device 152, the payout rate is displayed.

For example, the bonus rate is a big hit state out of the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by winning a winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from turning on the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) (= so-called consecutive character ratio) of the number of winning balls (the number of balls acquired by each role) obtained by winning the winning prize. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of winning balls (in the big hit state and in the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening out of the total number of winning balls (= the big winning opening ratio). Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the big prize opening and the normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize opening) (= the so-called bonus rate (total bonus rate) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.
These are block diagrams of the production control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
And a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 is provided for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program executed by the CPU and various data stored therein.
Program ROM 321 composed of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 providing work area, Fe capable of retaining stored contents even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, or the sound source LSI 314.
Processing such as instruction of playback sound, lighting of decoration lamp, drive control of motor and solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS for giving data transmission timing is input. VDP 312
To the main control microcomputer 311, a wait time for notifying the waiting state of the reception of commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT <b> 0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
31. The special figure holding number command, the decorative special figure command, the change command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are received as production control command signals (production commands). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) a board effect device 44 (for example, a display device 41)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 includes the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled thereby, DC 32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12V for driving a motor or LED, DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15 V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. The VDP 312 (VDRESET signal) and the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
Are supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the 00 gaming microcomputer 111, a random number value for determining the normal hit is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal start gate 34. It is compared with the determined determination value, and it is determined whether or not the normal variation display game is missed.

Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the start memory, the random value for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the big prize opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the opening time of the vehicle is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the power transmission is supported. Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

For example, in the short-time state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map change display game (normal map change time)
Can be shortened to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is also executed.

In the short-time state, the first stoppage time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (for example, 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In the normal operation state, the movable member 3
7b may be set so as not to be opened (the probability of normal transmission is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). Thereby, the setting key switch 93,
Setting value change switch 102, glass frame open detection switch 63, front frame open detection switch 6
4 (main body frame open detection switch) can be read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 which constitutes a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer
A standby time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from 00 normally starts.
Second) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 3).
(E.g., 00), a standby unit for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation.

The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thus, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and wait time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before starting the operation, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. And a situation in which the operation of the set value change switch 102 is not accepted.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads and checks the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (the result of A1009 is “
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the timer value is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) In other words, when the standby time is completed, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, a driver 15 that drives the status display device 152.
0 is initialized (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). In order to make each LED dark with power saving, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four. The control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used in the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1017). And if it is normal (A101
7 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear head address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear head address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear head address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area is an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers, and
A variation pattern random number area for storing a variation pattern random number is included. The control information area is an area from the power outage inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a power outage inspection area 1, a power outage inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152 such as an accessory ratio, and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area and the game control stack area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also,
The status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the lowermost part in FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state or in the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing during the change of the probability setting in steps A1036 to A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is “N”),
It is determined whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1023). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
2 (main body frame) can be determined to be open. In step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is in an open state, or it may be determined whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in an open state. In addition, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), since the setting (setting value) can be changed, the RAM is initialized in the setting variable state in steps A1036 to A1041. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

Game control device 100, when front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in an open state (in a closed state)
(The result of A1023 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is OFF (A102
4 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is on (A1).
025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is “N
)), The processing at the time of normal power-on (when power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, when the set value change switch 102 is on, the game control device 100 (A1
The result of 025 is “Y”), and RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing in steps A1042-A1045 is executed. Here, since the set value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on in the OFF state of the set key switch 93, the set value change switch 102 is turned on by the RAM initialization switch ( It is used as a RAM clear switch. Note that there is no actual situation where the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (the result of A1023 is “N”). The set value change switch 102 that can also function as an initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100
However, the initialization unit initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

In addition, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not match the checksums (The result of A1020 is “N”), an abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to a process for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
The AM clear head address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. R to be cleared by RAM clear start address 1
The AM area is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

When the front frame 12 is in the open state, the game control device 100 (the result of A1027 is “Y
]), It is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting variable state is such that the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM in the setting variable state in steps A1036 to A1041
Initialization processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed. In this case, RA
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be solved.

Game control device 100, when front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in an open state (in a closed state)
(The result of A1027 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is OFF (A102
If the result of FIG. 8 is “N”), a setting change instruction command for prompting the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). Upon receiving the setting change instruction command, the effect control apparatus 300 displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting. With the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the player tries to change the setting (the result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality is eliminated by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. it can.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (A10).
30) Wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

Next, the processing at the time of normal power-on (when power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

First, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area,
A checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring are included. The payout control device 200
The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. After that, the game control device 100 checks an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A 1032 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of step A 1033 and step A 1034 and proceeds to the processing of step A 1035. When the gaming state is a high probability state (A1
The result of 032 is “Y”), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033),
For example, the ON (lighting) data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59, error indicator) provided in the collective display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a power failure recovery command corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and step A1046 Transition to processing.

Next, a RAM initialization process (RAM in the setting variable state in steps A1036-A1041)
Clear processing) and processing during setting change will be described.

First, the game control device 100 clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
. The RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear head address 2 is set when the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”).
It becomes. When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the RAM clear head address 1 is set, so that the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, RAM
When normal, the probability setting value area is not cleared, but when the RAM is abnormal, the probability setting value area is also cleared.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in an open state, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. So that it can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved in the probability setting value area as an initial value.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038).
Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value Save in the work probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104
0). Subsequently, a command for changing the probability setting indicating that the setting is variable (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and step A104.
The process proceeds to 6. The effect control device 300 can recognize that it is in a setting variable state (during probability setting change) by the command during the probability setting change.

Next, RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear head address 2 (A1042),
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear head address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, RAM initialization (operation of the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102)) (
In the RAM clear process, the probability setting value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, an area relating to setting of a customer waiting demonstration area and a production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is sent to the effect control device 300.
(Effect control board) is transmitted (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

In addition, the command at the time of a power failure restoration transmitted by the process of step A1035 and step A1
The RAM initialization command transmitted in the process 045 includes a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of special figures 1 and 2, and a decoration special figure 2 holding number. A command and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. , A power-on command indicating that the power is turned on is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, an effect count information command, and a high probability count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), for example, the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the speaker and the speaker (RAM). (Clear) notification 3
Perform for 0 seconds.

Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of a setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start up (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit.
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C
Performed by PU 111a. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, Big hit symbol random number 2), Random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit (per random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit symbol (per symbol random number) Etc.) as the initial value (start value) of the RWM (A1048).
), The interrupt is permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
This is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the PU. CTC (C different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on TC2)).

In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed.
That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1050, the game control device 100 executes the power supply device 40.
A power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times of checking is set (A1051), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process at 1050. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1050) (A1049), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process. During the setting change (during the setting variable state), it is not necessary to execute the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update.

Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1050 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051 (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1054) and off-data is output to all output ports (A105).
5).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection region check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (
A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

The main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set in various processes, solenoid (big prize opening solenoid 39b)
An output process for performing drive control of the actuator is executed (A1304). If a signal prohibiting firing is output in step A1005 in the main process,
By performing this output process, a signal for permitting firing is output, and the launch permitting signal can be set to a permitted state.

Next, game control device 100, random number update processing 1 (A1305), random number update processing 2 (A1
306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 do not have to be executed when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state).
After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (such as the front frame and the like). A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (such as whether the glass frame is opened) (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability setting value changing process for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A1309). Whether the probability setting is being changed or not is indicated by a probability setting value changing flag (A103
8). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A1310). If the probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

When the probability control is not being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed, the game control device 100 (A131
The result of 0 is “N”), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is issued by the payout control device 2
The payout command transmission process to be output to 00 is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the normal figure variable display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is “Y”).
1311), the special game process (A1312) and the general game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a status display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the status display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, a bonus rate, a payout rate, a number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output process, if the checksum of the status display work area is calculated at power-on (power recovery) and does not match the checksum at power-off, the status display work area and status display The stack area may be cleared. after that,
Timer interrupt processing ends. It should be noted that when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state restoration and the register bank designation restoration are performed automatically, but the CP used
Depending on U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting an interrupt or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off-data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output.
(A1608).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data with the output data for permission to fire (A161).
0), and finally the synthesized data is the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal.
(A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data for the probability setting value display (A161).
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period when the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether a probability setting value display permission flag that permits display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in a probability setting value changing process described later.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the game control device 100 (A16
13 is “Y”), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is input to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off-output data is output as the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). (A161)
5). Accordingly, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the probability setting value, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 is displayed. Goes off (blank display).

Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1).
621). Here, the display data itself of the probability set value display device 143 (7-segment display), that is, the probability set value display data in the probability set value display data area is output as the test signal output data related to the probability set value. Note that the test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing a set value, or output data in another form. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is “
N "), the test signal output data of the probability set value is output as it is to the test signal output port 6 (
A1624).

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (A2001)
Is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A20).
02). When the probability setting confirmation is not in progress (the result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be manually inserted into any of the winning openings, and it is meaningless to perform a monitoring process or the like, step A20
The monitoring process from 03 to A2010 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step A2011.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A2001 is “N”),
The winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2005).
Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, an illegal & winning prize monitoring process for monitoring an illegal winning prize and detecting a normal winning prize is executed (A2008). Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2013).
. Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. Status scan counter value is 2
Is set to monitor the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the error scan counter value is not 0 (A2016)
Is “N”), the winning a prize mouth switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

In addition, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the error scan counter value is 0 (A2
The result of 016 is “Y”), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2018).
.

By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. . That is, if a timer interrupt is made every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 6 ms.

In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (A2008), the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 39)
) And the number of winning balls for each role (total number of winning balls) for the variable prize winning device 37 is counted and stored, and information on the number of winning balls and winning balls for each role is set as an effect command. Good.
In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls by combination (total of the number of winning balls) related to the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. Further, in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and further, the information on the number of out balls is a production command (out ball number command) May be set as The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of winning balls (the number of acquired balls by all functions) to the number of discharged balls. For example, the ratio of the prizes is the percentage (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls earned for each kind of prize) obtained by winning the grand prize opening among all the prize balls is there. In the status display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the status display device 152, an accessory ratio, a payout rate, a number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is performed in step A2013 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.
It is executed at A2015 and A2018.

The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2202 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2207). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2).
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by one (A2212).
. Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match, (A221
If the result of 5 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value change process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is “N”),
A probability setting value confirmation process for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

When the game control apparatus 100 is changing the probability setting value (the result of A2401 is “Y”)
If the probability set value extinction timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether the probability set value extinction timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value turn-off timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405),
The processing shifts to step A2406. When the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0 (A24
If the result of 04 is “N”), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). The probability setting value has been changed when a probability setting value changed flag described later is set. When the probability setting value has been changed (A2
If the result of 406 is “Y”), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

When the probability setting value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is “N
]), It is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). When there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

When there is an input from the set value change switch 102, the game control device 100 (A240
7 is “Y”), the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). Thus, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the work probability set value area increases by one. When the set value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability setting value area may return to 0.
Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to six stages of probability setting values 1 to 6. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a turn-off period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off (blank display).

In this way, when the probability setting value extinction timer is 0, the probability setting value display permission flag is set to set the probability setting value display data as a probability setting value (working probability setting value) whose setting is being changed. When displayed on the set value display device 143 and the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Even if the setting is only one stage (when the setting value is only 1) since the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is operated by the probability setting value turn-off timer, the light is turned off for a predetermined turn-off period. The probability setting value display device 143 can visually recognize that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is terminated. When a touch switch signal is input (the result of A2411 is “Y”), the value in the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting values are stored in the probability setting value area.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting variable state has been entered. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control apparatus 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. . That is, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirm button switch may be set as the confirm operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). Thereby, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control). Board) (A241)
5) The probability setting value changing process is terminated.

In the setting change end processing from step A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
For 0, it is first determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (the result of A2416 is “Y”)
The RAM clear head address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C.
It becomes. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. The clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. Clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 clears information and flags used for setting changes, such as information on the work probability setting value area, probability setting value changing flag, and probability setting value changed flag. The

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change has been completed, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall) is notified that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Output to a computer). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). Thereby, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (
Returning to FIG. 5B, the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands transmitted here are the above-mentioned model designation command, decoration special figure 1 hold number command, decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and probability setting change end. Command (may be a RAM initialization command). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect count information command, and a high probability count information command are transmitted. The presentation control device 300 that has received the probability setting change end command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and
30 notifications of RAM initialization (RAM clear) with the sound of LEDs and speakers of the panel decoration device 46, etc.
For seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability setting value confirmation mode (a state in which a setting value confirmation is possible) in which a probability setting value can be confirmed (A2501). When a later-described probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the processing after step A2509 is executed.

When the game control device 100 is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is “
N "), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress (A2503). For example, it can be determined that a game is in progress when the variable display game is being executed or in a big hit state. When the game is in progress (the result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated so as to make it impossible to confirm the probability setting value. When not playing (A
When the result of 2503 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2).
504). When the setting key switch 93 is OFF (the result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). This
When the probability set value is not being changed (in the setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is “N”)
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation possible state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered. Subsequently, a probability set value display permission flag is set (A2
506). Thereby, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area so that the security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer) that the front frame 12 has been opened. The command for confirming the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirming process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

When the setting key switch 93 is OFF (the result of A2509 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Accordingly, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. And
In order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a probability setting value confirmation end command indicating that the probability setting value confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2).
512).

In the above, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). However, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when power is turned on (power restoration),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is changed (setting change state). If the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (setting value confirmation possible state) is established. If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) can be performed.
If the RAM initialization switch is off, a normal power-on (power recovery) state may be established. Further, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. In addition,
Details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

When the special-purpose game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “
Y "), that is, when the time has expired or when the time has already expired, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). . Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

If the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100
Monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, and performs special figure routine processing for setting the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, setting of effects, setting of information necessary for performing special figure fluctuation processing, etc. Execute (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process is executed (A2609). For details of the special figure fluctuation processing, refer to FIG.
8 will be described later.

When the game process number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, to set the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the setting of the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and processing during the fanfare / interval A special figure display process for setting information necessary for the process is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (direction command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), A process number “3” related to the fanfare / interval process is set and saved in the special game process number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, set necessary information such as a small hit fanfare command (direction command) and a small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing. Save in the special figure game process number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, a process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A fanfare / inter-interval process is performed for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (A2611). For example, in the process during fanfare / interval, necessary information such as the round command (direction command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big prize opening is set, and the process number related to the big prize opening opening process “4” is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, or the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. Medium processing is executed (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as an effect command is set, and a processing number “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing is set, and a special figure game processing number area To save.

When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100
If the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the processing for setting the necessary winning ball remaining balls for setting the information necessary for the big hit end process, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set to the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process is executed (A
2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the general electric power support state (time reduction state) after the jackpot state end is set, and the probability information command (production) Command), a process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area. In the probability information command, the probability state after the big hit state (high probability / low probability) and the number of continuous games in the power support state (short time state) after the big hit state end (time shortening variation number, power support number) This information is included.

When the game process number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A small hit fanfare process is performed to set the opening time of the big prize opening, update the number of releases, set information necessary for performing the small hit process, and the like (A2615). For example, in the small hitting fanfare process, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the big winning opening is set, and a process number “8” related to the small hitting process is set and saved in the special game process number area.

When the game process number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100
A small hit middle process is executed to set information necessary for the small hit remaining ball process (A2).
616). For example, in the small hit middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and the processing number “9” related to the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is “9” in step A2607, the game control device 100
The small hit remaining ball processing is executed to set the information necessary for the small hit end processing (A
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, a process number “10” related to the special figure small hit end process is set, and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (
A2618).

When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol fluctuation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2622). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the winning winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize (A2703). When there is no winning at the starting winning opening 36 (
When the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time shortage (in normal power support state) (A
If the result of 2704 is “N”), the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706).

That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, a winning is not made unless the start winning opening 36 is left-handed, and a winning is not made unless the right-handed winning device 37 is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Accordingly, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state). However, when the start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (that is, the power-powered support state Left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 notifies the user to right-hand (
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes a special figure start port switch common process (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). When there is no prize at the 2nd start prize opening (
When the result of A2711 is “N”), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start port switch monitoring process is also terminated. That is, the second
Prevent further starting memory from being generated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, special-purpose start-port switch common processing (A2708, A
The details of 2715) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). When the number of outputs does not overflow (A2903 result is “N”),
Save the updated value in the start signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), step A
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one. (A2906), and saves the target start opening winning flag (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) (A2912). When it is not a prize at the start winning opening 36 (A2912 result is “N”)
), The process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, in the case of winning at the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit design random number is extracted and prepared (A2913),
Save to the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (A2915), and executes the special figure hold information determination process (A2).
916). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitored start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A291)
8) is executed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. Also,
The starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first starting storage up to a predetermined number. The random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process.
The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control apparatus 100 checks the start opening prize flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) is a win (A300).
1). If it is not a prize at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), step A3
The process proceeds to 004. On the other hand, in the case of winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is running shortly (in the normal power support state) (A300).
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure hold information determination process when it is in the special figure short time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, when it is not during special time (A3
When the result of 002 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is being made (A30
03). When the big hit or the small hit is being made (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit determination processing for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not Is executed (A3004). And when the judgment result is a big hit (
When the result of A3005 is “Y”), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (A3006), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is acquired ( A3007), the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a prize (A3008). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the game control device 100 wins the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y
)), A small hit determination process for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is executed (A3009). If the determination result is not a small hit (A30
10 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and step A3
The process proceeds to 014. On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y
)), A small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and step A143 is set.
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (3) is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (A3016), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), An effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3101). When the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3101 is “N”), whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed. Determine (A3102
).

When the game control device 100 is processing the winning ball remaining ball processing (the result of A3102 is “Y”)
), The process proceeds to step A3105. Also, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (A
It is determined whether the result of 3105 is “N”) and the value of the special figure game process number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hit process is being performed (A3103). When processing small hits (A310
4 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the small hit process is not in progress (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

In the case where the game control device 100 is not processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3104 is “N”)
Then, the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A31
If the result of 04 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and the big winning opening switch 1 (one of the big winning opening switches 39a).
) Is determined whether there is an input (A3106).

When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “
N "), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a) (A3110). In addition, when there is an input to the special prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a special prize counting command is prepared as an effect command (A3107),
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, update the winning counter by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a) (A3110).

When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “
N "), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by 1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”)
) Ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (A311).
5). When the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3115 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the winning ball exit ball processing is not in progress (result of A3115 is “N”),
It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is “Y”)
Finishes the big winning opening switch monitoring process, and if the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is “N”), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of the big winning mouth count (A31)
17) The maximum number of winning prizes is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9
]) It is determined whether or not the above is reached (A3118).

The game control device 100 determines that the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (A31).
The result of 18 is “N”), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether small hitting is being processed (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hits (the result of A3121 is “N”), the game winning device switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the small hits are being processed (the result of A3121 is “Y”).
)), The value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122).
Then, the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area to indicate that the customer waiting demo state is in effect (A3210) (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (
A3211), an effect command setting process is performed (A3212), and “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as a process number (A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216).
The special figure routine processing ends.

Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The produced effect control device 300 performs a setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N
)), The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (A3202), and the special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure routine process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N
)), The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3206), and a special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3207).
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure routine process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, the game control device 100 has the second start storage means (game control device 100).
When there is a second start memory, priority control means for preferentially executing the variable display game based on the second start memory over the variable display game based on the first start memory is provided.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. For the special figure 1 variation display game, variation commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern numbers are prepared as production commands, and production command setting processing is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

First, the game control device 100 executes the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
Is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. For the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command,
Perform production command setting processing.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360).
1) The shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A360).
3) The special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not big hit (A
The result of 3606 is “N”), and a small hit determination process for determining whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 displays the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwriting and saving (A3610), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not the small hit (A3
If the result of 609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the information that is lost in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.
In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 is performed on the second start-up memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not big hit (A
If the result of 3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing) (
Details of A3605 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control apparatus 100 first sets a table (upper limit determination value table) of upper limit determination values corresponding to the probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit determination value table determines an upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380
3 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than jackpot) (A3808), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3
The result of 803 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the occurrence probability of the jackpot is a high probability state (probability variation state) (A3804). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3804 is “Y”
), An upper limit determination value with a high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3805). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3804 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A
3806).

When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is “N”), and the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (Special Figure 1) is less than the lower limit determination value (A3902). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment,
Although a small hit random number is not provided independently and a big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A3904),
The small hit determination process ends.

In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the big hit random number value of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A3904).
. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “
N "), a small hit is set as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability]
24A, 24B, and 24C show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variable display game determined as a result of the above big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23). Each setting (
It is a table illustrated with respect to each setting value).

The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the easier the big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the jackpot random number in accordance with the set value in addition to the upper limit judgment value.
In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (setting value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. Is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase as the set value becomes larger (higher setting). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

In the example of FIG. 24C, regardless of the setting (setting value), the jackpot probability (low probability and high probability)
And the small hit probability is the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determining elements.

Other setting determination factors include probability change rush rate (described later), number of continuation of public power support after jackpot end (described later), number of continuation of probability change state in ST machine, number of jackpot rounds (round number upper limit value), special There are fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time values) of the figure fluctuation display game, various times (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. If the probability that the predetermined contents of these setting determination elements are selected differs for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting determination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this process, the special result type (type of jackpot)
Is selected.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4
005), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and used in the jackpot end process. In other words, the presentation mode can be shifted with the big hit as a trigger based on the presentation mode transition information. Also, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the big hit stop symbol pattern (whether it is a probable big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol, etc.), so the big hit ends with the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit) The transition destination of the production mode to be changed later is changed. In addition, because the production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above,
The transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in effect.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010).
The result of A4011 is "Y"), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hits symbol table is set (A4
012) The stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Saving in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014) and saving the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to the small hit. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A40).
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol pattern. Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special drawing command is sent to the production control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure one little hit Clear the design random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (A40
23) The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101).
If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4
105) The stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the time reduction judgment data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The production mode transition information here is a big hit (
The result of A4101 is set to “Y”) and used in the jackpot end processing. And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4112).
).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110).
), The off-set stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, the special decoration figure command is saved in the special decoration figure command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decoration special drawing command is sent to the production control device 30.
Sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Example of special figure big hit symbol distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (breakdown breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above for each setting.

FIG. 27 illustrates, for each setting, a jackpot symbol table that defines jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) indicating types of jackpots and the distribution ratio thereof. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability variation entry rate increases as the set value increases. It will be advantageous. The probability variation entry rate is the ratio of the probability variation jackpot symbol with a high probability that the probability state after the jackpot end occupies all symbols.
In addition, the number of times of power transmission support after the end of the jackpot is larger as the set value becomes larger in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 especially for the normal jackpot (the probability state after the end of the jackpot becomes low probability). growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4,
5 and 6) the number of times of ordinary power support is set to be the same. Note that the ST machine can be configured to increase the number of times the probability variation state continues as the set value increases.

Also, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (round number upper limit value, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given per jackpot does not change with respect to the set value, but the round number is increased as the set value is increased. A simple configuration is also possible. In FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big win of the special figure 2 variable display game than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. The player is more advantageous than the one-variable display game.

Note that, similarly to FIG. 24C, a configuration in which the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) is the same regardless of the setting (set value).

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701).
Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A4702). The changing symbol can be discriminated from the changing symbol discriminating flag (the special Fig. 1 fluctuation flag or the special Fig. 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 600 is commonly used as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small bonus symbol pattern.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4).
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special-figure game process.
), A symbol variation control process in a general game process described later is shown. The symbol variation control process includes the variation control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) of the variable display game in the variable display unit of the collective display device 50, the special symbol and the normal symbol. This is a process for setting the display data of symbols.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the variation control flag relating to the control target symbol (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the normal diagram) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( Stop) address, display table 1
An address for (variation) is defined.

The game control device 100 determines that the changing flag for the control target symbol is changing (A
When the result of 7502 is “Y”), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (A7503). In this embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the flashing control timer to be controlled by −1 (A7504).
Then, it is determined whether or not the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (A7505). If the flashing control timer after the update is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is set. Corresponding display data is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (the result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is changed. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2
621, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is saved as a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the variation time in the collective display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the fluctuation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0, and the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0 (fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the usual game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, and the overall process related to the usual figure display game is controlled.
Set the display of the usual figure.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the usual game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100
Monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal-variable display game, and performs the normal-routine normal processing for setting the start of the fluctuation of the normal-variable display game, setting the effects, and setting the information necessary to perform the process during the normal-fluctuation change. Execute (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the normal map, in order to shift to the process of displaying the normal map, “2” is set as the game process number and saved in the normal game process number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal game display time. Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). For example, in the process for displaying a normal map, when the result of the normal map change display game is a win, in order to shift to the process for the normal map, the game process number is set to “3” and the normal game process number area On the other hand, if the game is off, “0” is set as the game process number to save in the normal game process number area in order to shift to the normal process.

In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). For example, in the process during the normal game, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, “4” is set as the game process number in order to shift to the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process. Save in the normal game process number area.

In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ). For example, in the baseball remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the baseball end processing, the game processing number is set to “5” and saved in the base game processing number area, and the base ending time is set to the base game. Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal game end process, “0” is set as the game process number and saved in the normal game process number area in order to shift to the normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (A7604)
Is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the processing after step A7614 is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). When there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “
Y "), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A7702). The game state to be hit to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A7702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7705.
If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command
Performs a notification (warning) instructing to turn left by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of reserved drawings is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of held drawings at +1 (A
7706), the address of the per-random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations is calculated (A
7707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A77
08), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (A770).
5 is “N”), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the routine of routine processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901).
. If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per RWM (
Load random number per symbol from the reserved number 1) and clear the random number storage area per symbol (for reserved number 1) and the regular symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) after loading (A7902) . Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value during the general low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7903 is “N”) (A7904).
), When the normal probability is high (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1), which is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability, is set (A7905), and step A7906 Move on to processing.

The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “Y”), that is,
In the case of deviation, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

The game control device 100 determines that the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “
Y "), that is, in the case of a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
. Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

The game control device 100 determines that the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “
N ”), that is, in the case of winning, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4) The stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7915), the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (A7916), and the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one.
As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A7).
920). For example, the variation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
6 is 1500 msec and probability 16/256 is assigned to 3000 msec. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A7921), and the normal process is terminated. For example, in the routine change process transition setting process, “1” is set as the process number for transitioning to the routine change process, and the process number is saved in the routine game process number area. Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area, and the initial value (0 in this case) is stored in the general graphic variation symbol number area. Save.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the number of pending reservations is 0 (the result of A7901 is “
Y ")," 0 "is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the usual game processing number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, a payout command transmission process (A1311), a prize opening switch / status monitoring process (A1307), a magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), a panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).
On the basis of the monitoring result in, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (A9501 result is “N”),
It is determined whether a body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502).
. When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A9504).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), or when a body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”),
The ON data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Judgment is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is stored in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102).
When the data stored in is initialized or at the end of the setting change, a predetermined time (for example, 256)
msec) is set (A1044 and A2419 of the main process). The security signal control timer is timed from the initialization of the RAM or the end of the setting change. Also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1
Setting variable state (setting change mode) and setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode)
Is set (main processing A1037, A2507), the setting of the probability setting value changing flag being set (setting variable state) or the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set During the confirmation state, the security signal may be output all the time. Note that when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the security signal is output. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A
9509), the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 has no board radio wave fraud (A9511 result is “N”).
Further, it is determined whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring (A9513). When the power transmission fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the big prize winning fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag regarding the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area by the illegal & winning prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (
A9515).

When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector (the switch abnormality 1 error described above) is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 uses the off data of the gaming machine error state signal as a test signal. Save in the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9515 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100 determines that the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y
)), When the board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9512 is “Y”), If the result of A9513 is “Y”) or if a prize winning fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “Y”)
Save the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9517)
ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).
). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A952).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game is not 0 (A9521). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9523), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (A952
2 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the on data of the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of the batch display device whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50.
It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (mode of lighting / extinguishing).

During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special display variation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (such as a game state) at the time of power-off before power-on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display at once during the probability setting change regardless of the state when the power of the collective display device 50 is turned off. Display units 51 and 5 of the display device 50
2 can be displayed. Accordingly, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), the probability setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where a game (for example, a variable display game) is not possible.

In FIG. 34A, when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 has a predetermined value. The probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as the display. Thus, during the probability setting change, the game machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by performing a different display (a display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display when the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 are stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value (
A2409) and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value,
Output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the work probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). Good (A1603-A1608 of output processing).

Note that the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

Further, even if the person who does not have the authority to change the setting makes it difficult to visually recognize the probability setting value at a location away from the gaming machine 10, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked with a lower brightness than normal. Good.

In FIG. 34B, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
), A changing information display (for example, the letter “P”) indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) is displayed as the predetermined display. Thus, during the probability setting change,
By performing a different display (display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 from the time when the fluctuation is stopped, it can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game is not possible. In addition, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the letter “P”) is not used in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display part 52. Shall.

For example, the game control device 100 determines that the probability setting is being changed (A240).
1 is “Y”), the process of generating output data related to the information display during change to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (addition of processing steps to FIG. 10), and changing The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (A in the output process).
1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 includes a front frame 12 (main body frame).
Is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”),
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is displayed in the first special figure fluctuation display section 51.
(LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinked.

The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the information display during change may be lit or blinked by using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (outage result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed as the predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. . In the present embodiment, the outlier result (outlier symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) is lit.
Thus, during the probability setting change, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display unit 51, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the initial result of the data to be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the outlier result (outlier symbol) while the probability setting is being changed. The value setting (A2419) may be unnecessary.

For example, the game control device 100 determines that the probability setting is being changed (A240).
The result of 1 is “Y”), and processing for generating output data related to the display of the result of detachment (out of symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10). ), The display of the result of the deviation may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). Further, for example, the game control device 100 determines that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y
”), When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the third output port 13
The output data may be output to 5 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the deviation result may be lit on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

In addition, the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52 (LED for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 is used.
The lamp D2) may be displayed with a display of the result of disconnection. Further, the display of the result of the deviation may be lit using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1
) Is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed. It can be clearly shown in front of 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52, a light-off display shall not be used.

For example, the game control device 100 performs the first special function to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 until the probability setting value has been changed after power-on (power restoration) (the result of A2406 is “Y”). The output data for the figure fluctuation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51.

It should be noted that the special display 2 variation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special map 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display section 5
Both 1 and the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 may be displayed in the off state.

In the above FIG. 34A to FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, LED lamps other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure variation display game (for example, LED lamp D3-D)
18) may be turned off or may be turned on cyclically to display an animation.

In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, during the probability setting change, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are turned on or blinked to obtain a predetermined display. All lighting display or all blinking display is displayed on the collective display device 50. In this way, during the probability setting change, the collective display device 50 displays a display (
By performing a display different from normal), it can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game is not possible.

34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and all-on display of the batch display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, the game control device 100 determines that the probability setting is being changed (A240).
The result of 1 is “Y”), a process for generating output data relating to all lighting display or all blinking display on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed, and all lighting display or all blinking display is collectively displayed. You may display on the display apparatus 50 (A1603-A1608 of an output process). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. Occasionally (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and all lighting display or all blinking display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). .

FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 (
Performance display related to (Spec) is displayed. The performance display is printed, but L
You may display by light emission, such as an ED lamp and a liquid crystal display. As a performance display, a jackpot probability display 85 at a low probability in setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting) 85
a “1/300 and 1/200”, prize ball number display 85b “3 & 2 & 10 & 14”, round number upper limit display 85c “2, 6, 16”, model (official name) display 85d “CRxxx”
xx ”, display of whether or not there is a limit regarding probability variation big hit 85e (here,“ no limit ”)
Is displayed.

In the display of the number of winning balls 85b, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of winning balls of the special variable winning device 39 is displayed in order. The limit on the probable big hit means that the number of consecutive probable big hits is limited to the predetermined limit number (one big hit can generate a big hit for the predetermined limit number of times) Become).

In addition, since the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of the low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (maximum setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the collective display device 50. It should be noted that the big hit probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the big hit probability display 85a at low probability is set to 1 (minimum setting) and 6 (highest setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the big hit probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

Of the big hit probability at the low probability, the LED lamps D1-D of the collective display device 50
Items that cannot be displayed around 18 (a jackpot probability of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in a free area separate from the collective display device 50. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed in duplicate on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the upper right, lower left and upper left empty areas of the game board of FIG. 2A, the members (guide rails 31) that divide the game area 32, etc. May be. Or you may display the big hit probability at the time of the low probability with respect to setting 2, 4, 5 etc. in the empty area | region (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 of the lower left) in a game area. In addition, the display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit related to the probable big hit is displayed as “with limit” only when there is a limit, and nothing may be displayed when there is no limit. Thus, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the collective display device 50
Items displayed as a performance display around 8 can be appropriately changed. For example, some or all of the items displayed as performance display, such as displaying the upper limit number of rounds at the time of big hits 85c on another area or the display device 41, may be displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

Further, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during the setting change, during the setting confirmation, and / or during the customer waiting. . The effect control device 300 previously stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (program ROM).
321). In addition, what was displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. To switch the display of the jackpot probability for each setting, click the production button 2.
It may be executed by operating an operation unit such as 5 or a cross key.

FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B) show a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6). In the case of displaying, a configuration in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10 is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from an oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 during the probability setting change.

In FIG. 35 (A), two hollow parts 51a and 51b (concave part) are provided in the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure variation display part 51 or the second special figure are respectively provided in the hollow parts 51a and 51b. A fluctuation display unit 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35 (B), an annular wall 50 a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG.
These are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, BDP
0003), interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
A command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from 00 is enabled.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Thereafter, the production control device 300 has an RTC (real time clock) 3 as a time measuring means.
The RTC read process for reading time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

The RTC read process may be configured to read time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information every time the process shifts to Step B0009. Further, the RTC read process may be executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (the position of the RTC read process is changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (clocking means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 may replace with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. In this way, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,...), A predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn in such a way that it becomes smaller as the set value is larger. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the selection rate for the long execution period may be drawn in such a way that the selection value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
Hall / player setting mode processing is executed to accept operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystal by the person in charge at the game hall (game shop), the player, etc. (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the production according to the production points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding or clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production point is added by performing the production and operation to be added to the production point, and at the end of the game so that the production point can be carried over to the next game, etc. For example, information including information on performance points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large added value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing command preparation completion setting is executed by completing the drawing preparation to the display frame buffer (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. Instructs screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory action effect for driving a motor is set.

Then, the effect control device 300 returns to the process B0008 after completing the process B0021 described above. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value for the number of received commands (B1103
) The content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command 32.
It is configured to store up to. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300, when copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y
], The received command contents in the command area for analysis are loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the contents is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows the production control device 30.
7 is a flowchart showing a procedure of received command analysis processing executed by 0;

The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE section (MODE command) and A
It is composed of a CTION part (ACTION command) and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command is M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (B1203
Is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and includes a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process in FIG. 42). And
When the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 (B12
The result of 05 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the jackpot command (
B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the jackpot (display of fanfare screen, round screen, etc.). For example, a fanfare command (set by special display processing), a round command (fanfare / interval) Middle command), an interval command (set during the big prize opening opening process), an ending command (set during the big prize opening open process), and the like. If the MODE portion represents a jackpot command (result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1).
208), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B1) when the MODE unit does not represent the jackpot command.
The result of 207 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the symbol system command (
B1209). The design commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (B12) when the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-type command.
The result of 09 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the single-shot command (B
1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 is “N”), it is then determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (B1213). The pre-read symbol system command includes the above-described pre-read stop command command (FIG. 15).
A3014). If the MODE part represents a pre-read symbol system command (B
The result of 1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

The production control device 300 (in the case where the MODE unit does not represent the pre-read symbol system command (
Next, the result of B1213 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (B1215). The prefetch variation command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216).
), The received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a model designation command, the production control device 300 (B1
The result of 301 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). When the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (
The result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1305 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a customer waiting demo command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is “N”), and then the MODE section displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2917).
, A3207) is determined (B1309). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command processing ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then displays the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A2).
917, A3203) is determined (B1311). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the production control device 300 (B1
Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / invalid command (B1315). As error / unauthorized commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (set by fraud & winning monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud release command (set by fraud & win monitoring process when fraud is released), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). Glass frame open detection switch 63 as a status ON command
There is a command indicating the generation of a signal (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame open error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorized setting process for notifying or canceling the error or the unauthorized is executed (
B1316), the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then performs a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display). It is determined whether or not (represented by setting) or the like (B1317). If the MODE portion represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out-ball number command. (B1319). If the MODE portion represents an out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball number command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1319 is “N”), and then the MODE section counts commands (A3107, A3
It is determined whether or not it represents a 111 winning prize count command) (B1321). And
When the MODE part represents a count command (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the production control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery of 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1045. In addition, as described above, the set value information command is sent to the game control device 10 when the probability setting change ends in accordance with the probability setting change end command of step A2421.
Sent from 0. When the MODE part represents a set value information command (B132).
3 is “Y”), the set value reception process is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated. In the process for receiving a set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processes are executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1323 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a setting change command (B1325). For example, a setting change instruction command (A1
029), command for changing probability setting (A1041), command for changing probability setting value (A2)
415), there is a command (A2421) for ending the probability setting change. If the MODE section represents a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41 in the setting change system information setting process. Further, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The production control device 300 (when the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command) (
The result of B1325 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). For example, a command for confirming the probability setting value (A2508) and a command for confirming the probability setting value (A2512) are examples of the setting confirmation commands. And MOD
When the section E represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is “Y”), a setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting value is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a display for confirming setting that informs the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command shown in FIG. 1 and the symbol stop command shown in FIG. If the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE portion is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”)
The production control device 300 sets the corresponding special figure stop mode (B1331), sets the gaming state flag to the normal state after all symbols stop (B1332), and ends the one-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of “Fluctuating”, “Big hit”, “Low hit” Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is “N
)) Or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”)
In this case, the production control device 300 ends the single command processing.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch symbol system command processing executed by 0;

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “Y”), a prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop symbol command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure ones on hold. Save (B1602).

In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), that is, the latest special figure hold number command received is the special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number (B1603).

The effects control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1602 and B1603 (B160).
4). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 shows the production control device 30.
10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by 0;

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1701). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1701 is “
Y "), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) displays the latest reserved information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).
A pre-reading variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of pending items is set (B1703), and an in-sub-prefetching variation command MODE portion is obtained corresponding to the MODE portion of the prefetching variation command (
B1704). Next, a pre-reading variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetching variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation-related command is set.
Part is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE section after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the latest hold information and the prefetch fluctuation command area (Special Figure 1 prefetch fluctuation command area or Special Figure 2 prefetch fluctuation command area) corresponding to the number of holds (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B170).
9) It is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach in the same system,
The effect control device 30 is not converted without converting the ACT part (the value of the second half fluctuation) of the prefetch fluctuation command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and it becomes difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as a normal reach-1 stop failure and a normal reach + 1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B
The result of 1710 is “Y”), hold information to be prefetched (latest hold information) is loaded from the prefetch change command area (B1711), and prefetch lottery processing related to the prefetch effect of the latest hold is executed (B1712). Examples of the pre-reading effects include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye-reading effect), a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice or the like) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending prefetch notice effect occurs (result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching notice effect that is generated (such as a hold change notice) is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). If the pre-reading notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300 does not generate the latest pending prefetch notice production (B171).
3 is “N”) or the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1715 is “N”), and the prefetch variation command processing is terminated as it is.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol system command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives the received symbol-type command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. And the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
Part) is set and the symbol type is saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 2R probability variation big hit symbol (2R-A1, etc.) shown in FIG. 27, a 2R normal big hit symbol (2
R-A2 etc.), 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (6R-A1 etc.), 6R normal jackpot symbol (6R-A2)
Etc.), 16R probability variation big hit symbol (16R-A1, etc.), 16R normal big hit symbol (16R-A2)
Etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable command process (B1206) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control apparatus 300 receives the special map type (special map 1) of the received variable command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variation command of a deviation is received. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”)
Then, the variable command processing is terminated.

When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1).
904), a variation effect setting process for setting a variation effect which is a variation effect is executed (B19).
05). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907
).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described variation command processing (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, and setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types The address of the first half notice allocation group table is acquired (B200
3). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation is a reach variation, the production control device 300 has the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, The first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) and the fluctuation pattern type. Is obtained (B2005).

The production control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the latter half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2007). The address of the latter half notice group group corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and the lottery for the notice appearing during the latter half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B2011). Thereafter, for example, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B20).
12). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining a disjoint eye in the case of the off symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of a variable effect such as a reach effect (B2013).
), The display setting of the notice effect is performed (B2014). Subsequently, the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type (
(Holding shift) display setting is performed, for example, a display in which the holding display corresponding to the decoration special figure that changes this time is reduced (B2015). Subsequently, a sound number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode based on the light emission of the decoration device are set (B
2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. .

Note that it is possible not only to set the voice number and decoration number based on the contents of the effect, but also to set by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can change the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2017) In addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41, display setting for the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). In addition,
The fourth symbol variation is caused by the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
2 (LED).

[Big hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the jackpot command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, if the jackpot command is a fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2102). . The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for the current jackpot. Subsequently, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state)
Is set in the game state flag indicating (B2103), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (B210)
4 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The game state flag is set to round (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B21
When the result of 07 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. Set the gaming state flag to “interval” (B2108, B2109)
), The jackpot command processing ends.

When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (B210
7 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents an ending (B
If the result of 2110 is “Y”), that is, if the jackpot command is an ending command, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the gaming state of the current gaming machine 10 Ending is set in the game state flag indicating (P machine state) (B2111, B2112), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received jackpot command does not represent an ending (B
The result of 2110 is “N”), and the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command processing without executing any processing.

[Operations and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 establishes a start condition (for example, winning a start winning opening).
Game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner based on the display part (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52)
And a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) can change the setting related to the game condition (or the setting related to the game) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed when power is supplied to the gaming machine 10, and at the time of power-off before shifting to the setting variable state. Regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10, a predetermined display is displayed on the display unit (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed by a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming machine 1
It can be suggested that 0 is a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) is not possible.
Even in the variable setting state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power-off is maintained, and the normal display at the time of fluctuation stoppage (out-of-order symbol, jackpot symbol), etc. is displayed on the display section for the special figure fluctuation display game. Then, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
There is a possibility of misunderstanding that the game is ready.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, for example, a light emitting unit (for example, LED lamp D1 or D
2). The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
.

Therefore, in a setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed by performing a display different from normal on the display device (collective display device 50). .

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information indicating that it is in the setting variable state in the setting variable state (during setting change) (for example, the first special figure variation display). May be displayed on the part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the gaming machine 10 cannot play a game by performing a display different from normal on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be clearly shown in front of

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is configured to display the display units (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display part 5) in the setting variable state (during setting change).
2) may be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Accordingly, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the gaming machine 10 is displayed by performing a display different from the normal display (a display different from when the variable display game is stopped) on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the game is not possible.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, the display unit). The first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52) may be displayed (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to suggest in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game by performing a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game. By displaying the stop result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) while the setting is being changed, the initial value at the end of the setting change is displayed for the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game. No value setting is required.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The first embodiment relates to a chance look-ahead effect (chance eye look-ahead notice) based on a missing symbol. A chance that is a specific stop result mode (specific off-stop pattern mode) of the decorative special figure variation display game can be selected or selected according to a set value (probability set value), and a set value is suggested or notified by the chance eye enable.

[Stop symbol setting process]
The stop symbol setting process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 shows the effect control device 30 in the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) when the special figure change display game is executed.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the stop symbol setting process (B2012) performed by 0. In the stop symbol setting process, a stop symbol (stop result) of the decorative special symbol variation display game is determined.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure variation display game related to the received variation command is a big hit (B2301). When the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of B2301 is “Y”), the big hit stop symbol (“2” according to the symbol type (B1802))
, 2, 2 ", etc.) (B2302).

When the special-fluctuation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 has 0 as the number of pre-reading effects of the chance look-ahead effect as the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of times of the continuous notice effect). It is determined whether or not there is (B2303). When the number of pre-read effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is 0 (the result of B2303 is “Y”), step B2308
Move on to processing. Note that the initial value of the number of pre-reading effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) depends on the expected degree of jackpot of the pre-reading target hold, that is, the expectation of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game executed by the pre-reading target hold May be set.

When the number of pre-reading effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0 (the result of B2303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the chance eye stop symbol pattern (chance eye pattern, missed symbol group) as the target of pre-reading. It is set according to the expectation level of the jackpot for holding (B2304). In the chance eye stop design mode, a normal mode in which a set value cannot be suggested or reported, a special mode in which a set value can be suggested (set suggestion mode), and a fixed mode in which a set value can be reported in a definite manner (Setting notification mode) (see FIG. 47).

For example, when a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) occurs in a special figure change display game related to prefetching hold (start-up memory), the chance eye stop symbol form is set to the normal form, and the special 2 reach (SP2 reach) is set. Can be set to a special mode when a problem occurs, and can be set to a fixed mode when a special 3 reach (SP3 reach) occurs. As described above, since the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is in the order of SP1 reach <SP2 reach <SP3 reach, the chance eye stop symbol pattern can be set according to the expectation level of the jackpot for the pre-read target. In addition,
On the other hand, when SP3 reach occurs in the special figure change display game related to the pre-reading target hold, the chance eye stop pattern mode is set to the normal mode, and when SP2 reach occurs, the special mode is set to SP3 reach. When this occurs, the fixed mode may be set.

As described above, by setting the chance eye stop symbol pattern corresponding to the pre-read target hold reach type (reach production system), the chance eye stop symbol pattern is set according to the expectation level of the pre-read target hold jackpot. Can be set. Therefore, according to the chance eye stop symbol form, as a pre-reading effect, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of the big hit of the pre-read target. The reach type generated in the special figure fluctuation display game related to the prefetch target hold is the prefetch fluctuation command (B121).
It can be understood from the pre-reading variation pattern command and the content of variation effect (B2010) as 5).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) that suggests or notifies the set value (B2305). When the chance eye stop symbol pattern is the normal mode and the setting suggestion effect is not executed (the result of B2305 is “N”), the shift symbol pattern is shifted from the normal pattern error symbol pattern (the error symbol group) regardless of the set value. Lottery (B2
306), the stop symbol setting process is terminated. When the chance eye stop symbol mode is a special mode or a fixed mode, and the setting suggestion effect is executed (result of B2305 is “Y”), if it is a special mode, from the out-of-specimen symbol mode (out of symbol group) With the lottery probability corresponding to the set value, the slippage stop symbol is drawn, and if it is a confirmed mode, the slipped stop symbol is confirmed (determined) from the confirmed symbol outlier design mode (outlier symbol group) according to the set value (B2307). .

When the number of pre-read effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is 0 (result of B2303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes a setting suggestion effect (setting related effect) for suggesting or notifying the set value. It is determined whether or not to perform (B2308). For example, if you win a lottery,
It may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. When the setting suggestion effect is not executed (B2308
If the result is “N”), the stop symbol is lottery regardless of the set value (B2309). When the setting suggestion effect is executed (the result of B2308 is “Y”), the shift stop symbol is lottery with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value (B2310). As described above, even when the number of pre-reading effects (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is 0 and the chance look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of B2303 is “Y”), the setting suggestion effect is independent of the chance look-ahead effect. Can be executed.

Note that the processing from step B2308 to B2310 is optional and may not be executed.

[Chance eye stop design]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining a chance eye stop symbol pattern in the chance eye look-ahead effect. There are a normal mode, a special mode (setting suggestion mode), and a fixed mode (setting notification mode) in the chance eye stop symbol mode.

For example, “2,4,6” (blue), “1,5,9” (green), and “3,7,7” (red) are not included in the normal pattern outlier pattern mode (outlier symbol group). There is a stop symbol. For example, “2, 4, 6” (green),
There are off-stop symbols of “1, 5, 9” (red) and “3, 7, 7” (blue). Regardless of the color, “○, 1, 1”, “○, 2,
2 ”,“ O, 3, 3 ”,“ O, 4, 4 ”,“ O, 5, 5 ”, and“ O, 6, 6 ”. In addition, (circle) shows the arbitrary designs different from the two designs (Zero eyes) which the inside and right aligned among the three decoration identification symbols (identification information) in right and left.

It should be noted that the stoppage pattern of the confirmation mode (setting notification mode) has a color (for example, gold, rainbow color other than blue, green, red, etc.) or shape that is not used in the normal mode and the special mode. You may distinguish so that it may become easy.

In the normal mode, the selection rate (distribution rate) in each lottery stop symbol lottery is set to the same value regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting when one off-stop symbol in the normal mode is selected is the same (100 / 6≈17%).
It becomes. The probability of FIG. 47 is the expected degree of each set value that can be estimated by the player when a specific loss stop symbol is displayed. For this reason, the normal mode is a mode in which the player cannot estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value cannot be suggested or reported. Note that FIG.
In the example, the selection rate of the stoppage symbol in the normal mode in one lottery is 100 /
3 (≈33.3)%.

In the special mode, the selection rate in the lottery for each off-stop symbol is determined to be different depending on the setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, the probability (expectation) of each setting when one off-stop symbol in the special mode is selected is different (some settings may be the same).
. Therefore, the special mode is a mode in which the player can estimate the set value, that is, a mode in which the set value can be suggested.

In the fixed mode, the selection rate in each lottery stop symbol lottery is set to 100% for only one predetermined setting (set value). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
When one off-point stop symbol is selected, the probability (expectedness) of a predetermined one setting is 10
0%, and the probability (expectedness) of other settings is 0%. For this reason, a definite aspect is an aspect which a player can recognize a setting value, ie, an aspect which can alert | report a setting value definitely.

It should be noted that the three decorative identification symbols in the special mode can suggest a set value by having a specific color. For example, the off-stop symbol “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode is
Cannot suggest setting value. However, the special stop-off symbol “2, 4, 6” (green), which has the same numerical part and only the color, as the normal stop-off symbol “2, 4, 6” (blue),
By having a specific color (green), a set value can be suggested. In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value by having three decoration identification symbols of a special aspect have a specific shape.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating another example of selecting the chance eye stop symbol form (chance eye form, outlier symbol group) in step B2304. In the example of FIG. 48, the chance eye stop symbol pattern is drawn and set with a different selection rate (distribution rate) depending on whether the special figure change display game related to the pre-reading target hold is a big hit or not. Therefore, as in the case where the chance eye stop symbol pattern is set in accordance with the reach type of the prefetch target hold, the example of FIG. The degree of expectation can be reported. It should be noted that whether the pre-read target hold is a big hit or miss is determined by the symbol type (B18
02).

As shown in FIG. 48A, the expectation level of the jackpot for the prefetch target may increase in the order of normal mode <special mode <determined mode. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the expectation of the jackpot for the pre-reading target may increase in the order of definite mode <special mode <normal mode. In the case of FIG. 48B, even if the confirmation mode or special mode is selected and the player recognizes that the expectation of the big hit for the pre-reading target is low, the setting (setting value) is determined by the determination mode. The player is alerted and the player is not discouraged.

If the selection rate of the normal mode, the special mode, and the fixed mode in FIG. 48 is the same as the selection rate of the SP1 reach, the SP2 reach, and the SP3 reach, as described above, the special-fluctuation display game related to the pre-reading target hold is performed This is the same as setting the normal mode, special mode, and fixed mode in response to the occurrence of SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach.

In addition, according to the number of jackpots from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 and the start of the game, the number of jackpots of consecutive jackpots from the start of the jackpot to the return to the normal gaming state (number of consecutive chunks), A configuration in which the selection rate of the definite mode is increased is also possible. Since the determined mode is a privilege for the player, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased by this configuration.

As described above, the chance eye stop symbol pattern is associated with the expectation level of the pre-holding jackpot, and the chance stop symbol pattern (particularly the special mode and the final mode) is stopped by the probability corresponding to the set value. it can. As a result, the out-of-game stop symbol is drawn by the result of the special figure fluctuation display game (holding or losing) related to the pre-reading target hold and the probability (selection rate) according to the set value.

〔Screen transition〕
49A and 49B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the second embodiment.

(A) of FIG. 49A is a display screen during execution of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display region 610, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration reduction symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display region 615. In the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a number “2” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are respectively displayed. The number “0” is displayed.

The hold display section 630 (starting memory display section) includes a first hold display section 630a that displays the first start memory as a first hold display (first start memory display) and a second hold display (second display). 2 on-hold storage display), the second hold display section 630b. First hold display section 630a
Two hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display. At the present time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. In addition, the square frame holding digestion area 64
0 is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen. A variable hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the special map variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the right to execute this special map variable display game)
It is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Thereafter, in (a), a hold (first start memory) is generated by winning at the start winning opening 36, and the hold display 633 (black) corresponding to the generated hold is changed from a normal mode to a mode ( The color is changed. Then, a chance eye look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect) is set with the generated hold with a high degree of expectation of jackpot as the hold for the prefetch target (B1712, B1716). Further, the number increases to the number “3” indicating the number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation number display section 650.

Then, in (c), the decoration special figure variation display game is finished, and the first chance look-ahead effect is executed with the display of the stop pattern “2, 4, 6” (blue) in the normal mode. . Here, in order to make the player recognize that it is a chance look-ahead effect, the whole or part of the shift stop symbol may be blinked. Note that the changing hold display 633a is erased at the end of the decoration special figure changing display game. In the normal mode, the player cannot estimate the setting (setting value).

Thereafter, in (d), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold digestion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. In addition, the number indicating the special figure 1 holding number in the special figure 1 holding number display section 650 is reduced to “2”.

Then, in (e), the decoration special figure variation display game is finished, and the second chance look ahead effect is the special mode (setting suggestion mode) out of stop symbol “1, 5, 9” (red). Run on display. Here, the whole or part of the stop symbol may be blinked so that the player recognizes that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (setting value) is suggested by the special stop-off symbol, and the player can estimate the setting (setting value) (the probability of setting 4 is high according to FIG. 47).

Thereafter, in (f), the next decorative special figure variation display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold display portion 630a is displayed in the hold digestion area 640.
The hold display 633 at the right end of is moved. In addition, the number indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 in the special figure 1 number-of-holds display section 650 decreases to “1”.

In FIG. 49B (ki), the decoration special figure variation display game is ended, and the third chance look ahead reading effect is a definite mode (setting notification mode) out of stop pattern “1, 6, 6”. Run on display. Here, the whole or part of the stop symbol may be blinked so that the player recognizes that it is a chance look-ahead effect. The setting (setting value) is definitely notified by the deviating stop symbol of the confirmation mode, and the player can recognize the setting (setting value) (the setting 6 is confirmed according to FIG. 47).

Moreover, in the case of a definite form, you may display the words 635 as a character image. The serif 635 is selected according to a setting (set value) to be determined by the deviating stop symbol of the determined mode. For example, when setting 6 (set value 6) is confirmed with the deviation stop symbol “O, 6, 6” as in (ki), “Congratulations!” Is displayed, but the deviation stop symbol “O, 1” is displayed. , 1 ”, when setting 1 (setting value 1) is confirmed,“ sorry ”may be displayed.

Thereafter, in (ku), the next decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed by holding the prefetch target. While the hold display 633 moves to the right (hold shift), the hold digest area 640
The hold display 633 (black) to be prefetched at the right end of the first hold display section 630a is moved. Further, the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number in the special figure 1 hold number display section 650 is reduced to “0”.

Thereafter, in (K), the decorative special figure change display game is ended, the changing hold display 633a is deleted, and the big hit stop symbol “5, 5, 5” is displayed. And in (ko),
A big hit round starts as a special game state.

With regard to the above-described screen transition, a line as a character image may be displayed even in the special mode of (e) in FIG. 49A. The dialogue may be selected according to a special mode outage stop symbol. Moreover, the structure which suggests a setting is also possible by the combination of a serif and a special mode outage stop symbol. For example, in the combination of the stop stop symbol “1, 5, 9” (red) and the line “Congratulations!”, The probability of setting 6 (set value 6) is increased, and the stop stop symbol “1, 5” is set.
, 9 ”(red) and the dialogue“ sorry ”, the probability of setting 1 (setting value 1) may be increased.

In addition, with respect to the above-described screen transition of FIG. 49, the whole or a part of the shift stop symbol may be blinked so as to be conspicuous only when the fixed stop shift symbol is displayed. Further, FIG.
Then, the chance eye stop symbol pattern in the three chance eye look-ahead effects is changed every time, but the chance eye stop symbol pattern may be the same every time. And this same aspect is
You may determine according to the expectation degree of jackpot of the hold of prefetch object.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 establishes a start condition (for example, winning a start winning opening).
The display control device (effect control device 300) capable of displaying on the display device 41 a change display game (decoration special view change display game) for variably displaying a plurality of identification information (decoration special symbols) based on When the stop result mode becomes a special result mode (a jackpot result mode), a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting (setting value) related to the game conditions. The starting storage means (for example, the game control device 100) can store the starting storage that is the right to execute the variable display game based on the establishment of the starting condition. The prior determination means (for example, the game control device 100) is configured to execute execution information (for example, the variable display game) on the variable display game related to the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start memory means is executed. And the variation pattern are determined before the variation display game based on the start-up memory is executed.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured so that the stop result mode of the variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode). By setting the stop result mode to a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a fixed mode), it is possible to execute a notice effect (chance look ahead effect, chance look ahead notice) based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Furthermore, effect control means (effect control device 300)
Can execute a setting-related effect (setting suggestion effect) that suggests or notifies a setting (setting value) using the specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode or a determined mode).

Accordingly, since it is possible to suggest or notify the setting (setting value) in the notice effect based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, the player not only estimates whether or not it will be a big hit but also sets (setting value). Can also be estimated, and the notice effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous. For this reason, the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the notice effect, even when the degree of expectation of the big hit is low, the player is more likely to guess the setting (setting value), and the fun of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting-related effect when the plurality of pieces of identification information (decoration special symbol) of the specific stop result mode has a specific color. . Therefore, the player pays attention to the color of the identification information (decoration special symbol) of the stop result mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the second embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses a plurality of pieces of identification information (outlier stop symbols) of a specific stop result mode (for example, a special mode, a determined mode) as the specific stop result mode. Select when executing the derived variation display game (FIGS. 43, 44, 46)
. Therefore, since a plurality of pieces of identification information (offset stop symbols) can be selected when the variable display game is executed, not at the time of prior determination, the burden of processing (control) at the time of prior determination is reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Moreover, in the following embodiment, the same code | symbol is used for the structure which performs the same function as 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted suitably and demonstrated. The third embodiment relates to the initial operation of the accessory (movable member) when the power is turned on.

[Back side of gaming machine]
First, with reference to FIG. 50, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like disposed on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control device 100 is provided via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command (effect command) transmitted from the is provided. Behind the effect control device 300 is a protective cover 737 that covers the rear surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100.
Is provided. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured as described above is housed in the housing portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back surface of the gaming board 30 protrude rearward of the front frame 12. To do.

A storage unit 750 that stores game balls replenished from a replenishing device (not shown) provided in the island facility and arranges and flows down the stored game balls on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12.
Is disposed. A payout unit 790 for paying out the game balls flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

In addition, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100 and a game ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24 are provided at the lower back of the front frame 12. A ball launching device 742 that launches, a connection terminal 743 that connects to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices are arranged.

Also, on the lower part of the back side of the game control device 100, a setting key switch 93 (key switch) and a setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button switch) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) capable of changing settings relating to game conditions. , Button switches) and a 7-segment type probability setting value display device 143 (display, LED lamp). Thus, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are provided inside the gaming machine 10 and cannot be operated (accessed) unless the front frame 12 is opened, for example. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting change device 42 and cannot confirm the display of the probability setting value display device 143. Further, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the probability setting value display device 143 are connected to the gaming machine 10.
Since it is provided inside, it is not concealed (overlapped) by an initial operation of internal actors 44a and 44b and an external actor 95a described later.

The probability set value display device 143 may be provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the internal combination items 44a and 44b and the external combination item 95a. For example, the probability set value display unit 143 may be provided exclusively on the front surface of the game board 30. Further, when the probability setting value is displayed so as to be visible from the front surface of the game board 30, the indicator (LED lamp) or the like of the collective display device 50 may be used as the probability setting value display device 143. May be used as the probability setting value display device 143. Further, even when the probability setting value display device 143 is provided so as to be visible from the front of the game board 30 as described above, it is preferable that only the operator can see without being seen by the player. For example, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible when the operator performs a specific operation on the effect button 25. Further, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 may be made visible by the player using a special member (for example, a polarizing filter) or by receiving a specific signal from a hall computer (not shown). Similarly, the setting changing device 42 can be accessed when the front frame 12 is opened. However, the setting changing device 42 is provided on the front surface of the game board 30, the display device 41, or the like, so that an operator can perform a specific operation or the like. It may be made operable.

In addition, an accessory ratio display unit 68 of a state display device 152 that displays an accessory ratio described later in FIG. 78A may be used as the probability setting value display device 143, and the state display device as the probability setting value display device 143. In the case of using the 152 accessory ratio display unit 68, the four 7-segment types of the accessory ratio display unit 68 during the setting change or setting confirmation (8-segment type including the point portion)
The probability setting value may be displayed on any one of the display devices 900 (for example, the display device 900 at the left end or the right end). In addition, when the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68. Therefore, the accessory ratio display unit 68 can be used for the display of the accessory ratio and the set value.

Further, a cover member may be provided so as to cover the front surface of the setting key switch 93. By providing the cover member in this way, it is possible to prevent the operation of the setting key switch 93 by a person who does not have the setting key or a person who performs fraud, and the crime prevention effect can be enhanced. further,
When a cover member is provided, a detection sensor may be provided to detect whether or not the cover member has covered the setting key switch 93. When the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the second input port 123 as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the game control device 100 can determine whether or not the cover member covers the setting key switch 93. . For example, when the front frame 12 is closed and the cover member is not in a state of covering the front surface of the setting key switch 93, the game control device 100 notifies the display device 41 and the speaker 19 of the error.
, Crime prevention measures and fraud measures can be taken by using LEDs, lamps and the like.

[Production control device according to the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the structure of the presentation control apparatus 300 (sub board | substrate) which concerns on 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment.

In the production control device 300 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the production control device 300 (first embodiment) is provided with a movable body control circuit 334a instead of the board production movable body control circuit 334. (See FIG. 4).

The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the panel decoration device 46.
And a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18).
In addition, a movable body control circuit 334a is provided.

The movable body control circuit 334a drives and controls the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the frame effect device 9 provided in the glass frame 15.
5 is driven and controlled.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the board effect device 44 includes internal actors 44a and 44b (inner movable members) that enhance the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52A is a front view when the board effect device 44 of the game board 30 according to the third embodiment operates.

An internal accessory 44a of the board effect device 44 is accommodated on the back surface of the center case 40 so as not to be visible to the player, and is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the upper side of the display device 41. . The internal character 44a is drawn with the characters “Intense heat” for notifying that the expectation level for jackpot is particularly high. Similarly, the internal accessory 44b of the board effect device 44 is located in front of the display device 41 by moving and covers the lower left side of the display device 41. In addition, the character “♪” for notifying that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is drawn on the internal accessory 44b. Along with the movement of the internal accessory 44b, sound may be generated from the speaker.

In the notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. 44, the production control device 300 draws the internal actors 44a and 44b at a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value and operates them. I can suggest. And the player has more fun to guess the set value,
The fun of gaming is improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the frame effect device 95 includes an external accessory 95a (an outer movable member) that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41, a motor (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 52B is a front view when the frame effect device 95 of the glass frame 15 (open portion) according to the third embodiment operates.

The external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95 is accommodated inside the glass frame 15 so that it cannot be seen by the player, and becomes a hemispherical member above the glass frame 15 when the frame effect device 95 is driven. Protruding. A character 95b for notifying that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high is drawn on the external accessory 95a. The frame effect device 95 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but the front frame 1
2 may be provided.

It should be noted that the production control device 300 can suggest the set value by operating the external accessory 95a by lottery at a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value in the notice lottery of steps B2006 and B2009 in FIG. . Then, the player has more enjoyment of guessing the set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process in order to drive and control the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 95 using the movable object control circuit 334a.

[Moving object control processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the third embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B3001). In addition, it is good also as determining whether it is at the time of a power failure restoration.

If the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B3001 is “
N "), normal control processing corresponding to the content of the effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) or the like is started (B3003). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is turned on (result of B3001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the command for changing the probability setting is received (B3002).

It is determined that the command whose probability setting is being changed is received when the MODE portion represents the setting change system by the command whose probability setting is changed in the single command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”). Is done. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is set.
Is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”), a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A in FIG. 5B).
1041). While the probability setting is changed, the setting value change switch 102 of the setting changing device 42 is pressed, so that the setting value related to the game condition is changed. In addition, information on the set value relating to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

When it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has been received (result of B3002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting has been received ( B3004).

The probability setting change end command is used when the MODE portion represents the setting change type by the probability setting change end command in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”).
It is determined that it is received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (A2406 in FIG. 10).
When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), a probability setting change end command is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (A2421).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (the result of B3002 is “N”), that is, when the normal power is turned on, the effect control device 300 has a main body frame opening error. It is determined whether or not it is occurring (B3006). For example, when a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / invalid command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

When it is determined that the effect control device 300 has received a probability setting change end command (
When the result of B3004 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting change is completed, it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error has occurred (B3006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control device 300 has not received the probability setting change end command (the result of B3004 is “N”).
), That is, when the probability setting is being changed, the initial operation control process is started only for the internal actors 44a and 44b (B3005).

In the initial operation control process (B3005) of the internal actors 44a and 44b, for example, a motor that moves the internal actor 44a and a motor that moves the internal actor 44b of the board effect device 44 are driven to drive the internal actors 44a and 44b, respectively. Is operated to the front of the display device 41, and then is controlled to operate to the initial position (initial operation control). Further, for example, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b is performed after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a is completed. In this way, the internal character 44
The initial operation control of a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b are executed in order. Similarly, when another internal combination different from the internal combination 44a, 44b is further attached, the initial operation control of each internal combination is executed in order. Note that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44a and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44b may be executed simultaneously in parallel.

When it is determined that the main body frame opening error has occurred (result of B3006 is “Y”), that is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened, the production control device 300 has an internal accessory. Only 44a and 44b start the initial operation control process (B3005). As described above, when the setting change device 42 is operated or the front frame 12 is opened, the effect control device 300 starts only the initial operation control processing of the internal combination items 44a and 44b, and the external combination combination. It functions as a restricting means that restricts and does not execute the initial operation of the object 95a.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error is not occurring (B3
If the result of “006” is “N”), that is, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed, the restriction of the initial action of the external accessory 95a is released, and the internal actors 44a and 44b and the external 95a
The initial operation control process is started (B3007).

In the initial action control process (B3007) of the internal actors 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, the initial action control similar to the process of B3005 is performed on the internal actors 44a and 44b of the board effect device 44. In the external accessory 95a of the frame effect device 95, a motor that moves the external accessory 95a is driven to operate the external accessory 95a so as to protrude from above the glass frame 15 (open portion), and then to the initial position. Control to operate is performed (initial operation control). In this way, the production control device 300 functions as a control unit that controls the operations of the internal actors 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a. When another external accessory different from the external accessory 95a is further attached, the initial operation control of the external accessory 95a and the initial operation control of the other external accessory are executed in order.

Further, in the initial operation control processing (B3007) of the internal actors 44a and 44b and the external accessory 95a, the time required for the initial operation control of the internal actors 44a and 44b having a large number of movable actors is greater. Longer than the time required for the initial operation control. It should be noted that the time required for the initial operation control of the internal actors 44a and 44b is greater than that of the external actors even when the operation is complicated due to a plurality of effects of the internal actors 44a and 44b regardless of the number of movable actors. This is longer than the time required for the initial operation control of the object 95a. Further, the center case 40 and the glass frame 15 (
(E.g., an intermediate position between the internal roles 44a and 44b and the external role 95a)
For example, when a movable accessory that operates toward the center side of the gaming machine 10 is provided, it is desirable to perform initial operation control on the movable accessory in the same manner as the external accessory 95a. That is, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened, the initial operation of the movable accessory is restricted and not executed as the initial operation of the external accessory 95a.

In addition, when the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body part) is opened, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted and not executed. However, the external accessory 95a (first effect part, first Only the initial operation of the entire movable member) is restricted, that is, without performing the initial operation of the entire external accessory 95a,
Other than the initial operation, the operation mode (for example, vibration or swinging) of the movable member (second rendering unit, second movable member, character 95b) of the external accessory 95a or the light emitting member (second rendering unit, second movable member) ) (For example, the eyes (LEDs) of the character 95b emit light) may be executable. That is, such a second rendering unit can switch the rendering mode to the initial mode in the initial state before executing the predetermined operation (normal operation) of the second rendering unit. By doing in this way, even if the initial action of the 1st effect part is controlled and not performed, the external accessory 95a is the 2nd effect part inside the opened front frame 12 (main body frame, main part). The initial aspect of can be performed in advance.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54A and FIG. 54B, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54A is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 54B is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process of the comparative example.

First, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54A.

When the power is turned on at time T1, the probability setting value changing flag and the front frame open detection switch 6
4 (Body frame open detection switch) signal is turned on, and the initial operation of the internal accessory 44a is started. Before the power is turned on in advance, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. However, since the game control device 100 and the like are not operating, the probability setting is performed until the power is turned on. The value change flag and the signal of the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) are not turned on. Further, an initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44a is executed (B3005 in FIG. 53). Note that the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is restricted and is not executed.

The probability setting value changing flag is set in the main process (FIG. 5B) (A1038).
When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set in the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) (A2505), it is turned on. Commands corresponding to these flags are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B, A2 in FIG. 11).
508). Further, when the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is turned on (A2202), a state on command indicating a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 ( A2207, A2217).

When the change of the probability setting value by the operator is completed at time T2 (A2414, A24 in FIG. 10).
15) The probability setting value changing flag is cleared and turned off, and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set and turned on (A2505 in FIG. 11). In the first embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.
In the embodiment, the probability setting value changing flag is turned off and the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is turned on when the change of the probability setting value ends. As in the first embodiment, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag may be omitted, and the probability setting value changing flag may be turned on until the setting key switch 93 is turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared and turned off (A2510 in FIG. 11).

At time t1 after time T3, the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a is completed by completing the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44a (B3005 in FIG. 53).

In the present embodiment, the time (initial operation time) required for the initial operations of the internal actors 44a and 44b and the external actor 95a is set to the same time, but may be different times. For example, the initial operation time of the internal actors 44a and 44b, which are likely to be complicated operation modes, is the external actor 9
It may be longer than the initial operation time of 5a. In addition, the production control device 300 increases the motor output to increase the initial operation speed of the internal actors 44a and 44b, thereby causing the internal actors 44a and 44 to increase.
The initial operation time of b may be shorter than the initial operation time of the external accessory 95a.

When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed at time T4, the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is turned off, and a state off command (A2204) indicating that no main body frame opening error has occurred. ) Is an error / unauthorized command as a production control device 300
Sent to. Then, the restriction on the initial operation of the external accessory 95a is released, and the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is executed (B3007 in FIG. 53). As described above, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is not executed when the front frame 12 is opened.

At time t2 after time T4, the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44b is completed. Thus, in the initial operation control process of the present embodiment, the initial operation control process of the internal actors 44a and 44b is
The process is started prior to the initial action control process of the external accessory 95a, and is completed before the initial action control process of the external accessory 95a.

Thereafter, at time t3, the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is completed, so that the gaming machine 1
You can play with 0.

Next, the timing of the initial operation control process according to the comparative example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54B. Note that the probability setting value changing flag, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag, and the signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64 of the comparative example are also from time T1 to time T4 at the same timing as the initial operation control processing of the third embodiment. On / off.

Here, the internal accessory 44a of the comparative example does not execute the initial operation control process even when the power is turned on at time T1, and the initial operation is performed by closing the front frame 12 (main body frame) at time T1. Control processing is executed. Therefore, the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a of the comparative example.
The initial operation control process is started at the same timing (time T4).

Thereafter, when the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44a and the external accessory 95a is completed at time t3, the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44b is executed. On the other hand, the time t3 is the time when the gaming machine 10 can play a game according to the initial operation control process according to the present embodiment as described above.

At time t4, the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44b is completed, so that the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example can also be played. Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the comparative example, the time when the game is possible is later than the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.

It should be noted that although the internal action components 44a and 44b of the present embodiment are subjected to the initial operation control process when the power is turned on at time T1, the external accessory 95a is displayed when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4.
An internal accessory that performs the initial operation control process at the same timing may be provided. For example, the operation mode of a movable member (internal accessory) that affects the game, such as the open / close door 39c of the big prize opening or the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, may be changed according to the set value. Is
After the set value is set, an initial operation control process according to the operation mode of the set value may be executed. By executing the initial operation control process after the setting value is set in this way, the movable member (the open / close door 39c of the big prize opening or the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, which has an influence on the game)
It can be confirmed whether or not the V winning opening (a movable member that opens and closes the predetermined area) operates normally in accordance with the operation mode of the set value. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is a winning apparatus that may be provided in the special variable winning apparatus 39. When a game ball enters the V winning opening, a V winning notification is made and the jackpot ends. The later probability change state (high probability state, specific game state, one of predetermined game states) is determined. In addition, the initial operation control processing of the movable member that affects such a game is as follows.
It may be executed not only when the front frame 12 is closed at time T4 but also when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time T3. Furthermore, the initial motion control process of the movable member may be executed when the change of the probability setting at time T2 is completed.

Further, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened for the command whose probability setting is being changed (A1 in FIG. 5A).
The result of 023 or A1027 is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (the result of A1024 or A1028 is “Y”).
The transmission is started from 00 to the production control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B), but it is transmitted even when the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on regardless of the open state of the front frame 12. Good. Further, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, a command for changing the probability setting may be transmitted when the setting value change switch 102 is first pressed.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on after the power is turned on or when the front frame 12 is opened, the probability setting value changing flag is set (the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted). State) A setting variable state in which the probability setting value can be changed may be set, and a state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed by setting the probability setting value confirmation mode flag in this setting variable state may be set. When the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, the operations of the internal combination 44a, 44b and the external combination 95a may be restricted so that they are not executed, or may be returned to the initial position. . As in the case where the command for changing the probability setting in this embodiment is transmitted, the initial operation control process for the internal actors 44a and 44b is executed when the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set. On the other hand, the initial operation of the external accessory 95a may be restricted so as not to be executed.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 including an openable frame (for example, the glass frame 15 or the front frame 12 (main body frame)) on which the game board 30 having the game area 32 according to the third embodiment is disposed is predetermined inside the frame. The inner movable member (internal combination 44a, 44b) that executes the operation of the above, the outer movable member (external combination 95a) that executes the predetermined operation outside the frame, and the settings relating to the game are changed by the establishment of a predetermined condition Possible setting change means (setting change device 42) and control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member. The control means can execute the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the setting can be changed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In the state, the initial operation of the inner movable member can be executed without executing the initial operation of the outer movable member.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the control means (production control device 300) is in a state in which the setting can be changed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on (for example, the setting changing means). Is operated (when the setting key switch 93 is turned on) or when the frame is opened), the initial operation of the outer movable member is not executed. Therefore, when operating the setting changing means or opening / closing the frame, it is possible to prevent the outer movable member from coming into contact with the operator or from interfering with the frame. Can be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment further includes a setting display device (probability setting value display device 143) capable of displaying a setting value corresponding to the setting related to the game. The setting display device is provided at a position that is not concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member (internal combination 44a, 44b) and the outer movable member (external combination 95a). According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the setting display device from being concealed by the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member during the probability setting change, thereby suppressing the operation of the operator from being interrupted. it can.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (the effect control device 300) cancels the restriction on the initial operation of the outer movable member (the external accessory 95a) when the state in which the setting can be changed is completed. Make it possible. According to such a gaming machine 10, when operating the setting change means,
When the frame is opened and closed, the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (production control device 300) takes a longer time than the time required for the initial operation of the outer movable member (external accessory 95a). The initial operations of the accessories 44a and 44b) are executed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the inner movable member having a long time required for the initial operation control is started during the probability setting change, and the initial operation of the outer movable member having a short time required for the initial operation control is This is started by closing the frame (front frame 12, main frame) after the probability setting change. Therefore, compared with the case where the initial operation of the inner movable member and the outer movable member is started at the same time after the frame is closed, the initial operation of the inner movable member which takes time can be started in advance, so that the game can be started. Can be shortened.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, whether the control means (the effect control device 300) operates the setting change means (the setting change device 42) even when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Or when the frame (front frame 12, main body frame) is open | released, the control means (production control apparatus 300) which controls the initial operation | movement of an outer side movable member (external accessory 95a) is provided. According to such a gaming machine 10, the outer movable member stops moving when the probability setting is being changed or when the frame is opened, so that the outer movable member can be prevented from contacting the operator or interfering with the frame. .

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes an opening portion (glass frame 15) that is attached to the main body portion (the front frame 12, the main body frame) so as to be opened and closed. The gaming machine 10 includes a first effect section (external accessory 95a, first movable member) that executes a predetermined operation outside the opening section, and setting change means (setting that can change settings related to the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Change device 42) and control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the first production unit. The first effect part has a second effect part (character 95b, second movable member) capable of switching the effect mode in an initial state before executing a predetermined action (normal action). The control means can execute the initial mode of the second rendering unit and the initial operation of the first rendering unit when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and changes the settings when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The first when it is enabled
The initial operation of the second rendering unit can be performed without performing the initial operation of the rendering unit. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second rendering unit (character 95 b, second movable member) that is unlikely to contact the operator or interfere with the frame is replaced with the first rendering unit (external accessory 95 a, first It can be initialized in an initial manner prior to the initial operation of one movable member.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. The fourth embodiment relates to a setting suggesting effect that can suggest a setting value.

[Processing when setting values are received]
First, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the set value reception processing (B1324) in the single command processing (FIG. 39) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing for receiving set values according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received set value is a normal command (B4001). If the command is not normal (the result of B4001 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4001 is “Y”), the set value is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4002). And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 draws the light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emission part according to the received setting value, in order to perform the setting suggestion production which can suggest a setting value with a predetermined light emission part (B4003). . The predetermined light emitting part is
For example, the projecting effect unit 13 (see FIG. 1), and the light emitting mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is
This is a setting discriminating element that causes the player to estimate the setting (setting value). Note that the predetermined light emitting unit (effect device) is not limited to the projecting effect unit 13, and lighting members that can emit light (such as the frame decoration device 18, the decoration device 22, the panel decoration device 46, and the special prize opening LED 39d) and the display device 41. The display screen can be used.

[Initial light emission mode lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the selection rate of the initial light emission mode (initial color) of the setting suggestion effect that the effect control device 300 draws at the time of receiving the set value will be described. FIG. 56 is a table for determining (initial color determination) an initial light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from, for example, six types of white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and depends on the received setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). The selection rate and selectable types vary.

First, it will be described that the type of the initial color that can be selected changes according to the received setting value. When the received setting values are settings 1 to 3, the initial color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from white, blue, and green. On the other hand, if the received setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as an initial color, if setting 5 is selected, green and red can be selected, and if setting 6 is selected, all types are selected. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player has a setting of 4 or more when the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, a setting of 5 or more when the color is red, and a setting when the initial color is a rainbow. 6 can be estimated.

Next, the change in the selection rate of the initial color selected by lottery according to the received set value will be described.

When the received set value is setting 1, the white selection rate is 80%, the blue selection rate is 15%, and the yellow selection rate is 5% as the initial colors. The selection ratio of white as the initial color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, and the like so that the selection ratio decreases as the received setting value increases. . In this embodiment, the white selection rate is set to decrease by 5% every time the received setting value increases by one, but a certain setting value range (for example, settings 4 to 6). Then, it may be set to be the same. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the white selection rate as the initial color, so that when a player finds a gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, the gaming machine It is easy to estimate that 10 is likely to be a low setting table.

On the other hand, the selectivity of yellow as the initial color is 5% for setting 1 and 10 for setting 2.
%, In the case of settings 3 to 6, it is set to 15%, so that the selection rate increases as the received setting value increases. In this embodiment, the yellow selection rate in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

Further, the selection rates of the initial colors (green, red) that can be selected by setting 4 or setting 5 and the initial colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected by setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than white will be selected as the initial color. Therefore, when the player finds a gaming machine 10 in which the initial color of the predetermined light emitting unit is other than white, It is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 is likely to be a high setting table.

Note that the selection rate of each initial color is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 56, but may be changed as appropriate. For example,
The selection rate of the rainbow in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. In this case, the selection ratios of the other colors are appropriately adjusted so that the overall selection ratio becomes 100% in accordance with the change in the selection ratio of the rainbow.

[Fanfare production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the jackpot command process (FIG. 45) will be described in detail as an aspect in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect changes. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fanfare effect setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received fanfare command is a normal command (B4101). If the command is not normal (the result of B4101 is “N”), the fanfare effect setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (B4
101 is “Y”), the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 is updated by +1 (B4102).

Then, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the big hit number has reached a predetermined number (B
4103). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4104), and sets the fanfare display on the display device 41 and the fanfare sound from the speaker according to the set value. (B4105). The predetermined number of times is 3, 6, 9 ...
And a specific multiple (for example, 3). Moreover, the predetermined number should just be a natural number, for example, every odd number (1 time, 3 times ...) or every integer number (2 times, 4 times ...
Or a specific number sequence (for example, a Fibonacci number sequence of 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13...).

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4103 is “N”),
The effect control device 300 sets the fanfare display and the fanfare sound according to the set values (B4105). Here, the fanfare display and the fanfare sound may be selected by lottery at a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value. Thereafter, when the process of B4105 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the fanfare effect setting process.

[Promotional lottery table of light emission mode]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by the promotion (step-up) lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process at the start of the big hit explain. FIG. 58 is a table for determining a light emission mode (promotional lottery color determination) by a promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment. FIG.
8A is a table for determining the promoted lottery color when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white, and FIG. 58B is a table for determining the promoted lottery color when the current color is blue. is there.

As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the promotion lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is white is, for example, no promotion (white continuation), blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow 6 types are selected, and the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current set values (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promoted lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current setting value is from 1 to 3, the promoted lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected from among no promotion, blue, and yellow. On the other hand, when the current setting value is setting 4, green can be selected as the promoted lottery color, when setting 5, green and red can be selected, and when setting 6, all types can be selected. It becomes selectable. Therefore, the player has a setting of 4 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, a setting of 5 or more when it is red, and a setting when it is a rainbow. 6 can be estimated.

Next, the change in the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by lottery according to the current set value will be described.

When the current setting value is 1, the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the promotion lottery color is 8
0%, blue selectivity 15%, yellow selectivity 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promotion lottery color is set to 75% in the case of setting 2, 70% in the case of setting 3, etc., so that the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. Is done. In this embodiment, each time the current set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to decrease in increments of 5%. However, a certain set value range (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set. ) May be set to be the same.
Thus, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate of no promotion (white continuation) as the promotion lottery color, so that the player becomes in a state where the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is not promoted during the game. By confirming that the game machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that the gaming machine 10 being played is likely to be a low setting base.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promoted lottery color is 5% in the case of setting 1, 10% in the case of setting 2, 15% in the case of settings 3 to 6, and the current setting value is high. The selection rate is set to be higher as the time goes on. In this embodiment, the yellow selection rate in the case of the settings 3 to 6 is fixed to 15%, but the selection rate may be set higher as the set value becomes higher.

Further, the selection rates of the promotion lottery colors (green, red) that can be selected in setting 4 or setting 5 and the promotion lottery colors (green, red, rainbow) that can be selected in setting 6 are set to 5%, respectively. . Therefore, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that a color other than no promotion (white continuation) will be selected as the promotion lottery color, so that the player changes the promotion lottery color of a predetermined light emitting unit during the game by promotion. By confirming that the game machine 10 is playing, it is easy to estimate that there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 being played is a high setting base. Further, the promotion lottery can be estimated that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a high setting base, so that it can be connected to the motive of the continued game of the player.

Subsequently, the promoted lottery color of the setting suggestion effect when the current color of the predetermined light emitting unit is blue is shown in FIG.
As shown in B), for example, it is selected from five types of no promotion (blue continuation), yellow, green, red, rainbow,
As in the case where the current color is white as described above, the selection rate and selectable types change according to the current setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6).

First, it will be described that the types of promoted lottery colors that can be selected change according to the current set value. When the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 2, the promotion selection lottery color of the setting suggestion effect is selected as either no promotion or yellow. On the other hand, when the current setting value is setting 3, green can be selected as the promoted lottery color. When setting 4 or setting 5, green and red can be selected. All types can be selected. Therefore, the player is set to 3 or more when the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit of the gaming machine 10 is green, and is set to 4 when it is red.
As described above, when it is a rainbow, it can be estimated that the setting is 6.

Next, the change in the selection rate of the promoted lottery color selected by lottery according to the current set value will be described.

When the current setting value is 1, the selection rate of no promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color is 9
5%, yellow selectivity is 5%. The selection rate without promotion as the promoted lottery color is 80% in the case of setting 2 or setting 3, 75% in the case of setting 4, and the selection rate decreases as the current setting value increases. It is set as follows. In the present embodiment, every time the current set value increases by one, the selection rate without promotion is set to the same value or decrease. In this way, the lower the set value, the higher the selection rate without promotion (blue continuation) as the promotion lottery color.
By confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit is in a state of no promotion during the game, the player estimates that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a low setting table. It becomes easy to do.

On the other hand, the selection rate of yellow as the promoted lottery color is 5% for setting 1, 20% for setting 2, 15% for setting 3 or setting 4, and setting 5 or setting 6 In this case, it is set to 20%. Here, the selection rate of yellow as the promoted lottery color is set to 3 or 4 (15%)
In contrast, the setting 2 (20%), which is a low setting, has a higher selection rate. However, in the case of setting 3, the selection rate with promotion is yellow selection rate (15%) and green selection rate (20%).
%), Which is equivalent to the selection rate with promotion in the case of setting 2. In addition, setting 2
Compared with the case of setting 3, in the case of setting 3, there is a possibility that it will be promoted to green by two steps at a stretch.
In the case of, there is a possibility that it will become red after being promoted by 3 levels. In the case of setting 5, there is a possibility that the promoted lottery color will be promoted to 3 levels up to red at once, and in the case of setting 6 there is a possibility of being promoted to 4 levels to rainbow. Therefore, it is easy for the player to estimate that the gaming machine 10 in the game is likely to be a high setting table by confirming that the promotion lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted in multiple stages during the game. Become.

In addition, as with the case where the current color of a predetermined light emitting unit is green or later, the setting selection effect promotion lottery color (not shown) is promoted or promoted to a higher color as in the case where the current color is blue. Promotional lottery color determination can be made. According to such an aspect, the player confirms that the promoted lottery color of the predetermined light emitting unit has been promoted to a higher rank (red or rainbow) during the game, so that the gaming machine 10 in the game is set high. It is easy to estimate that it is highly possible

In the present embodiment, the case where the promotion lottery is performed in the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process has been described. However, a demoted lottery may be performed. By performing the demotion lottery, for example, when the current color of a predetermined light emitting unit is blue, it can be changed to white.

In addition, when the demotion lottery is performed, for example, after the promotion to the rainbow, the demotion lottery may not be performed. By not performing the relegation lottery after reaching the rainbow in this way, the player can continuously obtain a sense of accomplishment that the setting suggestion effect of the high setting (setting 6) has been reached, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

Furthermore, although multi-stage promotion was possible in the promotion lottery, it may be demoted to a lower color one step at a time in the downgrade lottery. In this way, in the relegation lottery, it is possible to avoid the setting suggestion effect falling to a low setting at once and avoiding discouragement of the player by avoiding the aspect of being demoted at multiple stages, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the selection rate of each promoted lottery color is not limited to the mode of FIG. 58 and can be changed as appropriate, similarly to the selection rate of the initial color described with reference to FIG. For example, the rainbow selection rate in setting 6 is not limited to 5%, and may be 1% or 10%. Further, as the current color becomes a higher color, the selection rate of the higher color may be increased. Specifically, for example, setting 6
If the current color is green, the rainbow selection rate is set to 10%, and if the current color is red, the rainbow selection rate is set to 35%. The selectivity of can be increased.

[Ending effect setting process]
Note that the manner in which the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect in the jackpot command process (FIG. 45) described above is not limited to the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) (see FIG. 57), but an ending effect setting as shown in FIG. It may be generated in the process (B2111). FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of ending effect setting processing according to a modification of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received ending command is a normal command (B4201). When the command is not normal (the result of B4201 is “
N "), the ending effect setting process ends. If the command is normal (B420
1 is “Y”), and the number of jackpots stored in the RAM or the like of the production control device 300 is +1
Update (B4202).

Then, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the big hit number has reached a predetermined number (B
4203). When the number of big hits is a predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “Y”),
The production control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (B4204), and sets the ending display and the ending sound from the speaker according to the set value. (B4205). Here, the ending display and the ending sound may be selected by lottery at a selection rate (probability) corresponding to the set value. The predetermined number may be a natural number, and may be set every specific multiple, every odd number or every integer number, or set to be a specific number sequence.

On the other hand, when the number of big hits is not the predetermined number (the result of B4203 is “N”),
The production control device 300 sets the ending display and the ending sound according to the set values (
B4205). Thereafter, when the process of B4205 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the ending effect setting process.

The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by the promotion lottery of the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery (B4204) in the ending effect setting process at the start of the big hit is the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG. It may be the same as the lottery (B4104).

[Processing when the number of out balls is received]
Further, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed when the number of out balls is received. FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the out ball number reception which concerns on 4th Embodiment (B1320 of FIG. 39).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received out-ball number command is a normal command (B4301). When the command is not normal (the result of B4301 is “N
”), The process when the number of out balls is received is terminated. If the command is normal (the result of B4301 is “Y”), the number of out balls is stored in the RAM or the like of the effect control device 300 (B4302).
The number of out balls can be counted, for example, in a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 8).

Then, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of out balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
303). When the number of out balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit according to the received set value (
B4304). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and can be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (such as every 1000 balls, ie, 1000, 2000, 3000,...). In addition,
The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by the lottery (B4304) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of out balls is not the predetermined number (the result of B4303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the process at the time of receiving the out ball number.

[RTC read processing]
Furthermore, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed during the RTC read process (B0009) in the main process (FIG. 36). FIG. 61 shows an RTC read process (B
[0009] FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received signal from the RTC 338 is a normal signal (B4401). When the signal is not normal (result of B4401 is “N”)
Then, the RTC reading process is terminated. When the signal is normal (the result of B4401 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current time (B4402). Information indicating the current time is generated by a signal from the RTC 338 serving as a time measuring means.

Then, the production control device 300 calculates an elapsed time from the start of the game (or power on) (
B4403), it is determined whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time (B4404). When the elapsed time is the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “Y”), the production control device 300
A light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit is selected in accordance with the received set value (B4405). The predetermined time can be set, for example, every 2 hours (for example, 11:00, 13:00, 15:00, ...). The selection rate of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by lottery (B4405) is shown in FIG.
This may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above.

On the other hand, when the elapsed time is not the predetermined time (the result of B4404 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the RTC reading process.

[Count information setting process]
Also, at the time of count information setting processing in the single command processing (FIG. 39) (B1322)
In addition, the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of count information setting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (big prize opening count command) is a normal command (B4501). If the command is not normal (the result of B4501 is “N”), the count information setting process is terminated. When the command is a normal command (the result of B4501 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the jackpot operation is being performed (B4502). If the jackpot operation is not in progress (the result of B4502 is “N”), the count information setting process is terminated.

When the big hitting operation is being performed (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number by +1 (B4503). Add the number of winning balls of the big prize opening to the number of winning balls (B45
04), update setting of the number of winning appearance display and count display (display of count number) is set (B45)
05). Here, the count number and the number of winning balls are the count number and the number of winning balls in the villa from the start of the big hit to the return to the normal gaming state. The number of earned balls may be used, or the total count from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 and the number of earned balls may be used.

Then, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the number of earned balls has reached a predetermined number (B4).
506). When the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 promotes lottery for the light emission mode (color) of the special winning opening LED 39d according to the received set value. (B4507). The predetermined number may be a natural number, and may be set, for example, every multiple of a specific number (such as every 5000 balls, ie, 5000, 10,000, 15000...). Note that the selection rate of the light emission mode (promotional lottery color) by the promotion lottery (B4507) may be the same as the lottery (B4104) in the fanfare effect setting process described above with reference to FIG.
Next, the display of the number of winning balls, the count display, and the like are set according to the set value as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63A, 63B, and 64 (B4508). In this case, the display modes such as the display of the number of winning balls and the count display are drawn at a selection rate according to the set value.

On the other hand, when the number of winning balls is not the predetermined number (the result of B4506 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the count information setting process.

In the count information setting process, when the jackpot operation is being performed (the result of B4502 is “Y”), the number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls (B4504), and the big winning LED 3
Although the 9d emission mode (color) was promoted by lottery (B4507), by adding the winning prize to the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 to the earned number of balls in the normal gaming state,
A light emitting unit (LED) provided in the start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 may emit light according to a set value.

Here, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 63A and 63B that the update setting of the acquired number-of-balls display and the count display is set to a display setting corresponding to the set value. FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when a big hit is made in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a diagram showing another example. In the example of FIG. 63A and FIG. 63B, when the number of balls to be earned reaches a predetermined number, the display mode of the display of the number of balls to be earned, the count display, and other information is drawn at a selection rate according to the set value. Display settings.

When the number of winning balls has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “N
The display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round “)” is as shown in FIG. 63A, for example.

In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds is displayed by, for example, “1” R and numerical notation (Arabic numerals (“1, 2, 3,...”)). Also, a right-handed instruction notification 691 that is a notification instructing to make a right-hand shot is displayed in the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screen. In addition, at the left end of the display screen, the big hit result mode (hit stop symbol,
The jackpot stop symbol “7, 7, 7” (stop result, stop symbol) of the special variation display game immediately before the special result mode is displayed, for example, as “7” in numerical notation (Arabic numerals). And
In the lower right corner of the display screen, an effect point display 678 for displaying effect points is, for example, “00”.
30 "pt and a numerical notation (Arabic numerals). In the middle right corner of the display screen, an acquired number-of-balls display 681 and a count display 682 are displayed as numbers (4910), “150”, for example (
(Arabic numerals).

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round when the number of winning balls is a predetermined number (for example, 5000) (the result of B4506 is “Y”) is as shown in FIG. 63B, for example.

Here, for example, as the set value is lower, as shown in FIG. 64A, the current jackpot round number display 676 (“壱” R) and the production point display 678 (“30” pt) are displayed in Chinese characters (
It becomes easy to display with kanji ("壱, 弐, san ..."). In addition, the current number of appearances 68
1 (“5 thousand” both) and the count display 682 (“one hundred fifty-seven”) are displayed in kanji (kanji (“壱, 弐,
It becomes easy to display with "...")).

FIG. 64 is a diagram for determining the display mode of the acquired number-of-plays display 681, count display 682, and other information display (hit round number display 676, effect point display, etc.) as setting suggestion effects in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of this table. FIG. 64A is a table showing that the selection rate (distribution rate) of Arabic numerals (numeric notation) or kanji (kanji notation) changes according to the set value, and FIG. 64B shows the set value. It is a table which shows that the selection rate of a color changes according to it.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the selection rate for numerical notation is 45%, and the selection rate for kanji notation is 5%.
5%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the selection rate for numerical notation is as high as 75% and the selection rate for kanji notation is as low as 25%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming whether the display on the display screen is in numerical notation or kanji notation when the setting suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, when it becomes a numerical description, it becomes the same display screen as the case where the number of acquired balls is not a predetermined number as shown in FIG. 63A. In addition, when the number of balls to be earned is a predetermined number, the jackpot stop symbol 677 may be displayed in kanji notation (“7 (or lacquer)”) according to the set value, such as “setting suggestive effect occurs!” May be displayed on the display screen to notify the player that the setting suggestion effect has occurred. In addition to numeric notation and kanji notation, other notation formats (for example, Roman numerals (
The selection rate may be set so as to be displayed as “I, II, III.

Further, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined by changing the selection rate such as numeric notation and kanji notation, and changing the selection rate of the color displayed according to the set value as shown in FIG. May be.

For example, in the case of setting 1, the black selectivity is 35% and the blue selectivity is 45%. On the other hand, in the case of setting 6, the black selectivity is as high as 70% and the blue selectivity is as low as 20%. Therefore, the player can estimate the set value by confirming the color of the display screen when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

When the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the red selection rate is 20%, and the even number (2, 4,
In the case of 6), the red selectivity is 10%. Therefore, the player can estimate that the setting value is an odd number or an even number by confirming whether or not the display on the display screen is red when the setting suggestion effect is performed.

Thus, the player can estimate the set value from the display screen by determining the display mode of the display screen of the display device 41 during the big hit round according to the set value and performing the setting suggestion effect. Note that the display mode of the display screen is not limited to the numerical notation or the color, but may be performed by changing the character size, font, or the like. Moreover, it is good also as displaying the predetermined | prescribed symbol according to a setting value, a figure, etc. on a display screen by setting suggestion production.

[Modification of light emission mode change (promotion, etc.)]
Note that the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit may be changed (promoted) from the initial light emission mode (initial color) during execution of the special figure variation display game. In this case, regarding the relationship between the degree of expectation of jackpots, if it is not a jackpot (when the degree of expectation is low), the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value
Thus, it is possible to adopt a mode that does not change as it is, or a mode that changes from a light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value to a light emission mode corresponding to the expected level of performance. Note that, after the special figure variation display game is over, the predetermined light emitting unit may be returned from the light emitting mode corresponding to the degree of expectation to the light emitting mode (initial color) corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, when it is not a big hit (when the degree of expectation is low), the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit can be easily promoted at a low setting value so as to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation. In a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table such as 58 are reversed (for example, the mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed) May be interested.

On the other hand, in the case of big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), similarly, the light emission mode corresponding to the set value is changed, or the light emission mode corresponding to the set value is changed to the light emission mode corresponding to the expected level of production. It is good also as an aspect which changes. After the special figure change display game is over,
You may return a predetermined light emission part to the light emission mode (initial color) corresponding to a setting value from the light emission mode corresponding to an expectation degree. In this way, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game), the setting value is set according to the expectation that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes a big hit (special result). It is possible to switch between a corresponding light emission mode (setting suggesting effect) and a light emission mode corresponding to the expected level of the effect (expected degree notification effect for notifying the expected level).

Therefore, when the big hit expectation is high, changing the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notifying effect and notifying the big hit expectation will increase the game and improve the fun of the game.
On the other hand, if the expectation level is low, changing the expectation notification effect to the setting suggestion effect can give the player expectations, which can improve the fun of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine There is.

Further, in the case of a big hit (when the degree of expectation is high), the light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit is made difficult to be promoted at a high setting value so as to make it easier to pay attention to the effect on the display device 41. Is a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 6 in the promotion lottery table of FIG. 58 or the like are reversed (for example, a mode in which the selected ratios of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 4 to 6 are reversed). The light emitting mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at the time of high setting may be uninteresting for the player. In this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to promote the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit at a high setting value. As a result, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation in a well-balanced manner without excessively expecting a sense of expectation on the display device 41 and a light emission mode with a low expectation of a predetermined light emitting unit. Since the presentation on the display device 41 does not correspond to the light emission mode of the predetermined light emitting unit, the production is surprising and the interest can be improved.

In other cases (when the player is paying attention to the display device 41 at the time of winning notification or at the start of a big hit, etc.), the predetermined light-emitting unit is temporarily changed to a light-emitting mode based on the effect, and the display device 41 is not watched. You may return to the light emission mode of the ratio based on a setting value by becoming a state (situation). Furthermore, even when the effect watched by the display device 41 is being performed, the light emission mode may be based on the set value regardless of the effect. In addition, the light emission mode (color) having low expectation may be changed to the light emission mode based on the effect.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
Next, the details of the hole / player setting mode process (B0011) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing according to the fourth embodiment executed by the effect control device 300.

The hall / player setting mode process activates the hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game shop) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or the player setting mode in which the player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 Can be made.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B4601).
). When a hole setting mode flag to be described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When in the hole setting mode (result of B4601 is “Y”), B4
Perform the processing of 606-B4616, the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game shop)
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operations of the effect button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b.

The effect control device 300 determines that the result of B4601 is “N” when not in the hall setting mode.
), It is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in effect (B4602). When a player setting mode flag to be described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being set. When in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “Y”), the processing of B4620-B2425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the player control mode 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B4602 is “N”).
), It is determined whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4603). For example, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. Note that “waiting for a customer” refers to a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41, for example. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B4603 is “N”), the process of B4617 is executed.

When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. Start setting is performed (B4604). Then, a hole setting mode flag is set (B4605).

Next, the production control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall or the like (B4).
606), Hall LED adjustment processing (B4607) for adjusting the luminance (brightness) and emission color of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, and the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41
Liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B4608) for adjusting the brightness of the power and power saving setting processing (B4609) for setting power saving. Next, the production control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the light emission color of the logo character (B4610).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B4611). When an operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010),
It can be determined that there has been a setting confirmation operation input. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4611 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated.

Then, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B4611 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed with the factory default setting (B4612). If there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of factory shipment has been confirmed. If the setting at the time of shipment from the factory is not confirmed (the result of B4612 is “N”), B461
Proceed to step 4. When the factory setting is confirmed (the result of B4612 is “Y”), the factory setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments by the factory setting is executed (B4613).
). The factory default setting is a default setting stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as volume and various luminances determined in B4606-B4610 and B4613 is stored in a backup memory (for example, FeRAM 32).
3) is written (B4614).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B4615). Then, the hall setting mode flag is cleared (B4616).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 (B460)
3 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B4617).
). While waiting for a customer, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010). When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
The result of 4617 is “N”), and the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B4618). Then, a player setting mode flag is set (B4619).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the sound volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620), the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED adjustment process (B4621) for adjusting the brightness (brightness) of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B4622). Then, it is determined whether or not a setting confirmation operation input has been made (B4623). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B4623 is “Y”), a screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B4624).
. Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B4625). B4620-
The player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in B4622 may be erased and is not written to the backup memory.

[Example of display screen in hall setting mode]
FIG. 66A shows the display device 4 in the hole setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of 1 display screen.

When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the hall setting mode (B4604), and a volume is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 66A. Setting window 711, emission color setting window 712, and brightness setting window 713
Is displayed. The volume setting window 711 is a display used for the hall volume adjustment process (B4606), and the brightness setting window 713 is a hall LED adjustment process (B4607) or a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B
4608). The emission color setting window 712 is configured to adjust the hall LED adjustment process (B
4607), and is a display for switching the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table in the predetermined light emitting unit as described above to the hole emission color selected in the hall setting. As described above, the sound volume setting window 711, the light emission color setting window 712, and the brightness setting window 713 are operated by operating the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall.
(Including the operation of).

By selecting one of the colors as the hole emission color in the emission color setting window 712, the hole emission color can be preferentially displayed on a predetermined light emitting unit. Therefore, for example, by setting the hole emission color to red or rainbow (specific emission color) that suggests a high setting, it can be made to appear that a high setting table is lined up in an event etc. it can. In this way, the light emission color setting window 712 and the hall LED adjustment process are the second setting means that cannot be set by the player and can only be set by the person in charge of the hall, etc. Function. During the hall setting mode, the decorative special symbol (identification information), the hold display unit 630, the hold display 633, the hold digest area 640, and the special figure changing hold display 64 are displayed.
The display related to the game such as 3 may be hidden. Since the hole setting mode is not performed during the game, by removing unnecessary ones, it is possible to make the display related to the hole setting mode easier to see and reduce the processing load. In addition, when the display related to the game is not displayed, only the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) 616 may be displayed.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect is displayed with priority given to the hole emission color over what is performed according to the lottery table. Can prioritize the setting suggestion effect performed according to the lottery table rather than the hall emission color. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 during the game in more detail by actually playing the game.

[Display example of player setting mode]
FIG. 66B shows the display device 4 in the player setting mode in the fourth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows another example of 1 display screen.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B4617 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 starts screen drawing in the player setting mode (B4618), and the display screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 66B. A light emission setting window 714 is displayed together with a volume setting window 711 and a luminance setting window 713. The operation of the volume setting window 711, the brightness setting window 713, and the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 is performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player (B4620, B462).
1). In the player setting mode, the volume setting window 711 displays the player volume adjustment process (B4620).
The brightness setting window 713 and the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 are player LEDs.
It is a display used for adjustment processing (B4621).

The light emission presence / absence setting window 714 can select whether or not to emit light of a predetermined light emitting unit. For example, when a player selects no light emission, light emission related to a setting suggestion effect of a predetermined light emitting unit is not performed. it can. As described above, the light emission presence / absence setting window 714 and the player LED adjustment process function as a first setting unit that allows the player to set a setting relating to a light emission mode of a predetermined light emitting unit. During the game, the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit is controlled according to the set value as described above (FIGS. 55 to 62), and therefore, in the player setting mode, unlike the hole setting mode. The emission color setting window 712 is not displayed.

In the player setting mode, only the presence / absence of light emission of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. However, depending on the set value, the effect mode of the effect device including the light emission mode (color) of the predetermined light emitting unit can be selected. It may be possible to set whether display is possible in the range, or the emission color setting window 7 as in the hole setting mode.
12 may make it possible to set an effect mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit of the effect device. The effect mode of the effect device is controlled depending on the set value of the effect control device 300 (FIGS. 44 and 55-62).
), For example, the lighting mode of the lighting member, the internal actors 44a, 44
b, an operation mode of the external accessory 95a, an effect mode on the display screen of the display device 41, and the like. Also,
In the player setting mode, etc., it is possible to confirm in which range the rendering mode of the rendering device is set so that it can be displayed by the player, or whether a setting suggestion depending on the setting value is being performed. It may be.

In addition, the production control device 300 may not perform the setting suggestion effect when the fraud is detected by the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), or the like. Reset the default lottery color, etc. in the default color (eg white)
May be displayed.

[Customer waiting demonstration setting process]
Further, during the customer waiting demonstration setting process (B1308) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 39), not the light emission mode of the setting suggestion effect but the hole setting mode (light emission color setting window 712 and hall L
The predetermined light emitting section is caused to emit light with the hole emission color set in the ED adjustment processing. FIG. 67 shows the fourth
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting demonstration setting process which concerns on embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received set value is a normal command (B4701). If the command is not normal (the result of B4701 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is terminated. When it is a normal command (result of B4701 is “Y”),
The effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode (color) of a predetermined light emitting unit to the light emission mode (hole light emission color) set in the hall setting mode (B4702). Then, the customer waiting demonstration start setting is performed (B4703), and the customer waiting demonstration setting process is ended.

Thus, during the customer waiting (during customer waiting demonstration), the light emission mode (hole light emission color) set in the hole setting mode is preferentially used instead of the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect.
Therefore, by setting the light emission mode (hole light emission color) to a specific light emission mode (specific color = red, rainbow, etc.), it is possible to make it appear that a large number of high setting tables are arranged in an event or the like. it can. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect is not displayed on the predetermined light emitting unit, and the player tries to check the light emission mode (color) of the setting suggestion effect. 10 operation may be improved.

When the light emission mode (color) is set in the player setting mode, the light emission mode (color) set in the player setting mode is preferentially used while waiting for a customer (during customer waiting demonstration). A configuration is also possible.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the example in which the color is controlled mainly depending on the set value as the light emission mode of the rendering device (predetermined light emitting unit) has been described. Brightness), turning on or off, or blinking, and in the case of blinking, includes a blinking cycle. Further, if the effect device is a movable body, the operation mode of the effect device may be controlled depending on the set value, similarly to the light emission mode.

[Operations and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes an effect device (for example, a predetermined light emitting unit) capable of executing a predetermined effect, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect device. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102)) that can change a setting value according to a setting relating to a game. The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest a setting value by changing the effect mode of the effect device according to the setting value.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the state of the gaming machine 10 before or during the game, and appropriately suggest the setting value. Since it can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the player can estimate the setting of the gaming machine 10 only from the gaming machine 10 in this way, a setting suggestion tag (for example, setting 4 is suggested) that implicitly suggests a setting value around the gaming machine 10 in hall sales. Shark bills,
It is no longer necessary to install a shrimp tag that suggests setting 5 and a tag that suggests setting 6), ensuring a wide space around the gaming machine 10 and improving its appearance, and reducing the burden on the person responsible for the hall, etc. can do.

The effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a first setting means (light emission presence / absence setting window 714) that allows a player to set a setting relating to the effect mode of the effect apparatus.
, A player LED adjustment process), and a second setting means (light emission color setting window 712, hall LED adjustment process) that cannot be set by the player for the effect mode of the effect device. The effect control means can change the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect by the set value or the second setting means.
According to such a gaming machine 10, the person in charge of the hall or the like uses the second setting means or the like as an effect mode (for example, suggesting a high setting as an effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the effect device)
By setting the hall emission color (red, rainbow, etc.), you can make the gaming machine 10 look the way you want it, and you can make it look like there are a lot of high setting tables in the event. Interest can be improved. Further, since the player can set a production mode that suits the player's preference, the interest can be improved. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into account the needs for both the hall side and player side settings.

According to the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the execution period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation are determined according to the degree of expectation that the result of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game) is a special result. The degree-of-expectation notification effect that notifies the degree can be switched. Therefore, when the expectation level resulting in a special result is high, changing the setting suggestion effect to the expectation notification effect and notifying the expectation level resulting in a special result can increase the game and improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, if the expectation level is low, changing the expectation notification effect to the setting suggestion effect can give the player expectations, which can improve the fun of the game and improve the operation of the gaming machine There is.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 69B. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments.

[Screen transition example when the start memory of the pending digestion area changes]
FIG. 68 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment, and the screen of the entire game when the special figure variation on-hold display 643 of the on-hold digestion area 640 changes on hold. It is an example of a transition. In addition, the lottery of the hold change (holding change during digestion) of the special figure change hold display 643 is, for example, a notice lottery (B2006 or B20) of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44).
09).

FIG. 68 (A) shows a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first decorative pattern A is displayed in the right area 610B in the left area 610A. The decorative first symbol B is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative first symbol C is displayed in an enlarged manner in the middle region 610C, and is stopped and displayed with the symbol "2, 4, 5".

In the lower center of the display screen, a reserved digest area 640 (specific display section, changing pending display area) and a hold display section 630 are displayed as a start storage display area. The reserved digest area 640 and the reserved display area 630 are displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) over the variable display in the variable display area 610. Such a preferential display setting may be executed, for example, in an effect display editing process (B0015).

In the reserved digest area 640, a special figure fluctuation pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion pending display) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. In the reserved digest area 640, the start memory display background 640A as a pedestal of the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in a low quality state on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing hold display 643. . 68 to 69B, rough hatching of the start memory display background 640A indicates that the start memory display background 640A is displayed in a low image quality state (first display mode).

Here, the low image quality state (first display mode) is a state in which improvement in power saving performance and reduction in graphic processing load are prioritized over improvement in visibility for the player. For example, the pixel state is higher than the normal display state. The number is low (for example, displayed with less than 921,600 pixels), brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. are suppressed (for example, less than 50 in 100 steps,
Displayed at less than ± 0 when adjustable from -100 to +100), low resolution (for example, displayed at a resolution of less than 720p (1280 × 720)), frame rate per second (fps) Is low (for example, less than 30 fps) or a highly compressed image is displayed. For example, by performing low image quality processing on the image of the original high-quality start-up storage display background 640A in the gaming machine 10 by processing such as VDP 312 or the like,
Instead of a high-quality image, it is possible to display a low-quality start memory display background 640A on the display screen of the display device 41. Further, for example, both the low-quality image and the high-quality (or normal-quality) image of the start-up storage display background 640A are stored in the image ROM 325, and the low-quality image and the high-quality image are replaced depending on the situation. In this way, the start memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality (or high image quality).

Above the start memory display background 640A, a background object 640B that changes in conjunction with the start memory display background 640A is arranged. For example, the background object 640B is displayed in a two-foliate display mode arranged at the left and right ends as shown in FIG. The background object 640B is also displayed in a low image quality state, similar to the startup storage display background 640A. The background object 640B is displayed with the same priority (same layer) as the start-up storage display background 640A, that is, in an integrated manner. Note that the start storage display background 640A and the background object 640B may be displayed and set, for example, in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44). Also, the background object 640B is displayed as the start memory display background 640.
The image may be displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of A. In addition, conversely, the startup storage display background 640A may be displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the background object 640B.

The hold display unit 630 has a hold display 633 (start storage display,
Up to four special figure hold displays) are displayed. In FIG. 68A, three hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display section 630. The hold display 633 is arranged so as to overlap a part of the start memory display background 640A and is displayed on the front surface of the start memory display background 640A. In this way, the effect control device 300 functions as a start memory display control unit that executes control for displaying the hold display 633 on the hold display unit 630 and displaying the special figure changing hold display 643 on the hold digestion area 640. The effect control device 300 executes display settings for the hold display 633 and the special figure changing hold display 643 in, for example, step B2015 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 44) at the time of hold shift, and when the hold occurs, the single-shot command Processing may be executed in the special figure 1 hold information setting process (B1310) or the special figure 2 hold information setting process (B1312).

FIG. 68 (i) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in correspondence with the special figure fluctuation hold display 643. Multiple variable display areas 6 on the display screen
10, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation mode. In the following drawings, when the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in a normal variation manner, the variably displayed decorative first symbols A to C are indicated by “↓”.

FIG. 68 (u) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the hold is changed due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a change in hold during digestion or a pre-reading notice) during execution of the special figure variation display game.
Here, while the special figure changing hold display 643 is changed to hold, the hold display 633 may be changed to hold as a pre-reading notice effect. In the case of a pending change during digestion, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (U), the special figure fluctuation pending display 643 indicates that the expected change is higher than the normal round display mode by changing the hold. It becomes a star-like display mode.

The start memory display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state simultaneously with the hold change. 68 to 69B, the start memory display background 64
The fine hatching of 0A indicates that the start memory display background 640A is displayed in a high quality state. Similar to the start memory display background 640A, the background object 640B is also displayed in a high-quality state (second display mode). The background object 640B changes from a normal bilobal display mode to a flower-like display mode that suggests a high degree of expectation. It should be noted that the changes in the image quality and display mode of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are executed at the same timing as the hold change (holding change during digestion) of the special figure changing hold display 643 selected as a notice. For example, display setting may be performed in step B2013 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 44).

Here, the high image quality state (second display mode) is a state where priority is given to improving the visibility for the player over improving the power saving performance and reducing the graphic processing load. For example, the pixel state is higher than the normal display mode. Increase the number (for example, display with 921,600 pixels or more), increase brightness, contrast, gamma, saturation, etc. (for example, 50 or more in 100 steps,-
When it can be adjusted from 100 to +100, it is displayed at ± 0 or more), the resolution is high (for example, it is displayed at a resolution of 720p (1280 × 720) or more), and the frame rate (fps) per second is It becomes high (for example, 30 fps or more), or an uncompressed image or an image with a small compression rate is displayed.

FIG. 68 (e) shows the display on the display device 41 when the special-figure display game being executed ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the change display area 610 becomes a disconnect result mode (disconnect stop symbol). It is a screen. The decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 include “
“3, 7, 2” is stopped. In addition, the special-fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and hidden, and the start-up storage display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high-quality state to a low-quality state and are displayed. The background object 640B returns from the flower-like display mode to the twin-leaf type display mode. Start memory display background at the end of the special figure variation display game 6
The display setting of 40A and the background object 640B may be executed based on the symbol type (out of symbol or jackpot symbol), for example, as part of the single command command processing stop setting (B1331). Thereafter, the oldest start memory of the hold display 633 moves to the special figure change hold display 643, and the next special figure change display game is started. Note that the timing at which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are switched from a high image quality state to a low image quality state is not limited to the case where the special figure changing hold display 643 is digested and is not displayed, but a predetermined effect. May be when the game ends, when the decorative first symbols A to C are stopped and displayed, or when the next special figure variation display game is started.

FIG. 68 (o) shows a display when the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the stop result (stop symbol) of the variation display area 610 becomes a big hit result mode (big hit stop symbol, special result mode). 4 is a display screen of the device 41. “3, 3, 3” is stopped and displayed on the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 as a big hit stop symbol, and “Big hit!
! "Is displayed. Further, while the special figure changing hold display 643 is digested and disappears, the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are maintained in a high-quality state. The flower-like display mode of the background object 640B is also maintained as it is. After that, the big hit round game is started and the big hit round effect is executed.

Note that switching the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B from the low image quality to the high image quality is when the special figure changing hold display 643 is changed to a star-shaped display mode (FIG. 68).
(U)), but the previous stage, that is, when starting the special figure variation display game (FIG. 68).
(Immediately after (a)) or immediately before the pending change during digestion ((ii) in FIG. 68) may be switched to high image quality. In addition, when the hold is changed stepwise or at the time of a continuous effect (at the time of a continuous notice effect or a pseudo-continuous effect), the image quality of the startup storage display background 640A may be changed in steps.
Further, for example, when the special figure changing hold display 643 and the hold display 633 are displayed in a bright color such as white, the color of the start memory display background 640A is switched to a dark color such as black to change the special figure. You may make it easy to distinguish from the hold display 643 and the hold display 633. Further, when the start memory is stored and a new hold display 633 is generated, for example, the hold display is the upper limit of 4
The start memory display background 640A may be switched to a high image quality to make it easier for the player to visually recognize when the number reaches the number and overflows or when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35. Also,
Triggered when the decorative first graphic A to C is stopped or temporarily stopped by a specific graphic (such as when a suspended change symbol that suggests or confirms a pending change or a chance eye is stopped) by executing the decorative special symbol variation display game The stored display background 640A may be switched to high image quality.

In addition, the first display mode is not limited to the mode in which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with low image quality, but the mode in which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are inconspicuous is visible. May be displayed. For example, as an inconspicuous mode, another image may be displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B (front layer, upper layer) so as to cover the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B. it can. Other images in this case include, for example, the same start-start display background 640A and background object 640B, but a thin image or mosaic image, the start-up display display background 640A or background in the back (back and lower layers) Object 6
A transparent image that can visually recognize 40B can be used. The second display mode is not limited to a mode in which the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B are displayed with high image quality, and another image displayed in front of the start memory display background 640A and the background object 640B is hidden. You may display in an aspect.

[Screen transition example when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digest area 640 will be described. FIG. 69A is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fifth embodiment, and is an example of screen transition of the entire game when a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area 641. is there. 69A and 69B below.
In the description of, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 is omitted as appropriate.

(A) in FIG. 69A is a display screen of the display device 41 before the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

On the display screen of the display device 41, the plurality of variable display areas 610 have a decorative first symbol A to C.
Is stopped and displayed with a symbol of “2, 4, 5”, and a special figure fluctuation hold display 643 corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the hold digest area 640. In addition, the reserved digestion region 64
At 0, the pedestal 640C of the special figure changing hold display 643 and the low-quality start memory display background 640A are displayed on the back surface (lower layer) of the special figure changing hold display 643. The pedestal 640C is preferentially displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the start memory display background 640A. The start memory display background 640A has a narrower upper and left area than the start memory display background 640A of FIG.

Furthermore, an effect display area 641 capable of displaying effects related to the special figure variation display game is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41. Character 641A is displayed. The effect display area 641 and the character 641A are displayed in a low image quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, the thin line representing the character 641A indicates that the character 641A is displayed in a low image quality state. The effect display area 641 is displayed in preference to the front surface (upper layer) over the variable display area 610, similarly to the reserved digest area 640 and the reserved display section 630. For example, the effect display area 641 is displayed on the same layer as the reserved digest area 640 and the reserved display section 630, and the display priority order is the same. The character 641A is displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer) of the effect display area 641. Character 6
41A and the effect display area 641 may be displayed in the same priority order (same layer), that is, in an integrated manner. Further, the character 641A has a reserved digest area 640 and a reserved display section 6.
30 may be displayed with priority over the front surface (upper layer), and conversely, the reserved digestion area 640 and the reserved display portion 630 may be displayed with priority over the front surface of the character 641A. In this way, the display priority order can be changed as appropriate.

69 (A) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the decoration special figure variation display game is executed corresponding to the special figure variation hold display 643. FIG. In the plurality of variable display areas 610,
The decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed ("↓") in a normal variation mode.

Here, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed by a character different from that shown in FIG. 69A (a different character from a high image quality character 641B described later).
Further, the low image quality character 641A may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. For example, another mode of the low-quality character 641A may be a mode of sleeping with respect to the mode of standing (ki) in FIG. The aspect which is still with respect to it may be sufficient. Note that the character 641A is standing still before the decoration special figure variation display game is started (in FIG. 69A),
After the decoration special figure variation display game is started ((ki) in FIG. 69A), it is possible to have a mode of walking and operating.

69 (A) shows that the character 641A in the effect display area 641 becomes a character 641B when a predetermined condition (for example, a change during digestion, occurrence of a pre-reading notice or a notice effect) is established during execution of the special figure changing display game. It is a display screen of the display apparatus 41 when it changes. The character 641B is a girl who is glad to eat a rice ball that suggests that the degree of expectation is high, and is displayed in a high-quality state. In FIGS. 69A and 69B, a thick line representing the character 641B indicates that the character 641B is displayed in a high quality state. In addition, the start memory display background 640A, the pedestal 640C, the reserved digest area 640, and the effect display area 64
1 is also displayed in a high quality state. Further, the predetermined condition is specifically the character 641A.
When (641B) partially enters the start memory display background 640A and acts on the special figure changing hold display 643 or the hold display, or displayed near the start memory display background 640A, the special figure changing hold display 643 or hold This is a case in which a hold change effect is executed in which the system waits until the timing at which it acts on the display 633. The timing for switching to the high-quality character 641B when the predetermined condition is satisfied may be when the character 641A moves toward the start memory display background 640A or when it is displayed near the start memory display background 640A. it can. It should be noted that the character 641A may be switched to the high-quality character 641B when acting on the special figure changing hold display 643 or the hold display, or when the character 641A moves toward the start memory display background 640A or the start memory display background. It may be switched to the character 641B with high image quality at the time of starting the next special figure variation display game when displayed near 640A.

Here, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed as a character different from that shown in () of FIG. 69A (another character different from the low-quality character 641A described later).
Further, the high-quality character 641B may be displayed in a mode different from that shown in FIG. For example, another aspect of the high-quality character 641B may be one in which the walking speed (motion speed) from (ki) in FIG. 69A is increased. In FIG. 69A (ki), the low-quality character 641A may be stationary, and in FIG. 69A (ku), the high-quality character 641B may be walked and operated.

69 (A) shows the display on the display device 41 when the running special-figure display game is finished and the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes a stop symbol ("3, 7, 2"). It is a screen. The special figure changing hold display 643 is digested and hidden, and the start memory display background 6
40A, pedestal 640C, and effect display area 641 are displayed in a low-quality state. Further, the character 641B returns to the normal character 641A and is displayed in a low image quality state. Then, the next special figure variation display game is started by storing the start memory.

FIG. 69 (ko) shows the display on the display device 41 when the special-figure display game being executed ends and the stop symbol in the variable display area 610 becomes the big hit stop symbol (“3, 3, 3”). It is a screen. Below the variable display area 610, the text “Big hit !!” is displayed. While the special figure change hold display 643 is digested and disappears, the start memory display background 640A, the base 640C,
And the effect display area 641 is maintained in a high-quality state. Further, the effect display of the girl who is pleased with the onigiri of the character 641B is also maintained. After that, the big hit round game is started and the big hit round effect is executed.

[Another screen transition example when a specific effect occurs in the effect display area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69B, another example of screen transition when the effect display area 641 is displayed together with the reserved digest area 640 will be described. FIG. 69B is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fifth embodiment. It is another example of screen transition.

69 (B) in FIG. 69B is a display screen of the display device 41 in the special figure change display game when a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect) occurs in the effect display area 641 from (ki) in FIG. 69A. is there. Due to the occurrence of the predetermined effect, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 changes to a character 641B indicating that the degree of expectation is high. The character 641B and the effect display area 641 are displayed in a high quality state. On the other hand, the start memory display background 640A and the pedestal 640C of the reserved digestion area 640 are maintained in a low-quality display. Thereafter, when the stop symbol of the fluctuation display area 610 becomes a slippage stop symbol (for example, “3, 7, 2”), the process proceeds to (D) in FIG. 69A and the jackpot stop symbol (for example, “3, 3, 3”). In the case of FIG.
Proceed to 9A （こ）. When a predetermined effect occurs in the effect display area 641, the effect display area 641 may be displayed with priority over the front (upper layer) than the reserved digest area 640. In this way, for example, the effect display area 641 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the effect by the character 641B can be emphasized. In addition, the notice effect is given by the player according to the button operation promotion display (operation promotion image) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 when the decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 become reach. This can occur when the production button 25 is operated.

69 (B) in FIG. 69B is a predetermined effect (in the reserved digestion area 640 from (ki) in FIG. 69A).
This is a display screen of the display device 41 during a special figure variation display game when a pending change during digestion or a pre-reading notice occurs. Due to the occurrence of a predetermined effect, the special-fluctuation on-hold display 643 changes to a star-like display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is high. The display of the pedestal 640C, the special figure changing hold display 643, and the start-up memory display background 640A is switched from a low image quality state to a high image quality state. On the other hand, the character 641A in the effect display area 641 continues to be displayed as it is, and the effect display area 641 and the character 641A maintain display in a low image quality state. Incidentally, in correspondence with the change of the special figure changing hold display 643 to the star display form, the shape of the pedestal 640C is related to the display form of the special figure changing hold display 643, for example, a crescent shape. It may be changed to a certain shape. After that, the stop symbol of the variable display area 610 is
When the stop symbol (for example, “372”) is reached, the process proceeds to (K) in FIG. 69A, and when the jackpot stop symbol (for example, “333”), the process proceeds to (ko) in FIG. 69A.

When a predetermined effect occurs in the reserved digest area 640, the reserved digest area 640 may be displayed with priority over the front (upper layer) than the effect display area 641. In this way, for example, the reserved digestion area 640 can be enlarged and displayed in the foreground, and the change in the display mode of the special figure changing hold display 643 and the hold display 633 can be emphasized.

Also, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed in the effect corresponding to the change in hold, the pedestal 640c also has high image quality like the special figure change hold display 643. However, the degree of high image quality may be lower than that of the special figure changing hold display 643 (the image quality may be lower than that of the special figure changing hold display 643). Thus, even if the image quality of the pedestal 640c is relatively lower than the image quality of the special figure changing hold display 643, the player can easily watch the special figure changing hold display 643 which is the main part of the production. The processing burden can be reduced while maintaining the interest of

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect occurs, for example, when the pedestal 640c changes to the same color as the color changed by the effect corresponding to the change in hold, the degree of high image quality of the pedestal 640c is determined from the hold display 643 during the special figure change. May be made higher (higher image quality than the special figure changing hold display 643). The special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed with a relatively low image quality on the high-quality pedestal 640c, so that unexpectedness arises. Can be improved.

Furthermore, the pedestal 640c may maintain a low image quality when the special figure changing hold display 643 has a high image quality. Special figure changing hold display 643 decoration and special figure changing hold display 64
This is because the pedestal 640c only needs to have a function indicating that 3 is a digestion hold, and the function is maintained even when the image is displayed with low image quality.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is based on the establishment of the start condition, and a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) based on a plurality of pieces of identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C).
Display device 41, and the result of the variable display game is a special result (a jackpot result mode,
In the case of a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode), it is possible to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41 with priority over the variable display game, and the start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition. Start memory display control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing control for displaying a start memory display (special figure changing hold display 643, hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory in the start memory display area. Prepare. The start memory display control means displays the start memory display background 640A in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) on the back of the start memory display so as to overlap the start memory display in the start memory display area, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on this, the start storage display background 640A can be switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the second display mode (for example, high image quality) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the display mode of the start memory display is changed. In this case, the start memory display background 640A can be displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality). Therefore, for example, if there is no pedestal 640c, the special figure change pending display 64
There is a problem that 3 may appear to be mixed with the decorative patterns A to C, etc., but when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize the start-up memory display, it can be displayed easily and the player can visually recognize it. When the necessity is relatively small (such as when the degree of expectation is low), it is possible to improve the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and reduce the processing load of graphics and the like. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the improvement of the visibility for the player, the improvement of the power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 and the reduction of the processing load, and the display method of the start memory display area is improved in the gaming machine. be able to. In addition, for example, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize the start memory display, the identification information (decoration first symbols A to C) of the variable display area 610 that is relatively conspicuous is more than the start memory display. Since the image is displayed with high image quality, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the identification information. In addition, the start memory display background 640A is displayed with low image quality in other cases, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is important information in the start memory display area, and the display screen image is displayed on the liquid crystal. Can be prevented from being seized.

The gaming machine 10 is an effect control means capable of executing control for displaying effects related to the variable display game in an effect display area 641 displayed on the display device 41 in preference to the variable display game (special figure variable display game). An effect control device 300) is further provided. The effect control means can display the effect in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) in the effect display area 641, and can switch the effect to the second display mode (for example, high image quality) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, there is a problem that the effect display area 641 may appear to be mixed with the decorative first symbols A to C, etc., but the start memory display (special figure changing hold display 643, Hold display 633)
In addition, the effect display area 641 can also be displayed easily by the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment displays an effect game (decoration special figure variation display game) corresponding to the variation display game (variation display game on the collective display device 50) on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the start condition. Executable effect game means (effect control device 300), a specific display area (effect display area 641) that is displayed on the display device 41 in preference to the effect game (decoration display variation display game), and the specific display A specific character displayed in the area (character 641A
641B) display control means (production control device 300) capable of executing display control. The display control means (production control device 300) normally displays the specific display area in the first display mode (
For example, the specific character is displayed in a first effect mode (for example, low image quality), and the specific display area is displayed in a second display mode (for example, different from the first display mode) based on establishment of a predetermined condition. The specific character can be switched to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality).

Therefore, when it is relatively less necessary for the player to visually recognize, the specific display area (effect display area 641) is displayed in the first display mode (for example, low image quality) and the specific character is displayed in the first effect mode (for example, low image quality). ), The power saving performance of the gaming machine 10 can be improved, and the processing load such as graphics of the display control means (production control device 300) can be reduced. Conversely, when it is necessary for the player to visually recognize (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the specific display area is switched to a second display mode (for example, high image quality) different from the first display mode (for example, low image quality). ,
The specific character is switched from the first display mode (for example, low image quality) to the second effect mode (for example, high image quality), and a specific display area (effect display area 641) and a specific character (character 6) are displayed to the player.
41A, 641B) can be easily recognized.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 88. This embodiment relates to a driver 150 (here, LED driver 153) of the status display device 152 and its initial setting. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifth embodiments.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the sixth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70, the timer interrupt process of the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 6), but the LED driver 153 (FIG. 71) after the status display edit output process (A1318).
The feature is that an LED driver initial setting process (A15001) for initial setting is added. In addition, after the initial setting of the LED driver 153, LED data transmission processing (A
16001). In the present embodiment, after describing the configuration of the LED driver 153, an initial setting process and an LED data transmission process of the LED driver 153 will be described.

LED driver initial setting processing (A15001) and LED data transmission processing (A16)
The order of (001) may be changed. In this case, the LED driver initial setting process (A1
5001) LED data transmission processing in the next timer interrupt processing (A16001)
Therefore, the LED driver 153 is initialized.

[LED driver]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the LED driver 153 according to the sixth embodiment. The LED driver 153 of the present embodiment is the same as the driver 150 (FIG. 3) of the first embodiment. A collective driver 153 a, a role ratio driver 153 b, and a payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153 c described later are also the same as the LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 includes display units 900 (900-3 (digit 3), 900-2 (digit 2), 900-1 (digit 1)) sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method).
), 900-0 (digit 0)) LED is turned on. The digit display 900 that constitutes the status display device 152 is a 7-segment type (or 8-segment type) as well as eight point-like LEDs.
Includes a collection of lamps. The LED driver 153 may be either an anode common or a cathode common.

The LED driver 153 is a role ratio driver 153b or a payout rate / discharge ball number driver 15.
3c, a 16-bit command is sent from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the LED driver 153 in the previous stage (first stage collective driver 153a and second stage role driver 153b) as indicated by a dotted line. Is sent. When the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, a 16-bit command is directly transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 without passing through the preceding LED driver 153.

The LED driver 153 includes a 16-bit shift register 163 and a 16-bit latch circuit 1
64, latch selector 165, four 8-bit latches (latch circuits: digit 0, digit 1, digit 2,
(For digit 3) 167a-167d, control unit 173, oscillation unit 174, 4-to-1 data selector 1
83, a character generator (decoder) 185, a 2-to-1 data selector 187, a segment driver 193, and a digit driver 195. The control unit 173 includes a digit number setting unit 175, a duty setting unit 176, a data selection unit 177, and a standby mode setting unit 1.
78. The oscillation unit 174 generates and transmits a signal used in the control unit 173 (particularly the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176). The 8-bit latch functions as a data register. Further, the LED driver 153 may include a light emission color control unit that controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment).

The 16-bit command is input from the data input terminal to the 16-bit shift register 163 of the LED driver 153, and can be output to the other LED driver 153 from the data output terminal as it is. The data of the 16-bit shift register 163 is stored in the 16-bit latch circuit 1
64 is held (set) in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 at the timing (latch timing) when the latch signal (load signal) is received from the gaming microcomputer 111.

Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the upper 8 bits are sent to the latch selector 165, the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178. Of the commands held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (data portion) are sent to the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. Further, the lower 8 bits of data (only necessary bits (for example, 4 bits) are acceptable) are also sent to the digit number setting unit 175, the duty setting unit 176, the data selection unit 177, and the standby mode setting unit 178.

When the upper 8 bits (address part) indicate the address of the digit number setting unit 175 (for example, 21H (hexadecimal number expression)), the digit number setting unit 175 stores the control data (initial value) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 In the setting data, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are taken, and the corresponding number of digits (for example, X0H to X3H (hexadecimal number expression, X is arbitrary)) is set (initial setting). The number of digits to be set is the display 90 driven by the LED driver 153.
The number is 0 (the number of digits) and is 4 in this embodiment.

The upper 8 bits are the address of the duty setting unit 176 (for example, 20H (hexadecimal number expression))
, The duty setting unit 176 takes in the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are possible) of the control data (initial setting data) held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 and outputs the corresponding duty ratio ( For example, X0H to XFH (hexadecimal number expression, X is arbitrary)) are set (initial setting). The brightness (emission intensity) of the segment (LED) of the display 900
The duty ratio indicating the value corresponds to the output time width of the source driver. The source driver corresponds to the digit driver 195 in the case of the anode common, and corresponds to the segment driver 193 in the case of the cathode common.

When the upper 8 bits indicate the address of the data selection unit 177 (for example, 27H (hexadecimal number representation)), the data selection unit 177 has the lower 8 bits (necessary) of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164. In this case, the use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 is set. Note that the addresses of the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting unit 175 may be the same, and the setting of the use / non-use of the decoded data by the data selection unit 177 and the digit number setting of the digit number setting unit 175 may be performed simultaneously ( Data selection part 1
77 and the number-of-digits setting unit 175 are distinguished by the lower 8 bits).

In other words, the data selection unit 177 converts the 8-bit latch data into the character generator 18.
5 to select whether to decode and use as decoded data, or to use 8-bit latch data as it is as non-decoded data. 8 if decoded
The bit latch data is regarded as a character code and is decoded into character lighting pattern data. When the data of the 8-bit latch is used as it is as non-decoded data, the data selection unit 177 outputs a data selection signal indicating the selection of the non-decoded data to 2
Send to one-to-one data selector 187. In this manner, the data selection unit 177 determines whether or not the decoding function is used by a command (command, command) from the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 111).
(Including control data).

When the upper 8 bits indicate an address of the standby mode setting unit 178 or a command for the standby mode setting unit 178 (for example, 41H, 1XH, 0XH (hexadecimal expression: X is arbitrary)), the standby mode setting unit 178 Of the control data held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the lower 8 bits (only necessary bits are acceptable) are fetched. Then, for example, the standby mode setting unit 178 transmits a standby signal to the segment driving unit 193 or the digit driving unit 195 so as to be in an off state to shift the LED driver 153 to the standby mode (in the case of 41H), or the segment driving unit. 193 and digit drive 1
95 is forcibly turned off and all digit display devices 900 are turned off (in the case of 0XH (BLANK data)), or the segment drive unit 193 and the digit drive unit 195 of the LED driver 153 are normally operated by the dynamic drive method. (1XH) In the standby mode, each setting is not cleared and the previous setting is retained. In normal operation, after the segment driver 193 and the digit driver 195 are driven once, the data is stored in the 8-bit latch, and the data of the 8-bit latch is immediately reflected on the display of the display 900. The

The upper 8 bits are the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal number representation))
, The latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to the 8-bit latch 167a. Accordingly, the 8-bit latch 167a latches (holds) and captures (sets) the lighting pattern data or character code of the lower 8 bits (data portion). Similarly,
The upper 8 bits are one of the addresses of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d (for example, 23H
, 24H, 25H (hexadecimal notation)), the latch selector 165 transfers the latch signal to one of the 8-bit latches 167b-167d corresponding to the address. As a result, the 8-bit latches 167b to 167d have the lower 8 bits (data portion) addressed to them.
The lighting pattern data or character code can be latched and captured.

The latch selector 165 receives a latch signal (load signal) from the gaming microcomputer 111, and the latch selector 165 receives the latch signal as an 8-bit latch 167a-16.
7d to select any one of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d. The 8-bit latches 167a to 167d are digit 0 and digit 1 respectively addressed thereto.
, Digit 2 and digit 3 display data for the display 900 can be held.

The 4-to-1 data selector 183 sequentially selects the data of the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d corresponding to the digit line of each digit selected by the digit driver 195 in order to realize a dynamic drive system (dynamic lighting system). To do. The 4-to-1 data selector 183
Any one of the selected 8-bit latches 167a to 167d is output to the character generator 185 and the 2-to-1 data selector 187. The digit line is selected by outputting an on / off drive signal to the digit line. In the case of anode common, an on voltage is applied to the digit line, and in the case of cathode common, a current draw voltage (off voltage) is applied to the digit line. ) Is applied. It should be noted that information indicating which digit line the digit driver 195 has selected may be transmitted to the 4-to-1 data selector 183.

For example, when the digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal and selects the digit line of digit 0, the data of the 8-bit latch 167a is selected. Similarly, the digit driver 19
When 5 outputs a drive signal and digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 digit lines are selected, data of 8-bit latches 167b, 167c, and 167d are selected.

The character generator 185 decodes the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183. When the data sent from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 is a character code, the character generator 185 displays the character code (character code) by the decoding process and the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. Convert to

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a character code (character code) and a lighting pattern of a character corresponding to the character code. In FIG. 72, X is arbitrary (0 or 1), and the character code “X10... B” corresponds to lighting pattern data when the decimal point (Dp) is lit. Although it is possible to define variously what character codes are associated with each other, the character generator 185 is a logic circuit that defines a correspondence relationship between a character code (input) and a character (output) (character lighting pattern data). Etc. For example, the character code “X0011010B” is the character “−”.
Corresponding to the lighting pattern data ((a, b, c,
d, e, f, g, Dp) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0)) (for example, “00000
010B "). Since the collective driver 153a uses non-decoded data, when only the segment g is lit (turned on), the lighting pattern data (for example, “00000010B”) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is used as it is. .

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. If the LED driver 153 is a role ratio driver 153b or a payout rate / ball number driver 153c, the character code transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is held in the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. 185 outputs lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code. However, if the LED driver 153 is the collective driver 153a, the appropriate lighting pattern data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is the 8-bit latch 167a-1.
Since it is already held in 67d, the character generator 18 is used except in the case of an accident.
No. 5 only converts appropriate lighting pattern data into inappropriate lighting pattern data by the decoding process. If the appropriate lighting pattern data coincides with any of the character codes, the character generator 185 of the collective driver 153a may output the lighting pattern data of the character (character).

The 2-to-1 data selector 187 responds to the data selection signal from the data selection unit 177 and outputs the decoded data (decoded data) output from the character generator 185 and the 4-to-1 data selector 183 directly. Any one of the non-decoded data is selected and output to the segment driver 193. The non-decoded data is data output from the 4-to-1 data selector 183 without going through the character generator 185, and is the 8-bit data itself of the 8-bit latches 167a-167d. When a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data is input, the 2-to-1 data selector 187
When non-decoded data is output and no data selection signal is input, the decoded data is output.

If the LED driver 153 is a batch driver 153a, a two-to-one data selector 1
87 receives a data selection signal indicating selection of non-decoded data, and always outputs appropriate lighting pattern data held in the 8-bit latches 167a to 167d to the segment driver 193. On the other hand, if the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b or the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c, the 2-to-1 data selector 187 does not receive a data selection signal and always lights a character (character). The pattern data (decoded data) is output to the segment driver 193.

The segment drive unit 193 outputs the lighting pattern data (decoded data or non-decode data) from the 2-to-1 data selector 187 to the digit display 900 corresponding to the digit line selected by the digit drive unit 195 ( Dynamic drive system). The lighting pattern data is ON / OFF data of light emission of the eight LEDs (segment ag, Dp, or dot-like eight LEDs) of the display 900 of the selected digit (that is, the selected digit line). In the case of the anode common, the segment drive unit 193 turns on the LED (light emission state) by applying a current drawing voltage (off voltage) to the segment line as a drive voltage. In the case of the cathode common, the on-voltage is applied to the segment line as the drive voltage, thereby allowing LE
D is turned on (light emission state).

The 8 LEDs of the display 900 are 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point part)
In the display 900, the segments are ag and Dp. On the other hand, in the case of FIG.
The eight LEDs of the display 900 are a set of eight point-like LED lamps (D3-D7, D8,
D10, D18) or a set of eight point-like LED lamps (D9, D11-D16, D
17).

The digit driver 195 outputs a drive signal and selects a digit line for each digit. The digit drive unit 195 applies a turn-on voltage to the digit line as a drive signal in the case of the anode common, and applies a current draw voltage (off voltage) to the digit line in the case of the cathode common.

The resistance connection terminal 197 (R-EXT terminal) is connected to a segment by a constant current circuit composed of a segment drive unit 193 and a segment drive unit 193 by connecting one external resistor between this terminal and the ground (GND). The value of the current flowing through the line can be set. This
A common current value can be supplied to all LEDs.

Furthermore, a light emission color control unit (not shown) of the LED driver 153 controls the light emission color of the LED (or segment). In the main process and the timer interrupt process, the emission color control unit
A command (control data) relating to the color of the LED can be received, and a command signal can be sent to the segment drive unit 193 to control the emission color of the LED. Segment drive unit 1
93 is driven by applying a driving voltage to the segment line of the color corresponding to the command signal from the emission color control unit. The segment line is provided for each color LED (or segment) of the display device 900.

As described above, the driver 150 of the first embodiment is initially set in the main process. At this time, initial setting is performed on the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (further, the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) of the driver 150 (LED driver 153). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, initial setting is performed for at least one of the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 in the timer interrupt processing. As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the driving data (LED command) is output after setting the correct setting value in the timer interrupt processing. This makes it possible to avoid turning off the light due to noise or the like of the state display device 152. When the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 176 (and the data selection unit 177 and the standby mode setting unit 178) are initialized in the timer interrupt process, the initial setting in the main process (A1016)
Can be omitted. In the sixth embodiment, the digit number setting unit 175 and the duty setting unit 1
The case where the initial setting is performed for 76 will be described as an example.

[Initialization command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the initial setting command transmitted to the LED driver and the latch according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command is an address part (8
Bits) are omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 includes an initial setting command (digit) including initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 ((digit) is an initial setting value of the number of digits) (16 bits) (FIG. 74), Initial setting data (du) for the duty setting unit 176 ((
Du) is the initial setting command (du) including the initial setting value of duty ratio) (8 bits)
(16 bits) (FIG. 74) are transmitted in order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (16 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the first initial setting command (digit) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, and the initial setting data (digit) is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 by the initial setting command (digit). Is done. The next initial setting command (Du) (FIG. 74) is held in the 16-bit latch circuit 164 by the next latch signal,
The initial setting data (du) is input to the duty setting unit 176 by the initial setting command (du).
Is memorized. In FIG. 73, the initial setting command for the digit number setting unit 175 is transmitted before the initial setting command for the duty setting unit 176, but the order may be reversed.

[LED driver initial setting process]
Referring to FIG. 74, the LED driver initial setting process according to the sixth embodiment (A15 in FIG. 70).
001) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure of LED driver initial setting processing according to the sixth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the case where the LED driver 153 is the role ratio driver 153b and the character code (8 bits) stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the role ratio display data will be described as an example.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (digit) relating to the number of used digits of the digit number setting unit 175 (A15002), writes the initial setting command (digit) into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit, and generates a clock. It is transmitted together with the signal (A15003). Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an initial setting command (du) related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 (A15004), and transmits the initial setting command (du) in the same manner as described above (
A15005).

[LED command transmission timing chart]
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the LED command transmitted to the LED driver and the latch according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 75, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 uses LED commands (16 bits)
A latch signal is output every time. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command.

In the 16-bit latch circuit 164 of the LED driver 153, the first LED command (digit 0) is held by the first latch signal, and the character ratio display data (digit 0) is sent to the 8-bit latch 167a by the LED command (digit 0). ) Is stored. Similarly, the 16-bit latch circuit 164 holds the second LED command (digit 1) by the second latch signal,
In response to the LED command (digit 1), an 8-bit latch 167b displays an accessory ratio display data (digit 1).
) Is stored. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the third LED command (digit 2) is held by the third latch signal, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c by the LED command (digit 2). Remembered. In the 16-bit latch circuit 164, the fourth LED command (digit 3) is held by the fourth latch signal, and the accessory ratio display data (digit 3) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d by the LED command (digit 3). Remembered.

[LED data transmission processing]
The LED driver transmission process according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the sixth embodiment. First, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 0) (16 bits) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a (A16003), and the LED command (digit 0). ) Is written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal (A16005).

The gaming microcomputer 111 generates an LED command (digit 1) including the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b (A16009), and transmits the LED command (digit 1) as described above. (A16011). The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the LED command (digit 2) including the character ratio display data (digit 2) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
) Is generated (A16015), and the LED command (digit 2) is transmitted (A16017).
. The gaming microcomputer 111 stores the accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 167d).
An LED command (digit 3) including the digit 3) is generated (A16021), and the LED command (digit 3) is transmitted (A16023). In FIG. 76, LED commands (object ratio display data = character code) are transmitted in the order of digit 0, digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3, but the transmission order can be arbitrarily set.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to first modification]
77 shows an LED driver 153 (ratio driver 1 according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment).
53b, details of the cascade connection of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c). In the cascade connection, the role driver 153b is the first stage, and the driver 15 for the ball payout / discharged ball number.
3c constitutes the second stage. The serial data (initial setting command, LED command) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is first transmitted to the hand ratio driver 153b, and is transmitted as it is from the hand ratio driver 153b to the driver / rendering ball number driver 153c. The That is, the serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, the role driver 153b, the play rate /
It is transmitted to the discharged ball number driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits a clock signal and a latch signal (load signal) in parallel to the role ratio driver 153b and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c.

[Status display device]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio display unit 68 in the state display device 152 is a display in which four 7-segment display devices (8-segment display including a dot portion) are arranged in the horizontal direction. , Digit 2 and digit 3, a 4-digit 7-segment display 900. The accessory ratio display unit 68 displays a display of all the accessory ratios (for example, “y50.8”) and a continuous accessory ratio (for example, “r58.4”).
) Can be switched and displayed. Note that the digit 3 (the fourth digit from the right) is the letter “y” indicating the ratio of all the actors (generally used accessory ratio), or the letter “
r "may be displayed.

The role ratio driver 153b (FIG. 77) converts the character code (character code) received from the gaming microcomputer 111 into the lighting pattern data of the character (character) indicated by the character code, and based on the lighting pattern data. Each digit (digit 3,
The lighting of the display 900 of the digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) is controlled. This character code (combination ratio display data) is the combination of ratios (FIG. 6) calculated by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100.
, Corresponding to the numerical value of each digit in A1318) of FIG. The role ratio driver 153b has a character generator 185 (decoder) that generates lighting pattern data of the character indicated by the character code from the character code by decoding, and can set use / non-use of the decoded data by the character generator 185. In this case, the decoding data is set to be used. That is, the role ratio driver 153b can set whether or not to use the decoding function for generating the lighting data of the role ratio display unit 68 from the character code.

FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing the details of the discharged ball number display unit 66 for displaying the number of discharged balls and the output rate display unit 67 for displaying the output rate. In the state display device 152, the number of discharged balls display portion 66 and the output rate display portion 67 are four 7-segment indicators (8-segment type including a point portion).
00 are arranged in the horizontal direction, the display 900 showing the digit 0 from the right, and the display 9 showing the digit 1
00 corresponds to the discharge ball number display unit 66, and the display 900 indicating the digit 2 and the display 900 indicating the digit 3 from the right correspond to the payout rate display unit 67. On the contrary, the indicator 900 indicating the digit 0 from the right and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 1 correspond to the payout rate display section 67, and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 2 and the indicator 900 indicating the digit 3 from the right discharge. You may make it respond | correspond to the ball number display part 66. FIG. The discharged ball number display part 66 and the output ball rate display part 67 can be displayed simultaneously.

The driver 153c for paying out balls / discharged balls (FIG. 77) turns on the character (character) indicated by the character code received from the game microcomputer 111 via the role driver 153b. It converts into pattern data, and lighting of the indicator 900 of each digit of the discharge ball number display part 66 and the payout rate display part 67 is controlled based on the lighting pattern data. The output ball rate / discharge ball number driver 153c converts the character code into lighting pattern data (discharge ball number display data or output ball rate display data) of the character indicated by the character code by decoding. ) And the use of the decoded data by the character generator 185 can be set, the decoding data is set to be used. That is, the driver / rendering ball number 153c can set whether or not to use a decoding function for generating lighting data of the discharged ball number display unit 66 and the output ball rate display unit 67 from the character code.

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to First Modification]
FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an initial setting command sent to the hand ratio driver and the output rate / discharge ball number driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 79
The initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the driver 153c for paying out balls / discharged balls and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit setting unit 175 of the role driver 153b. Bit)) in the form included in the initial setting command (32 bits), and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting part 176 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharge ball number,
The initial setting data (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b are transmitted in the form included in the initial setting command (32 bits) in the order.

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number
75, initial setting data (digit) c is stored. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b by the latch signal.

[Initial setting process of the driver for the number of balls to be played / the number of balls to be discharged and the driver for the ratio)
With reference to FIG. 80, the LED driver initial setting process (A15001 of FIG. 70) concerning the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial setting process of the role ratio driver and the output rate / discharged ball number driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
An initial setting command including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of 5 (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A 15006), and an initial setting command (digits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b ) B (16 bits) is generated (A1507), and initial setting commands (digits) c and b (32 bits) obtained by concatenating initial setting commands (digits) c and initial setting commands (digits) b in this order are serial communication circuits. Are sent to the transmission buffer and transmitted together with the clock signal (A150).
09).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets an initial setting command (du) c that includes initial setting data (du) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for paying out balls / discharged balls.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b (A15012) and the initial setting command (du) c
, Initial setting commands (du) c and b (32) concatenated in the order of initial setting commands (du) b
Bit) in the same manner as described above (A15014).

[LED Command Transmission Timing Chart According to First Modification]
FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing LED commands sent to the role ratio driver and the output rate / discharge ball number driver according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment. Here, the character code stored in the role ratio driver 153b is the character ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3).
The character code stored in the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c is the discharge ball number display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the output rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). FIG. 81
The LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The number of discharged balls display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a and the ratio display data (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the role driver 153b are stored in this order. Generated and transmitted in the form of an LED command (32 bits), and then stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / discharged ball number driver 153c (digit 1)
) C (8 bits), in order of the accessory ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the role ratio driver 153b, these are included in the LED command (32 bits) and generated and transmitted. .

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (32 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout / render ball driver 153c. At the same time, in response to the latch signal, the character ratio display data (
Digit 0) b is stored.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for paying out ball / discharge ball. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 1) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the character ratio driver 153b.

Although not shown in FIG. 81, the game microcomputer 111 thereafter has a game output rate display data (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167 c of the driver 153 c for output rate / ejected ball number.
(8 bits), in the order of the accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b, these are generated in the form of being included in the command (32 bits) and transmitted. , Exit rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the exit rate / ejected ball number driver 153c, 8-bit latch 167 of the role driver 153b
The character ratio display data (digit 3) b stored in d are generated and transmitted in the form of including them in the command (32 bits).

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the exit rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the exit rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, in response to the latch signal, the character ratio display data (digit 2) is sent to the 8-bit latch 167c of the character ratio driver 153b.
b is stored.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the exit rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the exit rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the character ratio display data (digit 3) b is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the role driver 153b by the LED command (digit 3) b.

[LED data transmission processing according to first modification]
With reference to FIG. 82, the LED driver transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the LED command (digit 0) c (including the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver / race ball driver 153c. 16 bits) (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the approxi- mate ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003). LED commands (digit 0) c and b (32 bits) connected in the order of LED command (digit 0) c and LED command (digit 0) b are written to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal ( A16006).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The LED command (digit 1) c including the discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c stored in 7b is generated (A16008), and the accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role driver 153b) LED command (digit 1) b including digit 1) b is generated (A1600)
9) LED command (digit 1) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c and LED command (digit 1) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16012).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The LED command (digit 2) c including the payout rate display data (digit 2) c stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and the accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the role driver 153b) LED command (digit 2) b including digit 2) b is generated (A16015)
), LED command (digit 2) c and LED command (digit 2) c, b connected in the order of LED command (digit 2) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16018).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The LED command (digit 3) c including the output rate display data (digit 3) c stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and the accessory ratio display data (stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the role driver 153b) LED command (digit 3) b including digit 3) b is generated (A16021)
), LED command (digit 3) c and b connected in the order of LED command (digit 3) c and LED command (digit 3) b are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16024).

[Game Control Device According to Second Modification]
FIG. 83 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. The game control apparatus 100 of 6th Embodiment is the game control apparatus 100 of 1st Embodiment.
However, the state display device 152 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated into the collective display device 50. In addition, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment
In this case, a batch driver 153a, a ratio driver 153b, and a payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c are cascade-connected in this order by a data signal line, and a data signal line extending from the gaming microcomputer 111 is a batch driver 153a. It is connected to the.

[Cascade connection of LED drivers according to second modification]
FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating details of the cascade connection of the LED drivers according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the cascade connection, the collective driver 153a constitutes the first stage, the role ratio driver 153b constitutes the second stage, and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c constitutes the third stage. Serial data transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 (initial setting command, LED command)
Is transmitted to the collective driver 153a, and the role driver 1 is sent from the collective driver 153a.
It is transmitted to 53b as it is. Then, the serial data transmitted to the role ratio driver 153b is transmitted as it is from the role ratio driver 153b to the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c. That is, serial data such as initial setting data, lighting pattern data, and character code (character code) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 are, in order, a collective driver 153a, a role driver 153b, a payout rate / number of balls to be discharged. Is transmitted to the driver 153c. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit the initial setting data, the lighting pattern data, and the character code in a serial manner using one serial communication circuit. Note that the gaming microcomputer 111 parallels the clock signal and the latch signal (load signal) to the collective driver 153a, the ratio driver 153b, and the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c.
Send to.

The collective driver 153a controls lighting of a collective display unit (not shown) according to the lighting pattern data received from the gaming microcomputer 111. The collective driver 153a is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display 900 (LED lamp), and the first special figure variation display unit 51 (D1) is displayed with the digit 0 display 900, the second Special figure fluctuation display 52 (D2)
Is controlled as the display device 900 of digit 1 (see FIG. 2B and the like).

The collective driver 153a originally controls the 4-digit 7-segment display (the 8-segment display including the point portion) 900 itself, but the variable display unit 53 for the normal variable display game, The round display section 60 and the eight point-like LED lamps (D3-D7, D8, D10, D18) of the first gaming state display section 57 are connected to the segment (a-g) of the display device 900 of digit 2.
, Dp) and control (see FIG. 2B, etc.). In addition, the collective driver 153a includes a holding storage display unit (a special drawing 1 holding display 54, a special drawing 2 holding display 55, a general drawing holding display 56),
Eight LED lamps (D9, D9) of the second game state display unit 58 and the third game state display unit 59
D11-D16, D17) are regarded as segments (ag, Dp) of the display device 900 of digit 3 (see FIG. 2B, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the collective driver 153a is actually the role driver 153a.
b is the same kind of LED driver 153 (same IC) as the driver for ball output / number of balls to be discharged 153c. It is set (non-use setting).

[Transmission Timing Chart of Initial Setting Command According to Second Modification]
FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a batch driver, a role driver, and a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
It is a timing chart which shows the initial setting command sent to the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. In FIG. 85, the initial setting command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the driver 153c for paying out balls / discharged balls and the initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit setting unit 175 of the role driver 153b. Bit) and initial setting data (8 bits) for the digit number setting unit 175 of the collective driver 153a are transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits) in order to set the duty of the driver 153c for the ball output rate / discharge ball number Initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) for the unit 176, initial setting data (digit) b (8 bits) for the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b, and for the duty setting unit 176 of the collective driver 153a Initial setting data (digit) a (8
Bits) are transmitted in the form of being included in the command (48 bits).

The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an initial setting command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the final bit of the initial setting command. As a result, the number-of-digits setting unit 1 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number
75, initial setting data (digit) c is stored. At the same time, initial setting data (digit) b is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the role ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (digit) a is stored in the digit number setting unit 175 of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

Then, the initial setting data (du) c is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c by the next latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) b is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b by the latch signal. At the same time, the initial setting data (du) a is stored in the duty setting unit 176 of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

[Initial setting processing of the driver for the number of balls to be played / the number of balls to be discharged, the driver for the ratio, and the driver for the batch]
With reference to FIG. 86, the LED driver initial setting process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a collective driver, a role driver according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
And it is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial setting process of the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets the number-of-digits setting unit 17 of the driver 153c for the payout rate / discharged ball number.
An initial setting command including initial setting data (digit) c (8 bits) relating to the number of used digits of 5 (
Digit) c (16 bits) is generated (A 15006), and an initial setting command (digits) including initial setting data (digits) b (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the ratio driver 153b ) B (16 bits) is generated (A15007), and initial setting command (digit) a including initial setting data (digit) a (8 bits) related to the number of digits used by the digit number setting unit 175 of the collective driver 153a (16 bits) is generated (A15008), initial setting command (digit) c,
Initial setting commands (digits) c, b, and a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of initial setting command (digit) b and initial setting command (digit) a are written in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmitted together with the clock signal. (A15010).

Next, the gaming microcomputer 111 sets an initial setting command (du) c that includes initial setting data (du) c related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the driver 153c for paying out balls / discharged balls.
Du) c (16 bits) is generated (A15011), and initial setting command (du) b (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) b related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the duty ratio driver 153b Is generated (A15012), and an initial setting command (du) a (16 bits) including initial setting data (du) a related to the duty ratio of the duty setting unit 176 of the collective driver 153a is generated (A15013). An initial setting command (du) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of the setting command (du) c, initial setting command (du) b, and initial setting command (du) a is transmitted in the same manner as described above (A15015).
).

[LED Command Transmission Timing Chart According to Second Modification]
FIG. 87 illustrates a collective driver, a role driver, and a second modification of the sixth embodiment;
It is a timing chart which shows the LED command sent to the driver for a payout rate / discharge ball number. Here, the character code stored in the hand ratio driver 153b is the character ratio display data (digit 0-digit 3), and the character code stored in the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c is the discharge rate. The number-of-balls display data (digit 0, digit 1) or the exit rate display data (digit 2, digit 3). Further, lighting pattern data (digit 0-digit 3) (hereinafter referred to as “lighting data”) is stored in the collective driver 153a. In FIG. 87, the LED command is shown with the address portion (8 bits) omitted.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
Character code (digit 0) c (8 bits) stored in 7a, 8 of the role driver 153b
The character code (digit 0) b (8 bits) stored in the bit latch 167a and the lighting data (digit 0) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the collective driver 153a are displayed in the order of LED commands (digit 0). ) C, b, a (48 bits) included in the generated and transmitted, and then the character code (digit 1) c (stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the payout rate / ejected ball number driver 153c 8 bits), 8-bit latch 1 of the ratio driver 153b
The character code (digit 1) b (8 bits) stored in 67b and the lighting data (digit 1) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the collective driver 153a are L
The ED command (digit 1) is generated and transmitted in the form of being included in c, b, a (48 bits).

Here, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal each time an LED command (48 bits) is transmitted. The gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a latch signal when transmitting the last bit of the LED command. As a result, the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the payout / render ball driver 153c. At the same time, in response to the latch signal, the character ratio display data (
Digit 0) b is stored. At the same time, the latch driver 153a is used in response to the latch signal.
Lighting data (digit 0) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167a.

Then, in accordance with the next latch signal, the discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167b of the driver 153c for paying out ball / discharge ball. At the same time, in response to the latch signal, the character ratio display data (digit 1) is sent to the 8-bit latch 167b of the role driver 153b.
) B is stored. At the same time, the latch signal 153a 8
Lighting data (digit 1) a is stored in the bit latch 167b.

Although not shown in FIG. 87, the game microcomputer 111 thereafter stores the character code (digit 2) c stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the driver for payout rate / discharged ball number 153c.
(8 bits), character code (digit 2) b (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the role ratio driver 153b, lighting data (digit 2) a (stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the collective driver 153a LED commands (digit 2) c, b in the order of 8 bits)
, A (48 bits) in a form generated and transmitted, and then, the driver 1 for the payout rate / number of balls to be discharged
Character code (digit 3) c (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of 53c,
Character code (digit 3) stored in 8-bit latch 167d of role ratio driver 153b
b (8 bits) and the lighting data (digit 3) a (8 bits) stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the collective driver 153a are included in the LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits). Generate and send in the form.

Therefore, in accordance with the next latch signal, the payout rate display data (digit 2) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the payout rate / discharge ball number driver 153c. At the same time, the ratio driver 1
The accessory ratio display data (digit 2) b is stored in the 53-bit 8-bit latch 167c. At the same time, lighting data (digit 2) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

Further, in accordance with the next latch signal, the output rate display data (digit 3) c is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the output rate / ejected ball number driver 153c. At the same time, in response to the latch signal, the character ratio display data (digit 3) is sent to the 8-bit latch 167d of the character ratio driver 153b.
b is stored. At the same time, lighting data (digit 3) a is stored in the 8-bit latch 167d of the collective driver 153a by the latch signal.

[LED data transmission processing according to second modification]
With reference to FIG. 88, the LED driver transmission process which concerns on the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of LED data transmission processing according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the LED command (digit 0) c (including the discharge ball number display data (digit 0) c (8 bits) to be stored in the 8-bit latch 167a of the driver / race ball driver 153c. 16 bits) (A16002), and an LED command (digit 0) b including the accessory ratio display data (digit 0) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176a of the role ratio driver 153b is generated (A16003). 8-bit latch 176 of the collective driver 153a
An LED command (digit 0) a including the lighting code (digit 0) a (display data of LED in FIG. 1) stored in a is generated (A16004). And LED command (digit 0) c, LE
Write LED command (digit 0) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of D command (digit 0) b and LED command (digit 0) a into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit and transmit it together with the clock signal (A16007).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
LED command including discharge ball number display data (digit 1) c (8 bits) stored in 7b
Digit 1) c (16 bits) is generated (A16008), and LED command (digit 1) b including the character ratio display data (digit 1) b stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the role driver 153b is generated. Then (A16009), an LED command (digit 1) a including the lighting code (digit 1) a (display data of LED in FIG. 2) stored in the 8-bit latch 176b of the collective driver 153a is generated (A16010). The LED command (digit 1) is connected in the order of LED command (digit 1) c, LED command (digit 1) b, LED command (digit 1) a.
c, b, a (48 bits) are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16013).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The LED command (digit 2) c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 2) c (8 bits) stored in 7c is generated (A16014), and the 8-bit latch 176c of the role driver 153b LED command (digit 2) including the character ratio display data (digit 2) b to be stored
) B (A16015), and an LED command (digit 2) including a lighting code (digit 2) a (normal / round / first gaming state display data) stored in the 8-bit latch 176c of the collective driver 153a ) A is generated (A16016). And the LED command (digit 2
) LED command (digit 2) c, b, a (48 bits) concatenated in the order of c, LED command (digit 2) b and LED command (digit 2) a are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16019).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is an 8-bit latch 16 of a driver 153c for a payout rate / ball number.
The LED command (digit 3) c (16 bits) including the output rate display data (digit 3) c (8 bits) stored in 7d is generated (A16020), and the 8-bit latch 176d of the role driver 153b LED command (digit 3) including the character ratio display data (digit 3) b to be stored
) LE that includes a lighting code (digit 3) a (hold / second and third gaming state display data) to be generated (A16021) and stored in the 8-bit latch 176d of the collective driver 153a
The D command (digit 3) a is generated (A16022). And LED command (digit 3) c
LED command (digit 3) c, b, a (48 bits) connected in the order of LED command (digit 3) b and LED command (digit 3) a are transmitted in the same manner as described above (A16025).

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
According to the sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control program storage means (ROM 111b) for storing a game control program (invariant information (program) for game control), and a game control program (for game control). Arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing based on invariant information (program)) and arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111)
), And driving means (LED driver 153) for driving the light emitting part (the accessory ratio display part 68) based on the driving data (LED command) output by the above. Driving means (LED
The driver 153) is provided with a setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) for setting the light emission mode in the light emitting unit (the accessory ratio display unit 68).
A main process (A1001) for controlling the progress of the game and a main process (A10) every predetermined time
And the interrupt processing (A1301) executed by interrupting the interrupt processing (A1301), the arithmetic processing means (gaming microcomputer 111) in the interrupt processing (A1301), the setting unit (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting) Unit 176) transmits initial setting data for initial setting (at least one of a plurality of setting units) to the driving unit (LED driver 153) (A15001), and then transmits the driving data (LED command) to the driving unit (LED To the driver 153).

As a result, even after the main processing, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the LED driver 153 can be returned to normal in the interrupt processing, and the correct setting value After that, driving data (LED command) can be output, and turn-off due to noise of the state display device 152 (and the collective display device 50) can be avoided.

In the interrupt process (A1301), after driving data (LED command) is transmitted to the driving means (LED driver 153), at least one of a plurality of setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176) is obtained. Initial setting data for initial setting of the drive means (L
A configuration for transmission to the ED driver 153) is also possible. In this case, in order to transmit the drive data in the next interrupt process, the initial setting data is transmitted to the drive means in the current interrupt process to initialize the setting unit.

That is, in the interrupt process (A1301), if the initial setting data is transmitted to the driving means together with the driving data, the status display device 152 (and the collective display device) regardless of the transmission order of the driving data and the initial setting data. 50) can be avoided due to noise and the like.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (the gaming microcomputer 111) can transmit the initial setting data to the driving means (LED driver 153) even in the main processing (A1001). As a result, it is possible to avoid turning off the status display device 152 even before the interrupt process is entered.

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, setting units (digit number setting unit 175, duty setting unit 176)
Are a digit number setting unit 175 for setting the number of light emitting elements (display device 900) to emit light in the light emitting unit (object ratio display unit 68), and a duty setting unit for setting the duty ratio in the light emitting device (display device 900). 176.

As a result, even if the setting value of the LED driver 153 (driving means) becomes an indefinite value due to noise or the like, the correct setting value (the number of light emitting elements and its duty ratio (light emission intensity, brightness)) is set. It becomes possible to output drive data (LED command), and it is possible to avoid turning off the light caused by noise of the status display device 152 (and the collective display device 50).

Further, according to the sixth embodiment, the light emitting unit is an accessory ratio display unit 68 that displays an accessory ratio. Thus, the accessory ratio display unit 68 can be reliably displayed in accordance with the game control program even after the main process.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 89 to 93. The seventh embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. However, the seventh embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the procedure for changing the test fire test signal (test signal) and the probability set value (set value) to be transmitted to the test fire testing apparatus. Is different. The test firing test apparatus is an external apparatus existing outside the gaming machine 10.

The apparatus configuration in which this embodiment is performed is the same as that shown in FIG. 3, but mainly the game control device 100 (game control means) and the relay board 70 are used. The game control device 100 is a game microcomputer 111. , Setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102),
An input port 123, a data bus 140, a buffer 133, and a sixth output port 141 are provided. In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting change device 42 (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102) and a probability setting value display device 143 (display unit). In addition,
As described in the first embodiment, the buffer 133 is provided with output ports (corresponding to the test signal output ports 1 to 6 used in the output processing of FIG. 7).

The input port 123, the buffer 133 (second output unit), and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit) are connected to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Input port 1
A setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch 102 are connected to 23. A relay substrate 70 is connected to the buffer 133. A probability set value display device 143 is connected to the sixth output port 141.

Dedicated addresses are assigned to the buffer 133 (second output unit) (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 (first output unit), respectively.
Can output information to any one of the buffer 133 (test signal output port) and the sixth output port 141 by designating an address.

Like the state display device 152 shown in FIG. 71, for example, the probability set value display device 143 displays a 7-segment type (8-segment type including a dot display unit) indicator (LED lamp), and information on the probability set value of the LED. Lighting pattern data representing the lighting pattern (probability setting value display data)
It is composed of drivers that convert to In addition, the test firing test apparatus can also include a display and a driver similar to the probability setting value display apparatus 143.

The gaming microcomputer 111 sends information on the probability setting value area (probability setting value display data corresponding to the fixed value of the probability setting value) or information on the work probability setting value area (provisional of the probability setting value) to the sixth output port 141. Output probability setting value display data corresponding to the value). On the other hand, the gaming microcomputer 11
1 outputs information on the probability setting value area to the buffer 133 (test signal output port), but does not output information on the work probability setting value area.

As a result, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the fixed value and the provisional value of the probability setting value. Further, when the test firing test apparatus includes a display device similar to the probability setting value display device 143, only the fixed value of the probability setting value is displayed on the test firing test apparatus.

[Probability Setting Value Changing Process of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the seventh embodiment. The probability setting value changing process according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), but step A20002 is added between step A2413 and step A2414, and step A20003 is between step A2420 and step A2421. Has been added.

In step A2002, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs a test signal using the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) corresponding to the determined value of the same probability setting value as that output to the probability setting value display device 143 as a test firing test signal. Save to the data area. For example, the lighting pattern data and the test signal output data are the same “10111110B” ((a, b, c, d
, E, f, g, Dp) = (1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0)) (Refer to the sixth embodiment for the lighting pattern data). As a result, the test firing test apparatus can collect the determined value of the probability set value as the test fire test signal, and can display the determined value of the probability set value when the test fire test apparatus includes a display.

In step A20003, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves again the test fire test signal once erased in step A2418 in the test signal output data area. This
Even after the process of changing the probability setting value (main process), the test firing test apparatus can collect data for the fixed value of the probability setting value as the test fire test signal, and if the test firing test apparatus has a display, the probability setting value Can be displayed.

[Display example of probability setting values in probability setting display device and test firing test device]
FIG. 90 shows a 7-segment type (including a dot display section) of lighting pattern data transmitted to the probability setting value display device 143 and a test fire test signal transmitted to the test fire test device at the time of setting change of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram at the time of displaying on a display device of 8 segments type). Here, a case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6 will be described as an example.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value saved in the probability setting value area is saved in the trial test display data area as a trial test signal regardless of whether the setting key switch 93 is on or off. It has become. The trial test apparatus can always collect data on the fixed value of the probability setting value as the test test signal, and can always display the fixed value of the probability setting value when the test test apparatus is equipped with a display.

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value “1” is displayed on the display of the test firing test device by the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) as the test firing test signal. Yes.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the setting variable state is entered, and the gaming microcomputer 111 loads the value of the probability setting value region and stores it in the work probability setting value region as initial data when the probability setting value is changed. Save (A1040). At this stage, in FIG. 89, step A2401 (= Y) → step A2406 (= N) → step A2407 (= N) → step A2411 (= N) is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90 (display by the output process according to FIG. 7), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as the lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143. The display on the display device remains “1” (the fixed value before the change).

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since (= Y), Step A2408 to Step A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (light-out period). Remains “1” (the fixed value before the change).

When the set value change switch 102 is further pressed, in step A240 in FIG.
8-Step A2410 is repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display of the probability set value display device 143 is “3” → “4” → “5”.
”→“ 6 ”(both are provisional values), but the display on the display of the test firing test apparatus remains“ 1 ”(the fixed value before the change).

When there is an input from the touch switch (step A 2411 (= Y)), step A 2412, step A 2413, and step A 20002 are executed, and the probability setting value “6” (in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area) The probability setting value display data corresponding to the (determined value) is overwritten. At this time, as shown in FIG. 90, the probability setting value display device 14
The display of 3 changes from “6” (provisional value) to “6” (determined value), and the display on the display unit of the test firing test apparatus changes from “1” (provisional value) to “6” (determined value).

Further, by executing Step A2406 (= Y) and Step A2416 (= Y), Step A2418 is executed, and the probability setting value display data (probability) saved in the test signal output data area and the probability setting value display data area. The setting value “6”) is once deleted, but is restored by step A2420 and step A20003. In this case, the display of the probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device maintains “6” (determined value).

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value “6” is saved in the probability setting value display data area in step A2420 as shown in FIG. By A20003, the test test signal (lighting pattern data) corresponding to the probability setting value “6” is saved in the test signal output data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set in the subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A
2405, A2502), the probability setting value display device 143 does not display the probability setting value display data (step A1613 (= N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test firing test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624). Therefore, as shown in FIG.
The probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the display of the probability setting value “6” is maintained on the display of the test firing test device.

[First Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 91 shows the probability setting value display device 14 when the setting is changed in the first modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram in a case where the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test fire test signal transmitted to the test fire test device are displayed on a 7-segment display (8-segment display when the dot display portion is included).

The probability setting value display device 143 and the display of the test firing test device can display 7-segment lighting pattern data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) and dot data (Dp) (additional information). (See FIG. 71). For example, the dot display portion associated with the 7-segment segment is turned on when the dot data (Dp) is “1”, and turned off when the dot data (Dp) is “0”.

As described above, the output processing (step A1621, step A1622 (= Y
In step A1623 and step A1624), the test test signal and setting key switch-on information are synthesized and output. On the other hand, Step A1621 and Step A162
2 (= N), the test fire test signal is output as it is when there is no setting key switch-on information.

In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 93 is in the on state, a setting key switch on signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. Here, the setting key switch on signal can be expressed as “1”, for example. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state, it can be considered that a setting key switch OFF signal (a state in which there is no setting key switch ON signal) is input to the gaming microcomputer 111. At this time, the setting key switch-off signal can be expressed, for example, as “0”.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the test test signal is lighting pattern data, the setting key switch on information is dot data (1), the setting key switch off information is dot data (0), and the lighting pattern data and dot data (Dp = 0 or 1) is output to the trial test apparatus. Thereby, in the test firing test apparatus, the fixed value of the probability setting value is displayed based on the lighting pattern data. Further, whether the setting key switch 93 is on or off, that is, whether or not the setting is being changed, can be grasped by turning on / off the dot display portion with or without the dot data (1). In the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp that the dot display portion is lit by the dot data (1) and the setting is being changed, and it is grasped that the dot display portion is turned off and the setting change is completed by the dot data (0). can do.

In the present embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 stores lighting pattern data (determined values of probability setting values) and data (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) including dot data in the buffer 133 ( A test signal output port) and a relay board 70 (FIG. 3) are configured to output to the test firing test apparatus. Thereby, the test firing test apparatus can grasp not only the final value of the current probability setting value but also whether or not the setting is being changed.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the first modified example, the display of the test firing test apparatus always displays the fixed value of the probability setting value, but when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the dot is lit.
While the probability setting value (provisional value) is switched from “1” to “6”, the probability setting value and the lighting of the dots are maintained. When the new set value is confirmed, the updated set value of the probability setting value is displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the dot is turned off. It is the same as FIG. 90 except that the dots are turned on and off.

[Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the second modification of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification, dot data (Dp indicating that the setting is being changed)
= 0 or 1) is also displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 so that the operator who changes the setting can visually determine whether or not the setting is being changed.

In FIG. 92 as compared with FIG. 90, step A20001 is added between step A2406 and step A2407, and accordingly step A2409 is changed to step A2409a, step A2413 is changed to step 2413a, and step A2420 is changed to step A2420a. Has been changed.

In step A2406 (= N), at least the setting key switch 93 is in the on state. Therefore, in step A20001, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. Accordingly, the probability setting value (provisional value) before the setting value change switch input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display portion is lit.

In step A2409a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 1) corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. Thereby, the probability setting value (provisional value) changed by the setting value change switch input in the probability setting value display device 143 can be displayed while the dot display portion is lit.

In step A2413a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. Accordingly, the probability setting value (determined value) after the setting value change switch is input can be displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 while the dot display portion is turned off.

In step A2420a, the gaming microcomputer 111 saves the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area. Thereby, it is possible to keep the dot display portion off. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value display permission flag is set in subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2405, A2502). The probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). On the other hand, the test signal output data continues to be transmitted to the test firing test apparatus (A1621, A1622, A1624).

FIG. 93 shows the probability setting value display device 14 when the setting is changed in the second modification of the seventh embodiment.
3 is a schematic diagram in a case where the lighting pattern data transmitted to 3 and the test fire test signal transmitted to the test fire test device are displayed on a 7-segment display (8-segment display when the dot display portion is included).

In the initial state, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off, and the probability setting value “1” is displayed as a test firing test signal (lighting pattern data) on the display of the test firing test device. Note that the information displayed on the display of the test firing test apparatus is the same as that in the first modified example, and hence the description thereof is omitted.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (1) corresponding to the work probability setting value are saved in the probability setting value display data area (step A20001). As a result, as shown in FIG. 93 (display by the output processing according to FIG. 7), “1” (provisional value) is displayed as the lighting pattern data on the probability setting value display device 143, and the dot display portion is lit. .

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, step A2407 in FIG.
Since the determination result is “Y”, Step A2408 to Step A2410 are executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, “2” (provisional value) is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 after a predetermined lighting blank period (light-out period), and the dot display portion is lit.

When the set value change switch 102 is further pressed, in step A240 in FIG.
8. Step A2409a and Step A2410 are repeated. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, every time the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the probability setting value display device 143 displays “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” (both are provisional values). The dot display portion also lights up in conjunction with the display of the probability setting value.

When the touch switch is input (Step A 2411 (= Y)), Step A
2412, step A2413a, and step A20002 are executed, and the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value “6” (determined value) is overwritten in the probability setting value display data area. At this time, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 displays “6” (provisional value).
From the state where the dot display portion is lit, “6” (determined value) is lit and the dot display portion is turned off. Thereby, the worker can visually grasp that the probability setting value has been updated from “1” to “6”.

Finally, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the probability setting value display data and the dot data (Dp = 0) corresponding to the probability setting value (determined value) are set as the probability in step A2420a as shown in FIG. Saved in the value display data area. Since the probability setting value display permission flag is not set when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, until the probability setting value display permission flag is set in subsequent setting change or setting confirmation (A2
405, A2502), the probability setting value display data is not displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (step A1613 (= N)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 93, lighting of the dot display part of the indicator of the test firing test apparatus can be omitted.

[Operations and effects of the seventh embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes game control means (game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100) that can execute a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition. A special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine 10 includes a setting change means (setting change device 42) that can change a setting value according to a setting related to the game, a display unit (probability setting value display device 143) that can display the setting value, and a display unit. A first output unit (sixth output port 141) from which lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) is output, and a second output unit different from the first output unit (
Buffer 133, test signal output port). Game control means (game microcomputer 1
11) generates lighting pattern data (probability set value display data) based on the set value, and outputs it to the display unit (probability set value display device 143) via the first output unit (sixth output port 141). The lighting pattern data can be output as a test signal (trial test signal) of the gaming machine to an external device (test system) via the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port).

Therefore, by making the test signal (trial test signal) output to the external device (trial test device) the same data as the lighting pattern, it can be ensured that the test signal is correct raw information, and the display of the gaming machine 10 Even when the setting value display is not performed in the unit (probability setting value display device 143), the probability setting value can be notified to an external device provided outside the gaming machine 10. In addition, when the unconfirmed setting information during the setting change is output to the first output unit (sixth output port 141), but not output to the second output unit (buffer 133, test signal output port), it is unconfirmed. Setting information can be prevented from being output to the outside, and confusion due to unnecessary information can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays lighting pattern data (
The setting value related to the probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0or1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the setting value. Switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state capable of
When the switch is in the on state, the game control means includes additional information (dot data (Dp
= 1)), and the additional information together with the test signal can be output to an external device (trial fire test device).

Accordingly, a fixed value of the set value is displayed based on the lighting pattern data in the external device (trial fire test device). Further, the external device can grasp whether the switch (setting key switch 93) is on or off, that is, whether the setting is being changed, based on the presence / absence of additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)). In the present embodiment, for example, in an external device (trial test apparatus),
It is possible to grasp that the dot display portion is turned on by the dot data (Dp = 1) as additional information and the setting is being changed, and the dot display portion is turned off by the dot data (Dp = 0) and the setting change is completed. I can understand that.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143) displays lighting pattern data (
The setting value related to the probability setting value display data) and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0or1)) different from the setting value can be displayed, and the setting changing means (setting changing device 42) changes the setting value. Switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state capable of
The game control means (game microcomputer 111) generates additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) when the switch is on, and displays the additional information together with the lighting pattern data (probability setting value). To the display device 143).

Therefore, by displaying additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who changes the setting is changing the setting or has the setting changed. Can be judged visually.

[Eighth Embodiment]
FIG. 94A is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 1) of a game control system according to the eighth embodiment. The game control system according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, but is simplified and displayed in the minimum necessary configuration in order to explain the effects of the invention. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is
At least a game control device 100 (game control means) and a power supply device 400 (power supply means) are provided. The power supply device 400 is supplied with an external rated voltage (for example, AC24V from the game island), generates a predetermined power supply voltage (for example, DC32V, DC12V, DC5V), and the game control device 1
Output to 00.

The game control device 100 includes a probability setting value display device 143A (probability setting value display device 143).
And a driver 143a is attached. The probability set value display device 143A is provided with the power supply device 4
Is driven by receiving electric power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 constituting 00, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 via the driver 143a. Driver 14
3a converts the probability setting value information output by the gaming microcomputer 111 into lighting pattern data and outputs it. The probability setting value display device 143A can display the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data input from the driver 143a.

A probability setting value display device 143B is attached to the power supply device 400. The probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, and is connected to the sixth output port 141 through the driver 143a. Yes. Therefore, the probability set value display device 143B also uses the driver 143.
The probability setting value can be displayed by the lighting pattern data input from a. As described above, the probability setting value display device 143B is arranged in the power supply device 400, whereby the probability setting value can be easily confirmed. Further, since the probability setting value display device 143B is driven by receiving power (for example, DC5V) from the normal power supply unit 410 without going through the game control device 100, power is supplied from the game control device 100 to the probability setting value display device 143B. Since the wiring for performing the process can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 94A (broken line), in this embodiment, the set value change switch 102 can be attached to the power supply apparatus 400. As described above, the set value change switch 102 is connected to the RA.
It can also be used as an M clear switch. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to improve work efficiency when performing setting change using the setting value change switch 102 or RAM clear.

Note that the display of the probability setting value and the control of turning on / off the dot display unit in the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B are the same as in the seventh embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 94B is a block diagram showing a configuration example (No. 2) of the game control system according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94B, in the eighth embodiment, a DC / DC converter 143b (voltage conversion means) is attached to the game control device 100, and the output voltage is displayed as a probability setting value display device 143A.
It is also preferable to supply to the probability set value display device 143B.

The arrangement of FIG. 94B is, for example, when the normal power supply unit 410 does not generate the driving voltage (for example, DC 5V) of the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B, or even if the driving voltage is generated, the capacity is insufficient. This arrangement is suitable when the probability setting value display device 143A and the probability setting value display device 143B cannot be driven. At this time, the output voltage (for example, DC 12V) of the normal power supply unit 410 is input to the input side of the DC / DC converter 143b, and the output side (for example, DC 5V) is the probability set value display device 143A and the probability set value display device 143B.
Connected to.

Here, the wiring 143c for outputting the lighting pattern data from the driver 143a to the probability setting value display device 143B, and the probability setting value display device 143 from the DC / DC converter 143b.
In the wiring 143d for supplying a driving voltage to B, a harness is formed by a portion straddling between the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400, and connected to the harness by a portion arranged in the game control device 100 and the power supply device 400 It is good also as a structure which forms the connector to perform and connects two connectors with the said harness. Thus, the wiring 143c and the wiring 1
The case where any one of 43d disconnection generate | occur | produces can be reduced, and the malfunctioning of the probability setting value display apparatus 143B can be prevented.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variable display. When the game stop result is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 can change a setting value corresponding to a setting relating to a game, and a power supply means (power supply device 400) that generates a predetermined power supply voltage from a rated voltage supplied from outside the gaming machine and supplies it to the game control means Setting changing means (setting changing device 42). The game control means (game control device 100) generates lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data) related to the probability setting value. The power supply means (power supply device 400) is a display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) that displays the probability setting value based on the lighting pattern data (probability setting value display data).
Is provided.

Therefore, the display unit (probability set value display device 143B) is arranged in the power supply means (power supply device 400), so that the set value can be easily confirmed and the opportunity for confirming the set value can be increased. .

In this embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) is connected to the power supply voltage (predetermined voltage value) from the power supply means (power supply device 400) without going through the game control means (game control apparatus 100).
Drive voltage). Thereby, since the wiring which supplies electric power from the game control means to the display unit can be omitted, the cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) is a power supply means (power supply apparatus 4).
Voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b) that converts the voltage supplied from (00) and supplies it to the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B).

Therefore, when the power supply means (power supply device 400) does not generate the drive voltage (for example, DC5V) of the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B), even if the drive voltage is generated, the drive of the display unit is covered due to insufficient capacity. If not, voltage conversion means (DC / DC converter 143b)
However, the power supply voltage can be reliably supplied to the probability set value display device 143B.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (probability setting value display device 143B) can display the setting value related to the lighting pattern data and additional information (dot data (Dp = 0or1)) different from the setting value, and change the setting. The means (setting change device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) includes a switch (setting key switch 100). When the switch 93) is on, additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is generated, and the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)) is output to the display unit together with the lighting pattern data.

Therefore, by displaying additional information (dot data (Dp = 0 or 1)) on the display unit (depending on whether the dot display unit is lit), whether the operator who changes the setting is changing the setting or has the setting changed. Can be visually determined from the display content of the display unit arranged in the power supply means (power supply device 400).

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 100. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to output of external information when a setting is changed.

[External information output timing chart when changing settings]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment.

After the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) of the setting changing device 42 (setting changing means) is turned on (first mode) at time u2, and then the time u
3, the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag because the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1).
038), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) which has been turned off (setting value display, A1615).
.

Note that, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, an accessory ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78) of the state display device 152 that displays an accessory ratio is used as the probability setting value display device 143. That is, during the setting change or setting confirmation, the probability is given to any one of the four 7-segment type display units 900 (8-segment type including the point portion) of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (FIG. 78). The set value may be displayed. In addition, when the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display unit 68. Therefore, the accessory ratio display unit 68 is used for the display of the accessory ratio and the set value. Moreover, it is not limited only to what uses the accessory ratio display part 68 of the state display apparatus 152 as the probability setting value display apparatus 143, The content regarding the external information output described in 9th Embodiment is another embodiment (especially 1st In the eighth to eighth embodiments, the probability setting value display device 143 is replaced with the status display device 15.
The present invention may be applied to the case where it is provided independently of 2.

Then, when the probability setting value changing flag is set, the gaming machine state shifts from the gaming mode to the setting changing mode (setting variable state). The game mode indicates a state of the gaming machine other than the setting change mode (setting variable state) and a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state, setting value confirmation mode) described later.

Further, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on at time u3, the game control device 100 executes the external information editing process (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6). Then, as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the setting change mode (setting variable state)
Therefore, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the security signal control timer (A1037), and outputs external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal to the external device (external information output on, A1611). ). The external device (various external devices) is a device provided outside the gaming machine 10, such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A1037). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours or the like) as shown by the external information output in FIG. 95, for example. In this manner, the game control device 100 can output a predetermined signal as external information by including information related to the setting (for example, information indicating that the setting has changed to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later) in the security signal. Functions as external signal output means.

When the setting value change switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) of the setting change device 42 (setting change means) is operated (pressed) by the operator, the setting changes from setting 1 to setting 2 at time u4, and time u5 Then, from setting 2 to setting 3, and from time 3 to setting 4 from setting 3 to setting 4. In this way, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the set value (setting) is changed by +1, and after setting 6, the set value change switch 102 is operated to change to setting 1. Specifically, every time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the set value 1 → the set value 2 →
The setting value (setting) is changed as follows: setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 →.

Thereafter, when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is turned on at time u7, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability setting value has been changed (A
The result of 2406 is “Y” and the setting is confirmed. At this time, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs the predetermined signal that has been output in order to include the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode and include the security signal as external information (predetermined signal). Is turned off. That is, even when an extremely long predetermined time is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer at time u3, the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is temporarily interrupted.

Then, when the output of the predetermined signal (external information output) is interrupted at time u8, the game control device 100 outputs the new predetermined signal (external information output) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, By turning on, for example, information indicating that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode is included in the security signal, and then the output of the new predetermined signal is turned off. Thereafter, the game control device 100 ends the interruption of the external information output and turns on the external information output again. The interruption time is a time before the output of the new predetermined signal is turned on for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec) and the time before the output of the new predetermined signal is turned on. Time to turn off external information output (for example, 256 msec)
And the time (for example, 256 msec) that turns off the output of the new predetermined signal later is set to the total time (for example, 768 msec).

Thereafter, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off (second mode) at time u9, and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), together with the probability setting value changing flag, security signal control Regardless of whether the timer has elapsed or not, it is forcibly cleared, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the gaming mode, and the setting change ends. In addition, when the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the probability setting value display device 143 (in this embodiment, the state display device) in which the setting value is displayed. The bonus rate display unit 68 displays the bonus rate (a bonus rate display). The probability set value display device 143
In the state display device 152 that is also used as a combination, instead of displaying information related to the ratio of the actors, information related to the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state) may be displayed ( (Releasing rate display, number of discharged balls, base value display).

[Modification of external information output timing chart when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change in FIG. 95 will be described. FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of output of external information at the time of setting change according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 96, only the external information output timing of FIG. 95 is extracted and described.

First, FIG. 96A is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when the setting is changed in FIG.

As described above, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 (setting key) turned on at time u3, the game control device 100 outputs an external information output (security signal). turn on.

Then, when the setting is confirmed at time u7 (setting confirmation), the game control apparatus 100 temporarily interrupts the output of the external information, and includes information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode at time u8 in the security signal. In order to output the information (predetermined signal), the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse width, for example, 256 msec), and then the external information output is turned off.

After that, after a lapse time (for example, 768 msec) from the time u7, the game control device 1
00 turns off the external information output and then turns off the setting key switch 93 (setting key) at time u9 to turn off the external information output and change the gaming machine state from the setting change mode to the gaming mode. To migrate.

Next, a first modification of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described with reference to FIG.

At time u3, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output as in FIG. 96 (a).

Then, with the setting confirmation at time u7, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output.

After that, at time u8, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as the external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). Width, eg 256 msec) after turning on
Turn off the external information output. Thereafter, the external information output is kept off, and the time u9
Thus, the setting key switch 93 is turned off. As described above, in the first modification, the external information output is terminated instead of temporarily interrupting when the setting at time t7 is fixed, and then the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time at time t8.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96C, a second modification example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change will be described.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on at the time u3 with the setting key switch 93 turned on, in the second modification, the external information output is kept off.

When the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is kept off again, and the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u9. As described above, in the second modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting is confirmed at time t7, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is confirmed.

Further, with reference to FIG. 96 (d), a third modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change will be described.

At time u3, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the gaming control device 100 outputs external information as in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b). turn on.

Thereafter, when the setting is confirmed at time u7, the game control apparatus 100 turns off the external information output. As described above, in the third modification, the external information output is kept on from the time when the power is turned on at time t3 until the setting is confirmed at time t7, and is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[External information output timing chart when checking settings]
Next, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of external information output timing at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment.

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time u10, the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u11. Then, the probability setting value display device 143 (the accessory ratio display unit 6 of the state display device 152)
8 is also used), since the gaming state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at the time u11 is the gaming mode, the bonus rate is displayed (a bonus rate display).

Thereafter, when the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on while the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time u12, the gaming control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). Then, the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506), and the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the accessory ratio has been displayed (setting value display, A1615).

Then, when the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, the gaming machine state shifts from the gaming mode to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).

When the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100
External information editing processing (A1317, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B) by timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6)
Is running. Since the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is entered as described above in the description of the external information editing process, the initial value of the security signal control timer is set (A25).
07), external information (predetermined signal) including the security signal is output to the external device (external information output on, A1611). In the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set as the initial value of the security signal control timer when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by turning on the setting key switch 93 (A2507). The predetermined time set as the initial value of the security signal control timer may be an extremely long time (24 hours or the like) as shown by the external information output in FIG. 97, for example.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the security signal control timer is forcibly cleared regardless of whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed together with the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). The external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode, and the setting confirmation is completed. At the same time, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511), and the accessory ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the setting value has been displayed (the accessory ratio display). ). In addition, it is good also as not only an accessory ratio display but a payout rate display, a discharge ball number display, and a base value display.

[Modification of external information output timing chart when checking settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a modified example of the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting confirmation in FIG. 97 will be described. FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of external information output at the time of setting confirmation according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 98, only the external information output timing of FIG. 97 is extracted and described.

First, FIG. 98A is a timing chart showing the timing of external information output when the setting is confirmed in FIG.

As described above, after the power is turned on at time u11, the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12.
When the (setting key) is turned on, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output (security signal).

When the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned off at time u13, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output and shifts the gaming machine state from the setting confirmation mode to the gaming mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a modified example of the external information output timing at the time of confirming the setting will be described.

After the power is turned on at time u11, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on at time u12, the game control device 100 includes information indicating that the setting control mode has been entered in the security signal and includes external information (predetermined signal). ) To output external information for a predetermined time (for example, 2)
56 msec) After turning on, the external information output is turned off. Thereafter, the external information output is maintained in the off state, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time u13, the game control device includes information that the setting confirmation mode is ended and the game mode is entered in the security signal. External information output for a predetermined time (for example, 25)
6 msec) After turning on again, the external information output is turned off. Thus, in the modified example of the external information output timing at the time of confirming the setting, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on or off. The external information output is kept off except when it is performed.

[External information output timing chart when changing the settings of the modified example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to a modification of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to a modification of the ninth embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 99 and 100, the description overlapping with FIG. 95 is omitted as appropriate.

In this modification, a RAM initialization switch is provided independently of the set value change switch 102. When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on at power-on (power restoration), the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. Specifically, after the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the RAM initialization switch is turned on (pressed) while the gaming machine 1
When the power of 0 is turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode (setting variable state).

After the gaming machine 10 is turned off at time w1, the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w2. Then, when the RWM clear switch is pressed at time w3 and the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time w4 while maintaining the pressed state,
The probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), and the mode shifts to the setting changing mode according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. When the setting change mode according to the modified example of the ninth embodiment is entered, the setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) that has been turned off (setting value display, A1615). Thereafter, the pressed state of the RWM clear switch is released at time w5, and the set value (setting) is changed every time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch) is operated at times w6, w7, and w8.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), and the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 is “Y”, the setting is confirmed). As described above, in this modification, the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 instead of the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24.

Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time w9, the RA to be cleared
The M area is also cleared to 0 (A2417). Therefore, the security signal control timer is cleared together with the probability setting value changing flag, the external information output is turned off, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the gaming mode, and the setting change is completed. When the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2417), the probability setting value display permission flag is also cleared, and the feature ratio is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 (setting display device) on which the setting value has been displayed. (Functional ratio display)

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting has been confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as the external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width (for example, 256 msec), the external information output is turned off. As described above, at the external information output timing at the time of setting change according to this modification, the external information output is turned on at a time w10 for a predetermined time after the external information output is ended when the setting of time w9 is confirmed.

Subsequently, FIG. 100 is another example in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification of the ninth embodiment is changed. In FIG. 100, only the external information output timing of FIG. 99 is extracted and described.

FIG. 100A is a timing chart showing the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) when the setting is changed in FIG.

As described above, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time w4, the game control device 100 receives the external information. Turn on the output.

When setting is confirmed by setting key switch 93 being turned off at time w9 (setting confirmation), game control device 100 turns off external information output (security signal).

After that, at time w10, the game control device 100 includes the information that the setting is confirmed in the setting change mode in the security signal and outputs the external information as the external information (predetermined signal) for a predetermined time (predetermined pulse). After turning on the width (for example, 256 msec), the external information output is turned off. Thereafter, the external information output is kept off.

Next, a first modification example in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modification example will be described with reference to FIG.

At time w4, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is on, in the first modification, the external information output is in the off state. Maintained.

When the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns on the external information output for a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec). Thereafter, the external information output is kept off again. Thus, in the first modification, the external information output is turned on for a predetermined time when the setting of time w9 is confirmed, and the off state is maintained except when the setting is confirmed.

Furthermore, with reference to FIG. 100 (c), a second modified example in which the timing of outputting a predetermined signal (external information output) at the time of setting change according to the modified example will be described.

At time w4, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on while the RWM clear switch is pressed while the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the gaming control device 100 displays
As in 0 (a), the external information output is turned on.

Thereafter, when the setting is confirmed by turning off the setting key switch 93 at time w9, the game control device 100 turns off the external information output. Thus, in the second modification, the on-state of the external information output is maintained from when the power is turned on at time w4 until the setting is confirmed at time w9, and is turned off after the setting is confirmed.

[Operations and effects of the ninth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special decoration symbol, decorative first symbol AC) in a variable manner is a special result ( In the case of a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode), it is possible to generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing settings (setting values, probability setting values) relating to gaming conditions, and external devices (for example, information collection terminals and games) provided outside the gaming machine 10. Inside management device (hall computer)
And external signal output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting a predetermined signal as external information. The setting changing means includes setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting variable state (setting changing mode) in which the setting can be changed by being set to the first mode (ON). The external signal output means outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output (for example, security signal output)) in response to the transition to the setting variable state by the setting transition means.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, information related to the setting (for example, the setting change mode is transferred from the external signal output means (game control device 100) to the external device when the setting variable state (setting change mode) is set. (Information indicating this) is output as external information (predetermined signal), and can be notified to the game hall manager through the external device. As a result, the game hall manager can play the gaming machine 10 at a timing (for example, fraud or machine trouble) that the game hall manager does not intend.
When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, it can be quickly noticed that the mode has shifted.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting change unit (setting change device 42) is a change that can be changed by being operated when the setting change unit (setting change mode) is shifted to. Operation means (setting value change switch 102, setting switch, setting value change button) are provided. After the external signal output means (game control device 100) changes the setting (setting value, probability setting value) by the change operation means, the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) is in the second mode (off). In response to this, a predetermined signal is output (external signal output). Therefore, according to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting is changed, it is possible to notify the game hall manager through the external device, so that the gaming hall manager can set the gaming machine 10 at an unintended timing. You can quickly notice that it has changed.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, external signal output means (game control device 100).
) Starts outputting a predetermined signal (external signal output) in response to the transition to the setting variable state (setting change mode) by the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key), and the setting transition means Corresponding to the second mode (off), the output of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is terminated. According to such a gaming machine 10, while the setting variable state is set, the output state of the predetermined signal (external signal output) is maintained and notification to the game hall manager can be continued through the external device. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the gaming machine 10 has shifted to the setting variable state at an unintended timing. In addition, when the game hall manager intentionally changes the setting, it is possible to take a history (log) on the external device to see how long the work time related to the setting change is, thereby improving the work time efficiency. It can be used as statistical information for the purpose of illustration.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, external signal output means (game control device 100)
In response to the setting transition means (setting key switch 93, setting key) being set to the second mode (off), after a predetermined signal output (external signal output) is finished, a predetermined pulse width ( For example, a signal of 256 msec) is output. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the external signal output is output with a predetermined pulse width not only during the setting variable state but also when the setting transition means is set to the second mode and the setting is confirmed. Therefore, the game hall manager can quickly notice that the setting has been confirmed after the gaming machine 10 shifts to the setting variable state at an unintended timing.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the setting is made by setting the first mode (ON) under a condition (for example, after power-on) different from the condition for shifting to the setting variable state (setting change mode). Setting confirmation means (setting key switch 93, setting key) capable of shifting to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The external signal output means (game control device 100) outputs a predetermined signal (external signal output) while the setting confirmation means shifts to the setting confirmation state. According to such a gaming machine 10, not only when changing to the setting change state but also when changing to the setting confirmation state, the game hall manager can be notified through the external device, so the game hall manager can It is possible to quickly notice that Yuki Tree 10 has shifted to the setting confirmation state at an unintended timing. The setting key switch 93 (setting key) functions as a setting confirmation unit together with the setting transition unit, but the setting key switch 9 as the setting transition unit is used.
A switch different from 3 may be provided as setting confirmation means.

[Tenth embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to ninth embodiments. 10th
The embodiment relates to a display mode of probability setting values.

[Display of batch display device]
FIG. 101 shows a stop symbol number (A4004, A4013, A4016, A7510), a lighting pattern of the first special figure variation display section 51 of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number, a lighting pattern of a probability setting value, FIG. The lighting pattern corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (A4006, A4014, A4017).

First, FIG. 101 (a) shows a stop symbol number and a first special symbol variation display section 51 (7 segment type (or 8 segment) for the special diagram 1 variation display game of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the stop symbol number. It is a figure which illustrates the lighting pattern of LED lamp D1 (FIG. 34A etc.)).

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game), the game control device 100
After the identification information (special symbol, special symbol) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display unit 51, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. For example, the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number (0 to 50) of the predetermined result mode is selected from the lighting patterns shown in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 101B is a diagram illustrating a lighting pattern of probability setting values.

In response to the setting key switch 93 (setting key) being turned on and being able to change the setting value (setting change mode, setting variable mode), the identification information in FIG. The lighting pattern showing the subsequent predetermined result mode is switched to the lighting pattern of the probability setting value shown in FIG.

Display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change according to the present embodiment (in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-) of the collective display device 50.
The light emission mode (lighting / extinguishing mode) of D18) is the first described in FIG. 34A and FIG.
It can carry out similarly to the aspect which concerns on embodiment. Specifically, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 is based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability setting value and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value. The numbers 1 to 6 indicating the work probability setting values and the probability setting values are lit or blinked (A1603-A1608 in the output process).
.

Thus, during the probability setting change, the game machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by performing a different display (a display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the first special figure change display unit 51 (lighting pattern in FIG. 101A), the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used. As a result, the display mode of the probability setting value,
It is possible to easily distinguish a display mode related to a game such as a result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Subsequently, FIG. 101C is a diagram illustrating another lighting pattern of the probability setting value. First
As shown in FIG. 101 (c), the special figure variation display section 51 lights up the decimal point (dot display section Dp) and displays the work probability setting value and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting value. You may make it blink. As described above, when the work probability setting values and the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are displayed or blinked, the game machine 10 sets the probability by lighting the decimal point (Dp). It can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that it is being changed.

It should be noted that the stop symbol number shown in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed on the second special figure fluctuation display portion 52 (7 segment type (or 8 segment type) LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. The lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number may be displayed as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, the probability setting values shown in FIGS. 101 (b) and 101 (c) may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52. Here, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (lighting pattern in FIG. 101A), the numbers 1 to 1 indicating the probability setting values are provided as in the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. 6 shall not be used.

Further, every time the set value change switch 102 (setting switch, set value change button) is pressed to change the probability set value, the first special figure fluctuation display portion 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display of the collective display device 50 are displayed. The probability setting values may be alternately switched and displayed on the unit 52. In this way, the probability setting value is changed by pressing the setting value change switch 102 by alternately switching the probability setting value and displaying it on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52. This can be made easier to recognize.

In addition, the lighting pattern of the probability setting value is displayed so as to be different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number illustrated in FIG. 101 (a). A different pattern from the lighting pattern corresponding to the symbol number may be displayed. In other words, there is a possibility that the lighting pattern of the probability setting value overlaps with the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol, but the probability that the lighting pattern of the jackpot symbol is displayed is low and is rarely displayed. Also, if the player wins a big hit, it is considered that the game will continue until the special gaming state is finished, so the probability that the lighting pattern of the big hit symbol is changed when the setting is changed is very small. Therefore, even when a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number of the misplaced symbol is displayed as the probability setting value in this way, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting is displayed on the front of the gaming machine 10. Can suggest.

In addition, during the probability setting change, while the probability setting value is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the collective display device 50, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 is displayed. Alternatively, all the light emitting units (LED lamps D3 to D18) of the collective display device 50 other than the second special figure variation display unit 52 may be blinked. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can also be caused by causing all the light emitting units of the collective display device 50 other than the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 to blink and display in a manner different from normal. It can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the probability setting is being changed.

[Display of status display device]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing details of the state display device 152 that displays information regarding the payout rate. The status display device 152 includes four 7-segment type display devices (8-segment type including a dot portion) arranged side by side, and shows a digit 0, a digit 1, a digit 2, and a digit 3 from the right. This is a 4-digit 7-segment display. The status display device 152 corresponds to the total payout rate (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102) from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time and the number of discharged balls of the most recent predetermined number (eg, 60,000 shots) It is possible to switch and display the ball exit rate (for example, “b6.36”). Note that the status display device 152 may display not only the ball exit rate but also the base value and the accessory ratio. In the present embodiment, the state display device 152 is the probability setting value display device 1.
43 is also used, and the probability setting value can be displayed.

Next, FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating details of the state display device 152 that displays numbers indicating probability setting values.

FIG. 103A is an example of the state display device 152 that displays a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value in the leftmost digit 3. Digit 3 is a digit in which a character other than a number (for example, “b”) is displayed in the ball exit rate display shown in FIG. Therefore, by displaying the probability setting value in the digit 3, the number portion and the probability setting value other than the probability setting value, that is, the display relating to the game (for example, the pitching rate display) are not covered. Also, unlike the ball exit rate display shown in FIG. 102, the digits other than the digit 3 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off. As a result, it is possible to easily distinguish the display mode of the probability setting value from other display modes such as the pitching rate display.

FIG. 103 (b) is an example of the state display device 152 that displays a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value in the digit 2. Similar to FIG. 103A, the digits other than the digit 2 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off. Therefore, according to such a display mode, it can be easily recognized that the probability setting value is displayed.

FIG. 103 (c) shows a state display device 1 in which a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value is displayed in the digit 1.
FIG. 103 (d) is an example of the status display device 152 that displays a number indicating the probability setting value in the digit 0. Digits other than digit 1 or digit 0 for displaying the probability setting value are turned off.
Therefore, according to these display modes, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the example in FIG. 103B in which the digits other than the digit 2 are turned off, and it is easy to recognize that the probability setting value is displayed. it can.

FIG. 103 (e) is an example of the state display device 152 that displays a number (for example, 3) indicating the probability setting value in all of the digits 0 to 3. Thus, since the same number indicating the probability setting value is arranged in all the digits of the state display device 152, the display mode differs from the display related to other games. It is possible to easily distinguish display modes relating to other games such as display.

Note that the probability setting value displayed on the status display device 152 is changing the probability setting (setting change mode).
In the case of the work probability setting value, the blinking display is preferable, and in the case of the probability setting value for displaying the determined setting, the lighting display is preferable.

When the work probability setting value (probability setting value) is displayed in the setting change mode, every time the setting value change switch 102 (setting switch, setting value change button) is pressed and the probability setting value is changed, The digits of the probability setting values displayed on the status display device 152 may be shifted one by one. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed as 3 in the digit 3, when the setting value change switch 102 is pressed, the probability setting value is displayed as 4 in the digit 2, and the setting value change switch 102 By pressing again, the probability setting value can be displayed as 5 in the digit 1. When the set value change switch 102 is pressed at the digit 0, the probability set value can be displayed at the digit 3. The mode of shifting the digits of the probability setting values displayed on the status display device 152 one by one is not limited to the mode of shifting from the left to the right, and may be shifted from the right to the left.

[Modification of the tenth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the display devices (the collective display device 50 and the status display device 152) also function as the probability setting value display device 143, and display the game (for example, display results after the identification information is variably displayed). It was possible to display a predetermined result mode, a starting rate, a base value, and an accessory ratio) and a setting value (probability setting value) related to the game condition. However, the display device (the collective display device 50 and the state display device 152) is not limited to the mode in which the probability setting value display device 143 is also used as described above, and the display device (the collective display device 50 and the state is displayed) as in the first embodiment. The probability setting value display device 143 may be provided on the gaming machine 10 as an independent second display device different from the display device 152 (first display device). Further, when displaying on one display device, the display on the other display device may be turned off. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is displayed on the second display device (probability setting value display device 143), the first display device (collective display device 50).
, The display on the state display device 152) can be hidden.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special decoration symbol, decorative first symbol A to C) in a variable manner is a special result ( Control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value in the case of a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, a special result mode) is provided. The gaming machine 10 is a display device (a collective display device 50, a state that can display a display related to a game (for example, a predetermined result mode, a rate of appearance, a base, and an accessory ratio) as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed. Display device 152) and setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means displays the setting value on the display device in a manner different from the display related to the game, in response to the setting change means being able to change the setting value (setting change mode, setting variable state). .

According to such a gaming machine 10, the probability setting value is different from a display related to a game such as a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed in a variable display game, a pitching rate, a base, and an accessory ratio. Is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152). Therefore, the display mode of the probability setting value can be easily distinguished from the display related to the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the control means (the game control device 100) is a variable display game (for example, a predetermined result mode after the identification information is variably displayed).
The display result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device (collective display device 50), and the setting value (probability setting value) can be changed by the setting change means (setting change device 42) (setting change mode, setting) In response to the change to the variable state, the display on the display device is switched from the display relating to the game to the set value. According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched to a changeable state, the setting value is displayed on the display device in a manner different from the display related to the game. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that a game (for example, a variable display game) is not possible.

Note that the display mode of the display device (collective display device 50 or status display device 152) is not limited to the probability setting change, but also during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) as described above. It can be set as a display mode different from the display regarding.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, a display relating to the game (for example, a predetermined result form as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a starting rate, a base value, and an accessory ratio) is displayed. First display device (collective display device 50, status display device 152), setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) relating to game conditions, and setting values can be displayed A second display device (probability setting value display device 143). The control means (game control device 100) corresponds to the setting value being changed by the setting changing means (setting change mode, setting variable state), and the setting value is different from the display related to the game. Is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition are displayed on different display devices, so that the display related to the game and the display related to the game condition can be easily distinguished. .

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100).
) Is a display relating to the game (for example, a predetermined result form as a display result after the identification information is variably displayed, a starting rate, a base value, and an accessory ratio) on the first display device (collective display device 50, status display). The first display corresponding to the fact that the setting value (probability setting value) is changed to a changeable state (setting change mode, setting variable state) by the setting change means (setting change device 42). The display relating to the game of the device is hidden, and the set value is displayed on the second display device (probability set value display device 143). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display related to the game on the first display device is not displayed when the set value is displayed on the second display device, the gaming machine 10 can play a game (for example, a variable display game). ) Can be easily identified.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to tenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to tenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The eleventh embodiment relates to a small hit or the like.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
104A and 104B show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table illustrated with respect to it.

In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has a small amount). The hit probability is 0 for each setting). In the first embodiment, the small hit occurs only as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (in the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit probability is 0 in each setting.
Is).

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 104C and FIG. 104D, the control contents of the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process are switched from the first embodiment. That is, the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 104C) of the present embodiment is the same as the big hit flag 2 setting process (FIG. 2) of the first embodiment.
1) to “Big hit flag 2” and “Special figure 2” are respectively replaced with “Big hit flag 1” and “Special figure 1”. Steps A17001-A17006 in FIG. 104C are steps A3701-A3706 in FIG. Corresponding to Also, the big hit flag 2 setting process (
104D) corresponds to the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 20) of the first embodiment in which “big hit flag 1” and “special figure 1” are replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 2”, respectively. However, Steps A18001-A18010 in FIG. 104D correspond to Steps A3601-A36 in FIG.
10 corresponds.

In the pattern I table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability, which is the probability that a small hit will occur, is:
It increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Similarly, the jackpot probability, which is the probability that a jackpot will occur, also increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, as the set value increases, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, so that the big hit state (first special game state) and the small hit state (second special game state) are likely to occur. The number of balls won by winning the (big prize opening) increases, which is advantageous to the player.

Note that with the setting 1 of the pattern I, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0 (0%), and no small hit occurs. However, in setting 6, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is about 1
(100%). For this reason, in the setting 6 of pattern I, in the normal power support state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game increases, a small hit is generated for each special figure 2 variable display game. This is a state called “small hit RUSH” (small hit rush). In addition, in the setting 6, since the total of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the high probability. Not)

In the ordinary power support state, the frequency of executing the special figure 2 variable display game increases by increasing the occurrence frequency of the easy winning state of the normal variation winning device 37 or increasing the occurrence time of the easy winning state. . Further, since the normal start gate 34 is located on the right side of the game area 32, in the normal power support state, the right-handed is more advantageous and the player should be right-handed.

In the settings 4 and 5 of pattern I, the small hit probabilities are 1/4 and 1/2, respectively, and “1/4 small hit RUSH” “1/2” in the normal power support state (short-time state, probability variation state). It becomes a state called “small hit RUSH”. "RUSH per 1/4 small" and "RUSH per 1/2 small
", The number of acquired balls is about 1/4 and 1/2 of the" small hit RUSH ".

In the setting 2 of pattern I, the small hit probability is almost the same as the hit probability of a general usual fluctuation display game, and there is almost no acquired number of balls due to the small hit. In setting 3 of pattern I, the small hit probability is about the same as the big hit probability at the time of high probability, and the number of acquired balls by the small hit exists to the extent that the player can be conscious.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the set value, the ratio of the jackpot probability at the high probability to the jackpot probability at the low probability is a constant value (here, 10 times), and the probability control is simplified. There is.

In the pattern II table of FIG. 104A, contrary to pattern I, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. Like the pattern I, the big hit probability of the pattern II increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. That is, in the pattern II, as the set value increases, the big hit probability increases but the small hit probability decreases, and the difference in the number of balls acquired (setting difference) due to the setting is reduced compared to the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the pattern III table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 4 <setting 5 <setting 6
It increases in the order of <Setting 1 <Setting 2 <Setting 3. Like pattern I, the jackpot probability of pattern III increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Also in the pattern III, the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting is smaller than the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the pattern IV table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is set 3 <setting 2 <setting 1 <.
It increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4. Like the pattern I, the jackpot probability of the pattern IV increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Also in the pattern IV, the difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting is smaller than the pattern I, and the balance is improved.

In the pattern V table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability increases in the order of setting 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1. The big hit probability of the pattern V is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, is the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and is the same in setting 3 and setting 6. In the pattern V, it is difficult to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability. For this reason,
In order to estimate the set value from the occurrence of the small hit, attention is paid to the occurrence of the small hit.

In the pattern VI table of FIG. 104A, the small hit probability is 0% for the settings 1, 2, 4, and 5.
The settings 3 and 6 are close to 100%. In addition, in the settings 3 and 6, since the sum of the big hit probability and the small hit probability at the high probability is 100%, either the big hit or the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game at the high probability. (There is no detachment). The big hit probability of the pattern VI is the same in setting 1 and setting 4, is the same in setting 2 and setting 5, and is the same in setting 3 and setting 6.
In the pattern VI, it is easy to estimate specific settings (setting 3 and setting 6) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability.

As another pattern, the jackpot probability at the low probability of the setting 1 to 3 is set to the probability of the normal specification (for example, a predetermined range around the probability 1/200), and the jackpot probability at the low probability of the setting 4 to 6 is so-called. A pattern for setting the probability near the sweet digital spec (for example, a predetermined range around probability 1/99) is also conceivable. In such a pattern, apparently two types of models can be provided by changing the setting (setting value).

As described above, it can be said that the gaming machine 10 has different gaming properties (game characteristics) and specifications (specifications) for each setting, and it is not necessary to develop a gaming machine having a plurality of specifications, thereby reducing development costs. Leads to. That is, a gaming machine having a plurality of specifications can be substantially provided to the player simply by changing the setting value using the setting changing device 42 (setting key switch 93 and setting value changing switch 102). For example, a setting where the small hit probability is 0% and a small hit probability is about 10
At a setting close to 0%, there is a big difference in playability regarding whether or not a small hit occurs, and it can be said that it is a completely different specification. Furthermore, by changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (setting value), the player has fun to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved. .

[Open mode for small hits]
FIG. 105 shows an example of the release mode (small hit release mode, small hit release pattern) of the special variable winning device 39 in the small hit state (second special game state). In the example of FIG. 105, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening) is opened four times in one small hit, and the opening time of one time is 20 times.
The waiting time is 1500 ms at 0 ms. In addition, the special variable winning device 39 (that is, the big winning opening)
A small hit opening mode is also possible in which is opened only once.

The game control device 100 sets the same small hit release mode regardless of the setting (set value). Therefore, the control of the small hit state is simplified. However, it is set from the small hits opening mode itself (set value)
Is difficult to estimate, and the player estimates the setting from the small hit probability.

[Probability per ordinary figure]
FIG. 106 shows each setting (each set value) for the probability of hitting the normal map change display game (at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability) determined as a result of the normal map normal processing (FIG. 32) in the eleventh embodiment. It is a table illustrated with respect to it.

In the table of pattern I in FIG. 106, the probability per base map, which is the probability of occurrence of a base map, is set at 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <at both low and high probabilities. Increase in the order of setting 6. That is, as the set value is increased, the probability per base figure increases and the base per figure is likely to occur, and the number of acquired balls and the execution frequency of the special figure 2 variable display game are increased by winning the normal variation winning device 37. , Advantageous to the player. In this case, like the pattern I in FIG. 104A, the small hit probability for the small hit that occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game is set as 1 <setting 2 <.
Increasing in the order of setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 is synergistically advantageous to the player.
Further, since the probability per game changes according to the setting (setting value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (setting value) from the probability per normal drawing, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the pattern II table of FIG. 106, the probability per base map, which is the probability of occurrence of a base map, is set at 1 <setting 2 <at only one of a low probability and a high probability (here, only at a low probability). It increases in the order of setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. In other words, at one of the low probability and the high probability, the probability per base figure increases as the set value increases, and the base figure is likely to occur. The execution frequency of the two-variable display game is increased, which is advantageous to the player.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIGS. 107A and 107B are diagrams illustrating a display screen (a customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 while waiting for a customer (a customer waiting state). The effect control device 300 displays an image corresponding to the setting (setting value) on the display device 41 while waiting for a customer who does not display an effect related to the variable display game.

In order to do this, the production control device 300, for example, the customer waiting demonstration setting process (B130).
In 8), an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the moving image of the customer waiting demonstration starts. If the customer waiting demo video is repeatedly displayed, an image corresponding to the set value is displayed on the display device 41 before the customer waiting demo video ends and starts next.

For example, in the pattern I table of FIG.
In the right-handed power train support state, it is better to win the game ball with the aim of the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning port) than the special variable winning device 39 (large winning port). For this reason, in setting 1, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the first character image 501 showing the gameability (how to play) is displayed on the display screen waiting for the customer (when aiming to the right, “Aim for the public power !!”). ) Is displayed. The first character image 501 explicitly indicates a winning opening that should be awarded when making a right strike.

In the pattern I table of FIG. 104A, since the small hit RUSH can be generated with setting 6, the special variable prize is given over the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (second start prize opening) in the normal power support state when right-handed. It is better to have the game ball won by aiming at the device 39 (large winning opening). For this reason, in the setting 6, as shown in FIG.
Character image 502 (when hitting right, “small hit RUSH!”) Is displayed. The second character image 502 implicitly indicates a winning opening that should be awarded when right-handed. Pattern I setting 4
5 shows a character image on the display screen waiting for a customer (when struck right, “RUSH!
And “1/2 small hits RUSH!”) May be displayed.

In FIGS. 107A and 107B, simultaneously with the first character image 501 or the second character image 502, an image 503 indicating right-handing in the normal power support state is displayed on the display screen (waiting for customer screen).
Is displayed.

As in the case of pattern I, patterns II, III, IV, and V in FIGS. 104A and 104B are used.
, VI table, setting 6, setting 4, setting 3, setting 6, setting 1-2 and 4 respectively.
At -5, no small hitting occurs, and the first character image 501 ("Aim for ordinary power!" When right-handed) is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (A). Also, patterns II, III, and I in FIGS. 104A and 104B.
In the V, V, and VI tables, setting 1, setting 3, setting 4, setting 1, setting 3, and 6, respectively.
Thus, since the small hit RUSH can be generated, the second character image 50 as shown in FIG. 107 (B).
2 (“Right hit RUSH!” When right-handed) is displayed.

As described above, while waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer), an image corresponding to the setting (setting value) can be displayed on the display device 41, and the gameability at the setting can be shown to the player. The game performance indicated by the image serves as a guide for the player to select a gaming machine.

In the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the display device 41 waiting for a customer, the setting (setting value)
Accordingly, a configuration in which an effect introduction image or a game flow image is displayed on the display device 41 is also possible.

[Display according to display settings]
FIG. 108A shows the light emission mode of the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52 (light emission part) used for executing the special figure fluctuation display game in the collective display device 50.
An example of changing according to the setting (setting value) is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (I), the game control device 100 is in the non-execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (in this case, waiting for a customer), and the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure. The display mode (light emission mode) of the off symbol displayed on the diagram variation display unit 52 may be different between setting 1 and setting 6.

For example, as shown in FIG. 108A (II), the game control device 100 is in a state where the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed (in this case, waiting for a customer), and the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure. The figure variation display unit 52 may be displayed blinking, the blinking period may be changed between setting 1 and setting 6, and the light emission mode may be changed according to the setting. The blinking cycle is, for example, 256 ms for setting 1 and 12 for setting 6.
8 ms. Note that the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 are blinked as the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game, but the blinking cycle may be changed according to the setting. .

Further, during the non-execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (waiting for customers), the first special figure fluctuation display section 51
In addition to the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52, other display units 53 to 6 of the collective display device 50 are also included.
A configuration in which the light emission mode of 0 is changed according to the setting (set value) is also possible.

FIG. 108B is a diagram showing an external device connected to the external information terminal 71. As external devices, an external display device 864 (display device) and a game hall internal management device 866 (hall computer) are provided. The game control device 100 may change the display mode of the external display device 864 provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value.

The game control device 100 outputs a control command corresponding to the set value to the external display device 864 via the external information terminal 71 at a predetermined timing, and controls the display mode of the external display device 864 according to the set value.

For example, the external display device 864 (display device) is a patrol lamp 864a that can emit light, and an information display device 864d that can display a moving image or a still image. The patrol lamp 864a emits light (rotates light) when a control command is received. When receiving the control command, the information display 864d can display data such as a game number display (rotation number display) or the like, and can display a moving image or a still image corresponding to the control command on the display unit 868.

When the set value information of the gaming machine 10 is included in the control command, the patrol lamp 864a can emit light in a light emission mode (emission color or the like) according to the set value, and the information indicator 864d is set according to the set value. A moving image or a still image can be displayed on the display unit 868.

As described above, the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52 (light emitting part).
The player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the light emission mode and the display mode of the external display device 864 (display) provided outside.

[Operations and effects of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition.
When the stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable winning device (special variable winning device 39) can convert from a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state to an open state in which a game ball can win. The setting change means (setting change device 42) can change a set value relating to a game condition (a condition for a player to play a game). The game control means generates a first special game state (big hit state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result, The game value that a player can acquire is less than the first special game state.
A special gaming state (small hit state) is generated. The game control means sets a probability that the stop result of the variable display game will be the second special result (small hit) according to the set value, and sets the release mode (open pattern) of the variable winning device in the second special game state. Set the same regardless of the set value.

Therefore, since the probability that the stop result of the variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) can be set according to the set value, the gameability of the gaming machine 10 can be changed according to the set value. In addition, the second
Since the opening mode (opening pattern) of the variable winning device in the special gaming state can be set to be the same regardless of the set value, the control of the variable winning device in the second special gaming state is simplified.

According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) that can display effects related to the variable display game on the display device. The effect control means displays an image corresponding to the set value on the display device in the customer waiting state in which the effect related to the variable display game is not displayed. Therefore, in the waiting state for the customer, the player can easily select a gaming machine in the game hall (game shop) by showing the player the game performance at the current set value.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, game control means (game control device 100)
In accordance with the set value, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52) used for executing the variable display game during the execution or non-execution of the variable display game. Can be changed. Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the light emission mode of the light emitting unit (the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52) used for executing the variable display game.

According to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the game control means can set the display mode of the display devices (patrol lamp 864a, information display device 864d) provided outside the gaming machine 10 according to the set value. . Therefore, the player can estimate the setting (setting value) based on the display mode of the display device provided outside.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 118. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to eleventh embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

In the twelfth embodiment, the part identification information (first part) of the detachable part (part, member) 510
If the identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match, an error is notified as a mismatch.

[Game machine parts]
FIG. 109 shows a state in which the detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10.
The part 510 is assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example,
The part 510 may be a plate-like member on which model information (model logo or the like) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable accessory constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44, or a frame decoration. The decoration member which has LED of the apparatus 18 or the board decoration apparatus 46 may be sufficient. The part 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 in the amusement hall for reasons such as being in the way of being brought into the amusement hall (amusement store), and there is a possibility that inexperienced personnel may attach it to the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 109A, for example, there is no problem when the model A part 510A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10. However, for example, as shown in FIG.
Since a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 reports an error via the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device 41.

FIG. 110 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the gaming machine 10 to the effect control device 300 (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 receives the received model designation command (B from the reference table (FIG. 118 described later)).
The model identification information corresponding to 1301) is selected and set. In addition, the production control device 300
The part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies that there is a mismatch as an error.

The part 510 has an identification substrate 513 that holds part identification information. Identification substrate 513
The part identification information includes one or a plurality of wires 519 (wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied.
Set by In FIG. 109, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but a pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power supply (voltage) to the part 510 is, for example, the production control device 300 when the part 510 is attached.
Alternatively, it is supplied from the power supply device 400.

In FIG. 110, a plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are connected to predetermined terminals among a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516, respectively. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is a bit having a value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is a bit having a value “0”.
Parts identification information such as “01111100” can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification substrate 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by a plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ² C).

FIG. 111 shows another example of the identification substrate 513. In FIG. 111, the part identification information is set by the dip switch 521. Each of the plurality of wirings 519 includes a dip switch 5
21, the voltage becomes a predetermined voltage or ground voltage, and information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of the part identification information is input to a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. . In the example of FIG. 111, the wiring 5 in which the dip switch 521 is turned on.
19 is connected to the ground voltage (bit of value “0”), and the DIP switch 52
A terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which 1 is turned off has a predetermined voltage (a bit having a value “1”).
It becomes.

[Parallel serial converter]
FIG. 112 shows a configuration of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel-serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 includes a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF).
It has the structure of the normal parallel serial conversion IC provided with. Parallel serial converter 51
6 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and is connected by serial communication (here, I ² C communication). It transmits to the production | presentation control apparatus 300 via line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a in I ² C communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of serial data is completed in 8 clocks after the parallel data is taken.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 113 shows a first modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-serial conversion IC but an input I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). I ² for input
The CI / O expander 815 has ports 0 to 0 connected to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.
The part identification information input from 7 is input as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. Filter 833, bus controller 834,
And a reset signal generation circuit 839. In addition, other I ² CI / O expanders 81
5 determines whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by the bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself. A self-occupied WDT 841 is provided.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication through the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (such as a response signal and address data here) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information or the like in this case) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 supplies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 83.
Apply to 0.

The transistor 830 uses a field effect transistor (FET) to reduce power consumption, the gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by the pull-up resistor R. And the source is grounded.

The driver 832 transfers the data (part identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a via the connection line SDA.
In order to cause a current to flow between the drain and source of the transistor 830, a voltage having a value at which the transistor 830 can operate is applied to the gate of the transistor 830. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, an address for resetting the I ² CI / O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address part consisting of upper 3 bits and a variable address part consisting of lower 5 bits. The fixed address portion has a predetermined value (for example, “110”) set in advance and cannot be changed by the I ² CI / O expander 815.

The variable address portion includes a 4-bit I ² CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set at the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a write request whether the data is a read request. And 1-bit R / W identification data indicating whether or not. In the I ² CI / O expander 815 for input, “1” is normally registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

In the bus controller 834, the address of data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not the address matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815. If the address matches, the data (part identification information) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage is obtained by connecting a plurality of wirings 519 to predetermined ports (five in this case) among eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit part identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value “1”, and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value “0”.

Further, the bus controller 834 indicates that the address of data input from the connection line SDA is I
^{2 It} is determined whether or not it matches the reset address set in the CI / O expander 815, and if it matches, the data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² The CI / O expander 815 is initialized.

Further, the number of changes in the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reaches 8 times, and 8
After the bus controller 834 outputs the bit data (part identification information), the connection line S
When the CL signal level changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. Furthermore, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the master IC 30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH 9 times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 has a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a RES that receives a reset signal from the outside.
The ET terminal is connected.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is powered on to the I ² CI / O expander 815,
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated, and initialization is performed by inputting the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834.

Therefore, when the harness is removed, the connection line Vcc for supplying logic power is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored, and the reset signal generating circuit 83 is restored.
9 outputs a reset signal. Note that a bundle of connection lines Vcc, connection lines SDA, connection lines SCL, and ground lines GND for supplying logic power is called a harness.

The bus monitoring WDT 840 is used to detect that another I ² CI / O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
By operating its own reset signal generation circuit 839, the I ² CI / O expander 815
Is initialized.

The self-occupied WDT 841 has a connection line SD by itself (I ² CI / O expander 815).
Used to detect A occupancy. When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a predetermined time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal in the reset signal generation circuit 839 and initializes the I ² CI / O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 114 shows a second modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-serial conversion IC but an output I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). In the second modification, the part 510 includes an effect device and can execute an effect. The production device is, for example, LED
Although it is a decoration device such as a (light emitting unit), it may be a movable accessory.

The output I ² CI / O expander 815 is a master IC 300 of the effect control device 300.
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, the light emission state) of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled via the ports 0 to 15 on the output side. Note that the I ² CI / O expander 815 is the I ² CI / O expander 815.
This unique address (8 bits) is input to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 using the part identification information.

An I ² CI / O expander 815 for output is an I ² CI / O expander 81 for input.
5 (FIG. 113), the driver 8 connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the output setting register 835, the output controller 836, and the I ² CI / O expander 815
37, transistors 838A to 838P connected to the respective ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, the description of the same configuration as that of the input I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 113) will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (production control data, response signal, and the like here) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information, a response signal, and the like here) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, a response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source through the transistor 830. Apply the value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

In the bus controller 834, the address of data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not it matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815, and if it matches, data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. As described above, the part identification information output to the master IC 300a is I ^2.
This is a unique address (8 bits) of the CI / O expander 815. It is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a. When the presentation control device 300 receives the response signal from the bus controller 834, it recognizes the address of the transmitted data as part identification information. You may comprise.

In addition, the bus controller 834 has changed the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, fetches the 8-bit effect control data from the connection line SDA, and then changes the signal level of the connection line SCL. When changing from HIGH to LOW, the response signal is sent to the connection line SD.
A is output to the master IC 300a. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL is again changed from HIGH to LO.
When changed to W, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of changes from LOW to HIGH of the signal level of the connection line SCL becomes nine.

In the output setting register 835, the operation mode of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the output state of the ports 0 to 15 are set. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes a current to flow to all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that there is no.

Based on the data set in the output setting register 835, the output controller 836
A rendering device (here, LE) connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 via the port driver 837.
D, the light emission part) is actually controlled (output of lighting data) to actually control the output state (the light emission state here) of the effect device. This output state is updated to the contents specified in the effect control data when the bus controller 834 fetches the effect control data from the connection line SDA.

That is, the output setting register 835 is set based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0-15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

When a current flows through a port, the driver 837 applies a voltage at which the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows can operate.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to a port terminal connected to a connection line to which a voltage for operating the effect device is applied, and the source is grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power source is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. Current flows to
The output state of the effect device (here, LED) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

[Third Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 115 shows a third modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the third modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the presentation control device 300 includes input as part identification information (for example, “01111100”) in which a predetermined voltage is 8-bit from a plurality of wirings 519. Directly input to the port 300b (ports 0 to 7). Input port 30
The part identification information input to 0b is transmitted to the main control microcomputer (CP) via the data bus 340.
U) 311 It should be noted that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value “1”, and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value “0”.

Then, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies that there is a mismatch when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match. Execute the process.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) according to the twelfth embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered).

The main process of the twelfth embodiment is different from the main process of FIG.
000) is added, and the other processes are the same as those in FIG.

In the part collation process, the part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the part identification information (first identification information) is compared.
If the model identification information (second identification information) does not match, a warning is given by error notification.
In the present embodiment, the parts matching process (B5000) is a received command check process (B00).
It is executed after 14).

The parts matching process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by a loop process from step B0008 to B0021.

[Parts verification processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 117, the parts matching process (B50) in the main process (FIG. 116).
00) will be described in detail. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a part collating process performed by the effect control apparatus 300.

The production control device 300 first updates -1 if the collation time timer (time measuring means) is not 0 (B5001). The collation time timer reads part identification information and collates with model identification information (
A comparison timing or a comparison time interval to be compared) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). When the collation time timer is not 0 (B5
Since the result of 002 is “N”), it is not the collation timing, so the part collation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (result of B5002 is “Y”), the production control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the collation timing (B5).
003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (collated) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 118 in a memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 118, the model designation command and model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information matches the model identification information (B5005). When the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is “N”), it is notified by error notification that the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it is notified that the part 510 is attached to an incorrect model that does not conform to (correspond to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may perform error notification (warning) by generating sound from the speakers 19 a and 19 b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Here, the effect control device 300 may notify the correct model that matches (corresponds to) the part 510 together with the error notification with reference to the reference table of FIG. The correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Subsequently, the production control device 300 sets an initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation process. Accordingly, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses when the power is turned on for the first time. The initial value of the collation time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited thereto.

On the other hand, when the part identification information matches the model identification information (B5
Since the result of 005 is “Y” and the part 510 is attached to a correct model that conforms to (corresponds to) the part 510, the initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying the error (B50).
07), the parts matching process is terminated.

For example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109 (B)), the model identification information (for example, “0111”
1100 ") and part identification information (for example," 01111101 ") do not match, and error notification is executed. A correct model (model B) suitable for parts 510B along with error notification
May be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 109A), the model identification information (for example, “01111100”).
") And part identification information (for example," 01111100 ") match, and no error notification is executed.

Note that, as a modification, the effect control device 300 includes a memory (for example, a program ROM 321).
) May not store the reference table of FIG. 118, and may hold only model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model. In this case, the production control device 300 also uses the part 510.
Compare the part identification information read from the model identification information with the part identification information (
When the first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, an error is reported as an error.

[Operations and effects of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition), and the game Production control means (production control device 300) capable of performing the production to be performed;
Is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which first electrically readable identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the component, compares it with the second identification information, and compares the first identification information (part identification). Information) and second identification information (model identification information)
Is inconsistent, it is notified that there is a mismatch.

Therefore, even when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 having a component (part 510) attachment error in the game hall (game shop) from operating.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means is at least the gaming machine 1.
When the power of 0 is turned on, the first identification information of the component (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and if the first identification information and the second identification information are inconsistent, it is determined that there is a mismatch. Inform. Therefore, even when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to prevent early and reliably the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which there is a mistake in attaching the part (part 510) in the game hall (game shop).

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the effect control means receives information on the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. Second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, gaming machine 1
When an incorrect part (part 510) is attached to various models of 0, this can be notified. In addition, it is possible to notify the correct model on which wrong parts should be attached.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first part (part 510)
Since the identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, the first identification information can be easily set.

According to the twelfth embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the first part (part 510)
Since the identification information can be set by a dip switch, the first identification information can be easily set.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 134. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. First
The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of probability setting values. The fixed display period is
This is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability setting value.

[Game control apparatus according to the thirteenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The game control device 100 of the thirteenth embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment or the sixth embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 displays the status display. The device 152 is incorporated in the device 152. That is, the status display device 152 also functions as the probability setting value display device 143 of the first embodiment or the sixth embodiment. In addition, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached to the game control apparatus 100 of the thirteenth embodiment separately from the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition status at power-on]
FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is turned on (power is restored). RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 93 at power-on
Depending on the on / off state, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, a setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing) in which the probability setting value can be changed. Mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clearing here, the clearing process in step A1036 is executed, and A1021 in FIG.
The clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear head address 2 set in step. In the thirteenth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, FIG.
In steps A1024 and A1028, it is determined whether or not both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 in FIG. 5A, the RAM initialization switch 1 is used instead of the set value change switch 102.
It is determined whether or not 12 is on.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the power is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. Note that the transition to the setting confirmation state is step A2 of the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) during the timer interrupt process after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.
504-A2508.

When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, the RAM initialization process (R
AM clear processing) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 5C, the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear head address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In addition,
In the RAM clear, the clear area # 3 may be designated by the RAM clear head address 3 as the RAM area to be cleared.

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 121, probability setting value change processing (A13
Details of (08) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the thirteenth embodiment.

The probability setting value changing process of the thirteenth embodiment is different from the probability setting value changing process of FIG. 10 by changing the processing positions of steps A2412, A2414, A2415, and step A2411.
The processing of A2413 is deleted, and the other processing is the same as in FIG.

When the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value in the work probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area. (A2412). When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the set value is confirmed, and values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It transmits to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2415). Thereafter, similarly to the first embodiment, the processes of steps A2417-A2421 are executed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to step A1049. Here, step A2420
The probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display area, so that the determined probability setting value is the state display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated.
Can be displayed. The state display device 152 that functions as the probability setting value display device 143.
The transmission of the probability setting value display data to the driver 150 (153 in FIG. 71) can be executed in the same manner as in the case of transmitting the accessory ratio display data and the like in the sixth embodiment.

[Processing when setting values are received]
Next, referring to FIG. 122, processing at the time of receiving a set value in single command processing (B132
Details of 4) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing for receiving set values according to the thirteenth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (the result of B5201 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is terminated.

When the received command is a normal command, the effect control device 300 (B520
1 is “Y”), information indicating the current date and time (current time) is acquired from the RTC 338 (or time timer) (B5202), and whether or not the received command is a set value information command at the end of setting change. Is determined (B5203). What is the setting value information command at the end of setting change?
This is a set value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the probability setting change end command in step A2421 of the probability set value changing process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is ended.

When the received command is a set value information command at the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 stores the set value and the current date and time (current time) in association with each other. (B5204), and the process upon receiving the set value is terminated. The memory here is an FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents even when power is not supplied.

If the received command is not a setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, if it is a setting value information command at power failure recovery (A1035) or a setting value information command at RAM initialization (A1045) ( The result of B5203 is “N”), and the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 123, segment LED editing processing (A
Details of 1314) will be described. FIG. 123 shows a segment LE according to the thirteenth embodiment.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of D edit processing. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed. Note that FIG.
23, in the segment LED editing process, when the emission control is performed for the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display section 53 for the normal fluctuation display game other than the fluctuation display game. The light emission control (light-off control, lighting control, and blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display unit 53 may be executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. . In the variation display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 to emit light (flash) is executed in the symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

The game control device 100 first updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

When the game control device 100 is at the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”)
When the general figure hold number display table 1 is set (A9203) and the output is not on (
The result of A9202 is “N”), the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the general figure hold number is acquired, and the segment of the general figure hold indicator 56 (lamps D15 and D16) Save in the area (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A920).
6). When it is the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A 9207), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold is held The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A921).
0). When it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is on hold. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (lamps D13 and D14) (A9213).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And it saves in the segment area | region of the round display part 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. is defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, the gaming machine 10 is turned on when the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on at time x2.
The state (game machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the uncertain probability setting value (unconfirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability setting value display (unconfirmed value)) ). In the probability setting value display (unconfirmed value) of the state display device 152, the unconfirmed probability setting value is displayed blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. Collective display device 50
The first display device, the lamp display device 80 (fourth symbol), and the decoration device are kept off. The decoration device includes a frame decoration device 18 such as a decoration device 18a, 18b, and the upper effect unit 4.
In addition to the panel decoration device 46 such as 0c, it has a decorative light emitting part (LED). Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or only the light emitting units other than the specific color may be turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state becomes a game-ready state in which a game can be performed, and the state display device 152 (second display device) has a determined probability setting value (a fixed value).
Is displayed (probability setting value display (confirmed value)). In the probability setting value display (determined value) of the state display device 152, the confirmed probability setting value is lit. When the gaming machine state is a game ready state, the setting value cannot be changed or confirmed. Also, in response to the game being enabled at time x3, the special symbol 1 display 51 and / or the special diagram 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 display the identification information of the off symbol (this special feature). The display device 41 displays a customer waiting demo. It should be noted that display units other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 (
The lamps D3-D18) may also be displayed in a blinking manner, for example, to display the waiting for customers. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Note that when the probability setting value is determined at time x3, a notification that the probability setting value is determined by sound or voice may be performed together.

Time x4 is the time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3. At time x4, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability setting value display and starts all blinking display, and repeatedly performs all-light-off display and all-light-on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. . Note that the all blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and the blinking display on the display unit of the collective display device 50 (the above-mentioned customer waiting display) and You may synchronize with the same blinking period.

Note that the time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the time x3, but also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. As described above, when the setting change state is switched to the game ready state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined by the state display device 152 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).
ec) Since it can be confirmed, the set value that has been confirmed can be viewed without entering the setting confirmation mode again after the setting is changed, and the work efficiency of the game hall manager can be improved.

Time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the blinking display and starts the performance display (combination ratio display) to display the combination ratio. In addition, on the status display device 152, instead of displaying information related to the ratio of the actors, information related to the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state) may be displayed (the output ball). (Rate display, discharge ball number display, base value display). In addition, as described above, the bonus rate and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and are performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. The status display device 152 can execute performance display for displaying performance information.

The probability setting value display (undefined value) from time x2 is blinking display, and the probability setting value display (determined value) of state display device 152 from time x3 is lighting display. The display may be switched, the probability set value display (undefined value) may be lit, and the probability set value display (determined value) may be blinked.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 125, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 125 (sa), when the production control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability setting (A1041), the setting change display indicating that the setting is being changed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 is being changed during the setting change.
And the upper stage production unit 40c is turned off. In addition, the production control device 300 may perform notification that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

In FIG. 125 (shi), in response to the game being enabled after the setting is changed, the display device 4
The customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen 1. When the game is ready, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and a part of the upper effect unit 40c is lit or blinked in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration as shown in black in FIG. . As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the start memory number of each special symbol variable display game. Since it is composed of the lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is turned off in the normal display (turned off display).
Some of them may be lit or flashing in time with the customer waiting demonstration.

FIG. 125 (s) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3).
206) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is ended and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started. Customer waiting demonstration screen 7 shown in FIG.
22 is not displayed, and the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 6)
10C), the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed. In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are lit or blinked in accordance with the special figure variation display game. In the reserved digest area 640, a special figure fluctuation pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion pending display) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. Hold display 6
In 30, the first start memory and the second start memory that are on hold are displayed. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, the hold display section 630 is displayed as shown in FIG.
Is in a state where there is no pending first start memory or second start memory.

[Modification of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 126 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 126, FIG. 127, FIG. 129, and FIG.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game ready state, the state display device 152 starts to blink completely.

Then, a time x4 ′ when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3.
Thus, the status display device 152 switches the display from all blinking to the probability setting value display (determined value). After the display is switched to the probability setting value display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (characteristic ratio display and output rate display) at time x5 ′ when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. Then, the ratio of the actors is displayed. As described above, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the state display device 152 is displayed in a blinking state in response to the change from the setting change mode to the game enabled state. Can be clearly indicated to the person. Moreover, since the set value determined by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec),
The game hall manager can confirm the set value as it is, and can improve work efficiency.

Similarly to FIG. 124, after the probability setting value is displayed, the performance display may be started after all blinking is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5 ′.

[Second modified example of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, a second modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game ready state, the state display device 152 starts the probability setting value display.

Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as will be described later with reference to FIG. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the accessory ratio display and the payout ratio display) at a time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and displays the accessory ratio. indicate.

At time x3, before the probability setting value display (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152, it is possible to perform full blinking or notification display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). In addition, at time x3, when the notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152, from the time x4 to the time x5 after the probability setting value display (determined value). Instead of performing the notification display, it is also possible to perform full blinking.

[Display mode when changing the setting of the status display device]
FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the setting of the state display device 152 according to the second modification example of the thirteenth embodiment is changed.

First, FIG. 128 (a) shows a display mode of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off until time x2 in FIG. 127, and the four 7-segments (dot portions of the status display device 152 are shown). When included, all 8 segments) are turned off.

FIG. 128 (b) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability setting value display (unconfirmed value, confirmed value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4.
The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) is displayed in the leftmost digit 3, and 7 segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than digit 3 are turned off. Note that the current probability setting value (for example, “6”) displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the status display device 152 is blinked in the probability setting value display (undefined value) from time x2 to time x3, The probability setting value display (determined value) from x3 to time x4 is lit.

FIG. 128 (c) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification display is performed from time x4 to time x5. Upper and lower bars indicating that the probability setting value has been confirmed are displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152. In addition, the notification display displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to the display using the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability setting value and the performance display.

FIG. 128 (d) shows a display mode of the status display device 152 whose performance is displayed after time x5. As shown in FIG. 128 (d), the status display device 152 displays a payout rate (for example, “b1.35”) with respect to the most recent predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls as a performance display. .
It should be noted that the status display device 152 may display the total payout rate (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102), the base value, and the accessory ratio from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. The display may be switched and displayed at a predetermined interval (for example, 2 to 3 sec).

[Third Modification of Timing Chart of Fixed Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing a third modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, time x4 '
When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed at ', the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 was stopped. The special figure display (display of the identification information) starts to change from the off symbol, and the special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the waiting-for-customer demonstration is ended, and the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 uses the fourth figure special display variation game (variation display). Game) and the number of hold display are started, and the decoration device performs an effect corresponding display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

Then, at a time x5 ″ when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4 ″,
The state display device 152 ends the blinking and starts the performance display (the character ratio display and the payout rate display). Thus, by waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time and starting the all-flashing and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variation display game, information about the game can be displayed at an early stage. .

The status display device 152 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), that is, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 or the start prize opening 3.
When the game ball wins the game ball 6, the flashing is not limited to a mode in which the game ball wins, but when the game ball wins the general winning port 35 or when the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34 You may start blinking. Similarly to the example in FIG. 124 described above, full blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth Modification of Timing Chart of Fixed Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the thirteenth embodiment.

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on at time x2, the gaming machine state is set to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modified example start blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 123, and the blinking cycles of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are also collectively displayed.
It is set to be the same as the blinking cycle of 0, and the blinking timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the collective display device 50. When the state display device 152 blinks and the probability setting value is displayed, the blinking of the state display device 152 is controlled using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

Note that the all-flash display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by all the display units (light emitting units, LED lamps D1-D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, or the display unit 51 for the special figure variation display game. , 52 (LED lamps D1, D2) alone. Moreover, you may make it perform the blink display of the collective display apparatus 50 by LED lamps (for example, LED lamp D3-D18) other than the display parts 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for special figure fluctuation display games.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game ready state, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device end all blinking. At time x3, the collective display device 50 stops displaying the identification information of the symbols (this special figure display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. The state display device 152 displays the confirmed probability setting value (determined value) (probability setting value display).
On the display screen of the display device 41, the setting change display is ended and the customer waiting demonstration is started.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) elapses from time x3 and time x5 ′ ″ is reached, the state display device 152 ends the probability setting value display (determined value), and displays performance (function ratio display). And the display of the payout rate). Thus, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modification,
After the probability set value display (determined value) is finished, all blinking is omitted and performance display (actual ratio display and output rate display) is performed immediately. Etc. can be confirmed at an early stage. It should be noted that the collective display device 50 and the display device 41 are reached at the time x5 ′ ″.
Then, a special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) is started, the lamp display device 80 performs a special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) and a holding number display by the 4th pattern, and the decoration device displays a special figure fluctuation display game. The display corresponding to the effect is performed (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment.

After setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, RA is set at time x12.
When the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the M initialization switch 112 turned off, the state of the gaming machine 10 (gaming machine state) enters the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the state display device 15
2 shows a confirmed probability setting value (determined value) (probability setting value display). Then, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 132 described later (stop symbol display). When the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50,
For example, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are in a fully lit state in which all segments and LEDs are all lit (may be partially lit). In addition, the collective display device 50 may display a stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Also,
When shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game ready state, and the state display device 152 displays a performance display (a character ratio display or a play rate display).
Is displayed. Further, in response to the gaming machine state being changed to the game-ready state at time x13, the collective display device 50 displays the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) as this special figure ( This special figure display (immediate display pattern)). Then, the customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game ready state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the state display device 152 (second display device). Can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, as shown in the timing chart at the time of setting change shown in FIG. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, between the setting confirmation mode and the game-ready state, by displaying the display (all blinking display) of the aspect different from the probability setting value and the performance display on the state display device 152, the game hall manager can It becomes easier to grasp the fact that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 132, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. In the following description of FIGS. 132 and 134,
Description overlapping with FIG. 125 is omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 132 (set), the effect control device 300 receives the command for confirming the probability setting (A2508, B1327), and turns on the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different light emission modes during the setting confirmation from those during the setting change (FIG. 125). The production control device 300
May notify (by sound, etc.) that the setting confirmation is being performed together with the lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c. On the other hand, the display screen of the display device 41 includes
The stop pattern (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, and the display mode is such that it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 132 (so), in response to the fact that the game is ready after the setting confirmation, the display device 4
The customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen 1. When the game is enabled, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 132 (a) shows a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3).
206) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is ended and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started. As in FIG. 125 (su), the customer waiting demonstration screen 7
22 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or blinking in accordance with the special-figure variable display game. .

[Modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when confirming the settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 133, the description overlapping with FIG. 131 is omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modification, a list of setting confirmation displays 723 showing the setting history of the probability setting values so far is displayed as a list on the display screen of the display device 41 as will be described later with reference to FIG. The display mode is such that it is understood that the setting is being confirmed (display during setting confirmation (setting history display)).
In addition, the set value that has been confirmed is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability set value display (determined value)).
The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start to blink completely. The collective display device 50 is kept off. Note that the setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and any display mode that indicates that the setting confirmation is in progress may be used. For example, the fact that the setting confirmation is being performed may be displayed using characters or the like. Moreover, you may alert | report that it is confirming setting with a sound and an audio | voice with the display during setting confirmation.

Thereafter, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game ready state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start a customer waiting demo. In response to the gaming machine state being changed to the game-ready state at time x13, the status display device 152 displays a performance indication (a bonus rate display or a payout rate display).
Is displayed, and the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) is displayed as the special symbol on the collective display device 50 (this special symbol display (previously displayed symbol)). Further, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 134 is a view showing a modification of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 134 (se '), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command for confirming the probability setting (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that can list the setting history of the probability setting values so far. For example, as shown in FIG. 124 (set '), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed as a list. The As described with reference to FIG. 122, each time the effect control device 300 receives a setting value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is “Y”), the setting change date and time when the setting value is fixed. (RAM for setting change end)
It memorize | stores in H.323 (B5204). Therefore, the effect control device 300 reads the setting value and the setting change date / time from the FeRAM 323 to display a list of setting history of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation display 723. Upper display unit 4 of lamp display device 80 and decoration device
0c is completely blinked during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 134 (so '), in response to the game being ready after the setting is confirmed, the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed. Display.

FIG. 134 (ta ′) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is ended and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started in the same manner as FIG. 125 (su) and FIG. 132 (ta). It is. As for the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is hidden, and the variable display area 62 is displayed.
At 0, the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed, and the lamp display device 80 and the top effect unit 40c are displayed.
Is an effect mode that lights or blinks in accordance with the special figure variation display game.

In addition, you may provide the display screen which can display the production | presentation relevant to a special figure change display game in movable actors, such as internal combination 44a, 44b (refer FIG. 52A). When a display screen is provided on the movable accessory, a setting confirmation display 723 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and a display showing that the setting confirmation is being performed using the display screen of the movable accessory It can be performed. In addition, the display screen of the movable accessory may be in a state different from the game-enabled state such as single color display (for example, white display) in the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, the display screen of the display device 41 may be displayed in a single color (for example, white display), and the setting history may be displayed by performing the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the movable accessory. By adopting such a mode, even when it is not clear that the display screen of the display device 41 is being confirmed for setting as shown in FIG. 132 (set), the setting is being confirmed from the display screen for the movable accessory. Can be easily understood. Note that the display screen of the movable accessory may be displayed in a display mode different from the game-enabled state not only in the setting confirmation mode but also in the setting change mode.

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special special symbol) in a variable manner is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, Control means (game control device 100) is provided that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value when a special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32, and a winning area where a game ball can be won (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a special winning port of a special variable winning device 39), and a game When a ball wins a winning area, a payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) capable of paying out award balls with a number of prize balls determined for each winning area.
And a first display device (collective display device 50) capable of displaying a display relating to a game, and a setting changing means (setting changing device 42, RA) capable of changing set values (set values, probability set values) relating to game conditions.
M initialization switch 112), the set value, and performance information derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize (role ratio, output rate for the last predetermined number of discharged balls, overall output) A second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying the rate and the base value. The control means
In response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting changing means, the display of the first display device is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, the display is extinguished or the display is all blinking). ), And the setting value determined on the second display device is set for a predetermined period (predetermined time, predetermined time,
For example, it is possible to display over 2 to 3 seconds.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the game possible state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time). Work efficiency of the site manager can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the control means (the game control device 100) corresponds to the second change from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game ready state. The set value determined on the display device (status display device 152) is a signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37, the start winning port 36 or the general winning port 35 is detected, It is displayed until a signal notifying that a game ball has passed through the starting gate 34, a signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, and a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) are detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, performance information is displayed when a signal related to a game is detected, so that the game hall manager can confirm the performance information immediately after the setting is changed.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special special symbol) in a variable manner is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, Control means (game control device 100) is provided that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value when a special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32, and a winning area where a game ball can be won (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a special winning port of a special variable winning device 39), and a game When a ball wins a winning area, a payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) capable of paying out award balls with a number of prize balls determined for each winning area.
A first display device (collective display device 50) capable of displaying a display relating to a game, and a setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, which can confirm setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to gaming conditions)
RAM initialization switch 112), setting value, and performance information derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize (role ratio, output rate for the most recent predetermined number of discharged balls, overall output) A second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying the rate and the base value. In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation means, the control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, full lighting display, previous time) In response to the fact that the setting confirmation state is changed to a gameable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. Can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game ready state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed. Work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment is capable of changing setting values (setting values, probability setting values) when the setting changing state (setting changing mode, setting variable state) is entered. The apparatus 42 further includes a RAM initialization switch 112). Control means (game control device 1
00) is a display when the display of the first display device (collective display device 50) is changed to the setting change state (probability setting value display), or a display related to the game, corresponding to the setting confirmation state. Have different modes (for example, full lighting display). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game), and an effect display on the third display device. Production control means (production control device 300). The effect control means displays the setting change history on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first display device (collective display device 50) is not in a display mode that indicates that it is in the setting confirmation state, the game hall manager can set from the third display device. It can be seen that it is in the confirmation state, and the setting history can be confirmed.

In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) to the immediately preceding variation display game (special figure variation). The display result of the display game) (stop symbol, identification information) is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two, and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to reduce the processing load and data amount accordingly.

The control means (game control device 100) responds to the second display device (state display device 152) with the performance information (role ratio, latest information) in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game enabled state. The ball output rate, the overall game output rate, and the base value for a predetermined number of discharged balls are immediately displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager can immediately check the performance information by changing the setting check state to the game ready state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) has changed the display of the second display device (state display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game enabled state. The display is different from the display of time (probability setting value display) or performance information (role ratio, number of balls for the last predetermined number of balls to be thrown, overall number of balls to be played, base value). After making the display of the display device different, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, immediately after the game is enabled, the display in a mode different from these displays is the second.
Since it is displayed on the display device, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to grasp the fact that it has switched to the game-ready state.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The present embodiment is a modification of the display during and after the change of the probability setting value according to the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the operation for changing the probability setting value and the operation for checking the probability setting value in the present embodiment are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the digit (0) (display 900-0), digit (1) (display 900-1), digit (2) (display 900-2), digit (3) of the status display device 152 are displayed. (Display 900-3) is used (see FIG. 71), as will be described later, the probability setting values before the setting change (during setting confirmation), during the setting change, and after the setting change are displayed.

In this embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 (memory erasing unit) and the setting key switch 93 (switch, setting change unit) shown in FIG. 119 and the like are turned on (first state) to turn on the gaming machine 10. Thus, the setting is changed (see FIG. 120). At this time, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 corresponds to the work probability setting value (a provisional value of 0 to 5) stored in the work probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Character codes (including dot data (Dp = 1)) are extracted. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (
First display data including (hexadecimal expression)) and generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). As a result, the first display data (dot data (Dp
= 1) is transmitted to the driver 150 (153) of the status display device 152. In addition, transmission to the driver 150 (153) of the status display device 152 is an LED
In the data transmission process (A16001 in FIG. 70), it can be executed in the same manner as in the case of transmitting the accessory ratio display data.

Next, when the set value change switch 102 (setting change means) is pressed, the set value change switch 1
When the signal is input from 02, the gaming microcomputer 111 updates (0 to 5) the value in the work probability setting value area (FIG. 121, A2408), and corresponds to the updated work probability setting value information. Character code (including dot data (Dp = 1)) is extracted, first display data including the updated character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). Thereby, the command including the updated first display data (including dot data (Dp = 1)) is sent to the state display device 152.
To the driver 150.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 11
1 stores (overwrites) information on the work probability setting value stored in the work probability setting value area in the probability setting value area as a probability setting value (determined value) after setting change (FIG. 121, A2412).
). Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the changed probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area, and an address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H). (Hexadecimal number expression)) is generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 121, A2409). This
A command including second display data (including dot data (Dp = 0)) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

Alternatively, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a character code (dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to information on the work probability setting value stored in the work probability setting value area. ) And the address of the 8-bit latch 167a are generated and stored in the probability setting value display data area, thereby generating the second display data (
A command including dot data (including Dp = 0) may be transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

FIG. 135 describes the case where the probability setting value is changed from 1 to 6. Figure 135
As shown, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the gaming microcomputer 111 represents the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, X1000001B: “1”). And dot data (D
The first display data including “p = 1)” is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. As a result, “1” is displayed as the value being changed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the dot is lit.

Next, when the set value change switch 102 is pressed, information on the probability set values (work probability set values) input from the set value change switch 102 is “2”, “3”,. And the first display data is updated and transmitted to (digit 0) of the status display device 152 each time. Therefore, in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, “2”, “3”,.
6 ”is displayed while being updated as the probability setting value being changed, while the lighting of the dots is maintained.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 11
1 represents an address of the 8-bit latch 167a and a character code corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area (for example, X0000110B: “6” and dot data (Dp = 0) are included) And generating the second display data including the status display device 1
52 to the driver 150. Therefore, in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, “
“6” is displayed as the probability setting value after the setting change, while the dot is turned off. And "6"
This display is maintained until the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the like, for example.

Thus, depending on the presence / absence of dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information), the displayed probability setting value is a value that is being changed (provisional value) or a value that has been changed (fixed value). Can be easily identified.

Here, the probability setting value during the setting change and / or the dot related to the first display data can be blinked. When blinking the dots, for example, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes an address of the 8-bit latch 167a and a character code (including dot data (Dp = 1)) corresponding to the information of the work probability setting value. 1 Display data (Dp =
1), the first display data (Dp = 0) including the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code (dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the information of the work probability setting value. By alternately overwriting the probability set value display data area, the first display data (Dp = 1)
) And first display data (Dp = 0) may be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals.

In addition, when blinking the probability setting value and the dot being changed, for example, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the character code (dot data (Dp (Dp)) corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the work probability setting value information. = 1))), the first display data (lighting) including, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code “X00” relating to non-lighting
The first display data (non-lighting) including “10000B” may be alternately transmitted at predetermined time intervals as described above. Thus, the first display data (setting value display lighting) and the first display data (no lighting) are alternately overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167a.

When blinking the probability setting value, the lighting of the dot may be omitted. In this case, the gaming microcomputer 111 corresponds to, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the work probability setting value. First display data including a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)), an address of the 8-bit latch 167a, and the character code relating to the non-lighting, and Are transmitted alternately at predetermined time intervals in the same manner as described above.

In the present embodiment, the first display data and the second display data have different display modes. Therefore, in addition to the presence / absence of dots and the presence / absence of blinking of the probability setting value, the intensity of the light to be lit may be different between the first display data and the second display data. Further, when the light emitting member (LED) of the state display device 152 has a plurality of different light emission colors, the first display data and the second display data may be configured to emit light in different colors. .

[Operations and effects of the fourteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In such a case, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 displays setting value information (setting change device 42) that can change a setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the setting related to the game, and information on the setting value by causing a light emitting member (such as an LED) to emit light. A possible display unit (status display device 152). The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state (on state) that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state (off state) that ends the setting variable state. Game control means (game control device 100
) Generates display data based on the set value (probability set value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93) and displays it on the display unit (state display device 152). The display data is
First display data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state The first display data includes second display data (probability setting values after setting change) having different display modes.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify whether the displayed set value (probability set value) is confirmed or not confirmed.

The display unit (state display device 152) can display a set value (probability set value) and additional information (Dp = 1) different from the set value (probability set value), and the first display data is And additional information (Dp = 1).

As a result, the set value (probability set value) depends on whether additional information is displayed (dots are lit).
It is possible to easily identify whether it is confirmed or not confirmed.

Further, the additional information (dot data) is displayed blinking. This
The discriminability of the probability setting value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking dots.

In addition, the setting value (probability setting value) related to the first display data is displayed blinking. Thereby, the discriminability of the probability setting value during the setting change can be enhanced by blinking the probability setting value.

[First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram illustrating a first modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. In the first modification, when the first display data is displayed and when the second display data is displayed, (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) of the status display device 152 are also turned on. .

That is, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates third display data (for example, “P--”) that indicates that the probability setting value displayed by the first display data is being changed, and sets the probability setting value. By storing in the value display data area (may be another display data area), the first display data and the third display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fourth display data (for example, “C--”) indicating that the probability setting value displayed by the second display data is after the setting change, and sets the probability setting value. By storing in the value display data area (may be another display data area), the second display data and the fourth display data are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

The third display data and the fourth display data are stored in an area that is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

The third display data includes the third display data (digit 1) transmitted to (digit 1) (display 900-1) of the status display device 152 and (digit 2) (display of the status display device 152). 900-2
) And third display data (digit 3) to be transmitted to (digit 3) (display unit 900-3) of the status display device 152. Including.

The third display data (digit 1) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third display data (digit 2) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third display data (digit 3) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H (1
Hex)) and a character code (for example, “X0010100B” (P)).

The fourth display data is the fourth display data (digit 1) transmitted toward (digit 1) of the status display device 152 and the fourth display data transmitted toward (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Data (digit 2
) And fourth display data (digit 3) to be transmitted to (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

The fourth display data (digit 1) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The fourth display data (digit 2) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The fourth display data (digit 3) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (for example, 25H (1
Hex)) and a character code (for example, “X0001100B” (C)).

As shown in FIG. 136, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the first display data (probability setting value during setting change) is displayed in the same manner as described above. It is displayed at (digit 0) of the device 152 and the third display data (
Digit 1) (-) is displayed on (digit 1) of status display 152, and third display data (digit 2) (
-) Is displayed on (digit 2) of the status display device 152, and third display data (digit 3) (P) is displayed on (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

In FIG. 136, the dot is lit, but the presence of the third display data makes it possible to identify that the probability setting value displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is being changed. The lighting of dots may be omitted.

When the set value change switch 102 is depressed, the information on the probability setting value (working probability setting value) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 is updated to “2”, “3”,... “6”. Each time, the first display data is updated and displayed in (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the (digit 1), (digit 2), (digit 3) display of the status display device 152 does not change. .

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the second display data is displayed on the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the fourth display data (digit 1) (-) is displayed on the status display as described above. Is displayed in (digit 1) of the device 152, the fourth display data (digit 2) (−) is displayed in (digit 2) of the status display device 152, and the fourth display data (digit 3) (C) is displayed. It is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

In this way, different characters are displayed during the setting change (P--) and after the setting change (C--), so whether the currently displayed value is the one being changed or not. Can be easily identified.

[Operation and Effect of First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the first modification, the display unit (status display device 152) has a plurality of digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1,
Digit 0) Display possible. The display data is a set value (displayed by the first display data)
(Probability setting value) indicates that the setting is being changed and the display unit (status display device 152)
In the third display data (P--) displayed in different digits from the first display data in FIG.
including. Thereby, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is a setting change.

The game control means (game control device 100) transmits the second display data toward the digit (digit 0) on which the first display data is displayed. The display data is transmitted by the second display data. It suggests that the displayed setting value (probability setting value) is the one after the setting change, and the display section (
The status display device 152) includes fourth display data (C--) displayed in different digits from the second display data. Thereby, it can be easily identified that the displayed probability setting value is the one after the setting change. Further, since the second display data is displayed in the same digit as the first display data, it is possible to identify the change from the setting change to the setting change without changing the viewpoint.

[Second Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 137 is a second modification of the probability setting value display mode in the gaming machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment, and the probability setting value display mode at the time of setting change and the probability setting value display mode at the time of setting confirmation It is the schematic diagram which compared.

In the second modification, the RAM initialization switch 112 shown in FIG. 119 or the like is turned off and the setting key switch 93 is turned on to turn on the power to enter the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) (see FIG. 120). ). At this time, the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited. However, if the displayed probability setting value is being changed,
It is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being confirmed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.
The gaming microcomputer 111 stores the fifth display data including the character code and the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (for example, 22H (hexadecimal number expression)) in the probability setting value display data area. 5 A command including display data is sent to the status display device 15.
2 to the driver 150.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, for example, the display of the fifth display data is maintained until the display of the fifth display data is finished or the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 or the like. .

As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the fifth display data is displayed on (digit 0) of the status display device 152 in the same way as the first display data (display during setting change). Since 1) is not present, the dot is not lit. At this time, even if the set value change switch 102 is pressed, the display content on the status display device 152 is not changed.

In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 suggests that the probability setting value displayed on the state display device 152 by the fifth display data is the one in the setting confirmation state (before the transition to the setting variable state). The sixth display data can be generated and transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. The sixth display data is stored in an area that is, for example, the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c and is not initialized by the RAM initialization switch 112, and (digit 1) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152 in the same manner as the fourth display data. ), (Digit 3).
Thereby, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), the sixth display data can be set to the same display (C--) as the fourth display data, but the display different from the fourth display data is also possible. Is possible.

Alternatively, the gaming microcomputer 111 extracts a character code (including dot data (Dp = 0)) corresponding to the probability setting value information stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c. Then, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the character code and the 8-bit latch 16
7d (or 8-bit latch 167b, 8-bit latch 167c) (for example, 25
H (hexadecimal number expression)) is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Thereby, a command including the fifth display data is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the digit (digit 0) in which the probability setting value during the setting change is displayed and the digit (digit 3 or digit 1) in which the probability setting value during the setting confirmation is displayed.
, Digits 2) can be different from each other.

[Operation and Effect of Second Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the second modified example, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a storage means (RAM 111c) in which information on a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored, and a storage means (RAM 111c). ) And a memory erasure unit (RAM initialization switch 112) for erasing information different from the information of the set value (probability set value). In the game control means (game control apparatus 100), the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory erasing means (RA
When the M initialization switch 112) is turned on and the gaming machine 10 is powered on, first display data is generated (setting change mode), and the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state and the memory is erased. When the means (RAM initialization switch 112) is turned off and the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited (setting confirmation mode).
The display data is based on information on a set value (probability set value) before the transition to the setting variable state on condition that the generation of the first display data and the second display data is prohibited. 5th display data produced | generated are included, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

Thereby, since the probability setting value is displayed in a state where setting change of the probability setting value is prohibited, an error that unexpectedly changes the probability setting value by touching the setting value change switch 102 can be avoided.

The display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in a different digit from the first display data. Thereby, it is possible to easily identify whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed based on the difference in display position.

The display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and the game control means (game control device 100) displays the fifth display data in the same digit as the first display data. The display data suggests that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the fifth display data is before the transition to the setting variable state, and the display unit (state display device 152) displays the fifth value. The display data includes sixth display data (C--) displayed in different digits. As a result, it is possible to easily determine that the displayed probability setting value is being confirmed.

[Third Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram illustrating a third modification of the display mode of the probability setting value in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. In the third modified example, during the setting change, the probability setting value during the setting change (
The provisional value) and the probability setting value (determined value) before the setting change (before changing to the setting variable state) are displayed at the same time. After the setting change, the probability setting value (determined value) after the setting change and the setting change The previous probability setting value (determined value) is displayed at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shown in FIG. 119 and the like are turned on (first state), and the power is turned on to enter the setting variable state. At this time,
The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the first lighting data (same as the first display data) and FIG.
The second lighting data shown in C) (the same as the fifth display data) is generated at the same time. Further, by turning off the setting key switch 93, the gaming microcomputer 111 causes the fourth lighting data (
The same as the second display data).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates first lighting data (digit 0) and second lighting data (digit 3), and also generates third lighting data to generate a driver 1 for the status display device 152.
50 can be sent, but this can be omitted.

In the third modification, instead of the second lighting data (digit 3), the second lighting data (digit 0) is generated, and this is different from the first lighting data (digit 0) (alternately). ) On the status display device 152, and only the status display device 152 (digit 0) (other digits may be used)
The probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change may be alternately displayed. Here, the switching period between the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change is set to a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and the display time (for example, 1 second) of the probability setting value during the setting change. )When,
The display time (for example, 1 second) of the probability setting value before the setting change is set to be the same. Further, the display time of one of the display time of the probability setting value and the probability setting value before the setting change may be lengthened, and the other display time may be shortened. Furthermore, in order to easily distinguish between the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value before the setting change, the first lighting data is preferably configured to include dot data (Dp = 1).

The third lighting data is the probability that the probability setting value is displayed by the fourth lighting data (first lighting data) from the probability setting value before the setting change displayed by the second lighting data in the setting change. This suggests changing to a set value, and includes third lighting data (digit 1) (intermediate digit) and third lighting data (digit 2) (intermediate digit).

The third lighting data (digit 1) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (for example, 23H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The third lighting data (digit 2) is stored in the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (for example, 24H (1
Hex representation)) and a character code (for example, “X0011010B” (−)).

The character code of the third lighting data (digit 1, digit 2) is “X00111”.
10B "(" T "rotated 90 degrees to the right, imitating a left-pointing arrow) is also suitable.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on and the power is turned on, the first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) is displayed on the state display device 152 ( Displayed in the digit 0) and the dot is lit. Also, the third lighting data (digit 1) (−) is displayed on (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and the third lighting data (digit 2) (−) is displayed on the status display device 152 (digit 2). The second lighting data (probability setting value before setting change) is displayed on (digit 3) of the status display device 152.

As the set value change switch 102 is depressed, the information on the probability set values input from the set value change switch 102 is updated to “2”, “3”,. Data is updated and transmitted toward (digit 0) of the status display device 152, but the status display device 1
The display of 52 (digit 1), (digit 2), and (digit 3) does not change.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the fourth lighting data (probability setting value after the setting change) is displayed on the (digit 0) of the status display device 152 and the dot is turned off as described above. Further, the display of the third lighting data (digit 1), the third lighting data (digit 2), and the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change) is maintained. This display is maintained until, for example, a game ball wins at the start winning opening 36 or the like.

Thus, since the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value during the setting change (and after the setting change) are displayed at the same time, setting mistakes in the probability setting value can be reduced.

[Operation and Effect of Third Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third modification includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, and the stop result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.
The gaming machine 10 emits a setting change means (setting change device 42) that can change a setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting relating to the game, and a light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit a setting value (probability setting value). And a display unit (status display device 152) capable of displaying information related to. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that ends the setting variable state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (RAM1) in which information on a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored.
11c), a setting value (probability setting value), and a switch (setting key switch 9)
The lighting data is generated based on the state of 3) and can be transmitted to the display unit (state display device 152). The display unit (status display device 152) can display a plurality of digits, and each digit can be displayed by lighting data. The lighting data includes first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. Is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before the transition to the setting variable state, and the second lighting data (before the setting change) displayed in different digits from the first lighting data. Probability setting value).

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during the setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change are simultaneously displayed on the display unit (status display device 152).
It is possible to reliably change the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value).

In the third modification, the display unit (status display device 152) has an intermediate digit (digit 3) between the digit (digit 0) for displaying the first lighting data and the digit (digit 3) for displaying the second lighting data. The lighting data includes the third lighting data (-) displayed in the middle digit. Therefore, the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data (or the first lighting data) is set from the probability setting value displayed by the second lighting data during the setting change by the third lighting data. It can be suggested to change.

In the third modification, the lighting data includes fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and the fourth lighting data is the first lighting data. Is displayed in the same digit (digit 0). Thereby, the probability setting value during the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be visually recognized without changing the viewpoint.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition, and the stop result of the variable display game. When a special result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 emits a setting change means (setting change device 42) that can change a setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting relating to the game, and a light emitting member (LED or the like) to emit a setting value (probability setting value). And a display unit (status display device 152) capable of displaying information related to. The setting changing means (setting changing device 42) includes a switch (setting key switch 93) for shifting to a setting variable state in which a setting value (probability setting value) can be changed. The state can be converted into a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that ends the setting variable state. The game control means (game control device 100) is a storage means (R) in which information on a set value (probability set value) before shifting to the setting variable state is stored.
AM 111c), lighting data is generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) and the state of the switch (setting key switch 93), and can be transmitted to the display unit (status display device 152). . The display unit (status display device 152) can be displayed by lighting data. The lighting data includes first lighting data (probability setting value during setting change) generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the first state, and the switch (setting key switch 93) in the first state. Is generated based on a setting value (probability setting value) before shifting to the setting variable state, and is displayed at a timing different from the first lighting data (before the setting change). Probability setting value).

As a result, the setting value (probability setting value) during the setting change and the setting value (probability setting value) before the setting change are alternately displayed on the display unit (status display device 152).
It is possible to reliably change the setting value (probability setting value) after grasping the probability setting value).

[Fourth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram illustrating a fourth modification of the display mode of probability setting values in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. The fourth modified example shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138, and changes with (A), (B), (C) with the passage of time in FIG. Value) is updated.

In the fourth modified example, the fourth lighting data is initially set to a character code (for example, “X0000110B” corresponding to the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the information of the work probability setting value when the setting key switch 93 is turned off. (6)).

After a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 93 was turned off, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data based on the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code, and displays the probability setting value. The data is stored (overwritten) in the data area. Further, the lighting data for non-lighting is generated by the address of the 8-bit latch 167a and the character code “X0010000B” for non-lighting, and the probability setting value display data area is displayed. Remember (overwrite)
To do.

Thereby, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the third lighting data (digit 2), the fourth lighting data (digit 1) (probability setting value after setting change) Unlit lighting data (digit 0) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the character code related to the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167b, and the character code related to no lighting is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167a.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), (digit 3) and (digit 2) of the status display device 152 are displayed.
) Is maintained, the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed in (digit 1) of the status display device 152, and (digit 0) of the status display device 152 is turned off.

After the predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data based on the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code, and stores (overwrites) it in the probability setting value display data area. The lighting data for non-lighting is generated from the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code for non-lighting, and stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area. Accordingly, the second lighting data (digit 3) (probability setting value before setting change), the fourth lighting data (digit 2) (probability setting value after setting change), and the non-lighting lighting data (digit 1). ), Non-lighting lighting data (digit 0) is transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. Therefore, the character code related to the probability setting value after the setting change is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167c, and the character code indicating no lighting is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167b.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the display of (digit 3) of the status display device 152 is maintained, while the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed in (digit 2) of the status display device 152. Is displayed, and (digit 0) and (digit 1) of the status display device 152 are turned off.

Further, after the predetermined time, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates the fourth lighting data based on the address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code, and stores (overwrites) it in the probability setting value display data area. Further, non-lighting lighting data is generated from the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code related to non-lighting, and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area. As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 3), the non-lighting lighting data (
Digit 2), unlit lighting data (digit 1), and unlit lighting data (digit 0) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. The 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the character code related to the probability setting value after the setting change, and the 8-bit latch 167c is overwritten with the character code related to no lighting.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the probability setting value (6) after the setting change is displayed in (digit 3) of the status display device 152, and (digit 0) and (digit) of the status display device 152 are displayed. 1), (digit 2
) Goes off.

In the fourth modified example, when the display shown in FIG. 139C is displayed, the work probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after the setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even in the stage before the display in FIG. 139 (C), for example, the game probability set value stored in the probability set value display data area is set by winning a game ball in the start winning opening 36 or the like. Store (overwrite) the probability setting value after the change in the probability setting value area.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the fourth modification, the lighting data includes fourth lighting data generated when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, and includes game control means (game control device 100).
) Indicates the fourth lighting data, the digit (digit 0) displaying the first lighting data, the middle digit (digit 1),
The display unit (digit 2) and the display unit (digit 3) are moved in order of the second lighting data digit (digit 3).
To the status display device 152).

Thereby, it is possible to visually grasp that the probability setting value is updated (overwritten) from the probability setting value before the setting change to the probability setting value after the setting change by the setting change.

[Fifth Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment]
FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram illustrating a fifth modification of the probability setting value display mode in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. As in the fourth modification, the fifth modification shows the display mode after the setting change shown in FIG. 138. In FIG. 139, the probability changes by changing (A) and (B) over time. The display suggests that the set value (determined value) has been updated.

In the fifth modification, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates fifth lighting data (AFt) that suggests that the probability setting value displayed by the fourth lighting data is the probability setting value after the setting change.

The fifth lighting data includes fifth lighting data (digit 3), fifth lighting data (digit 2), and fifth lighting data (digit 1), which are ROM 111b or RAM 111c and RA.
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The fifth lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X0001010B” (A)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

The fifth lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0011100B” (t)). Unlike FIG. 72, the character code “X0011100B” corresponds to the character “t”.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111 sets 8
The sixth lighting data representing the probability setting value before the setting change by the address of the bit latch 167a and the character code (for example, “X0000001B” (1)) corresponding to the information of the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area Is generated.

In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 has (digit 3), (digit 2), (digit 1) of the status display device 152.
Is used to generate the seventh lighting data (bEf) that suggests that the probability setting value displayed by the sixth lighting data is the one before the setting change.

The seventh lighting data includes seventh lighting data (digit 3), seventh lighting data (digit 2), and seventh lighting data (digit 1), which are also the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c and are RA.
It is stored in an area that is not initialized by the M initialization switch 112.

The seventh lighting data (digit 3) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167d and the character code (“X000101B” (b)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 2) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167c and the character code (“X0001110B” (E)).

The seventh lighting data (digit 1) includes, for example, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b and the character code (“X0001111B” (F)).

After the setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), the gaming microcomputer 111
The sixth lighting data (digit 0) is generated from the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, “X0000110B” (1)) corresponding to the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. And stored (overwritten) in the probability set value display data area, the address of the 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code (for example, “X0001111B
”(F)), the seventh lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (or other display data area).

The gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, “X0001110B” (E)) to generate the seventh lighting data (digit 2).
Is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (may be another display data area)
The address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, “X00
01011B "(b)), the seventh lighting data (digit 3) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (or other display data area). As a result, the sixth lighting data (digit 0) and the seventh lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152.

Thereby, the 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code “X0000001B” (1) related to the sixth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b has the seventh code.
The character code “X0001111B” (F) related to the lighting data (digit 1) is overwritten, and the character code “X” related to the seventh lighting data (digit 2) is stored in the 8-bit latch 167c.
“0001110B” (E) is overwritten, and the 8-bit latch 167d is overwritten with the character code “X0001011B” (b) relating to the seventh lighting data (digit 3).

Therefore, after setting key switch 93 is turned off (second state), FIG.
), “BEF1” (Before1) is displayed on the state display device 152, and it can be recognized that the probability setting value before the setting change is “1”. Further, in the fifth modified example, “1bEF” (1Before) may be displayed.

Thereafter, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167a (digit 0) and the character code (for example, “" for the work probability setting value stored in the work probability setting value area).
X0000110B "(6)) generates the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and stores (overwrites) it in the probability set value display data area, and the address of 8-bit latch 167b (digit 1) and the character code (" X0011100B ”(T)), the fifth lighting data (digit 1) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (or other display data area).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses the address of the 8-bit latch 167c (digit 2) and the character code (for example, “X0001111B” (F)) to display the fifth lighting data (digit 2).
Is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (may be another display data area)
The address of the 8-bit latch 167d (digit 3) and the character code (for example, “X00
01010B "(A)), the fifth lighting data (digit 3) is generated and stored (overwritten) in the probability setting value display data area (or other display data area).

As a result, the fourth lighting data (digit 0) and the fifth lighting data (digit 1, digit 2, digit 3) are transmitted to the driver 150 of the status display device 152. The 8-bit latch 167a is overwritten with the character code “X0000110B” (6) related to the fourth lighting data (digit 0), and the 8-bit latch 167b is overwritten with the character related to the fifth lighting data (digit 1). The code ("X0011100B" (t)) is overwritten, the character code "X00011111B" (F) related to the fifth lighting data is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167c, and the fifth lighting data is overwritten in the 8-bit latch 167d. The character code “X0001010B”
"(A) is overwritten."

Thereby, after FIG. 140 (A), as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the status display device 152
“AFt6” (After6) is displayed, and it can be recognized that the probability setting value after the setting change is “6”. In the fifth modified example, “6AFt” (6After) may be displayed. In particular, by displaying the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change in the same digit (may be a digit other than digit 0), the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability after the setting change The set value can be easily identified.

In the fifth modification, when the display shown in FIG. 140B is displayed, the work probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is stored in the probability setting value area as the probability setting value after the setting change. (Overwrite. Alternatively, even at the stage before the display of FIG. 140 (B), for example, when a game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the like, the work probability setting value stored in the probability setting value display data area is set. Store (overwrite) the probability setting value after the change in the probability setting value area.

[Operations and effects of the fifth modification of the fourteenth embodiment]
In the fifth modification, the lighting data suggests that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the fourth lighting data is the one after the setting change, and is in a different digit from the fourth lighting data. The fifth lighting data (AFt) to be displayed is included. Further, the lighting data is sixth lighting data generated based on the setting value (probability setting value) before the transition to the setting variable state when the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state. including. Further, the lighting data suggests that the setting value (probability setting value) displayed by the sixth lighting data is before shifting to the setting variable state (before setting change) and the sixth lighting data. The 7th lighting data (bEF) displayed in a different digit from the above are included. The game control means (game control device 100)
When the switch (setting key switch 93) is in the second state, the sixth lighting data (probability setting value before the setting change) and the seventh lighting data (bEF) are output. Lighting data (probability setting value after setting change) and fifth lighting data (AFt) are output.

As a result, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change are displayed with a time difference together with a display that suggests them, so the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily Can be identified.

Further, the fourth lighting data and the sixth lighting data are displayed in the same digit (digit 0). Thereby, the probability setting value before the setting change and the probability setting value after the setting change can be easily identified without moving the line of sight.

[Fifteenth embodiment]
The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 151. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourteenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to fourteenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifteenth embodiment relates to setting of a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Referring to FIG. 141, the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Details of the variation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control apparatus 100.

First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group table (distribution table, variation pattern group) based on the information (here, the variation pattern group number) that is drawn and determined at the time of the end of the big hit by a big hit end process described later. (A4301). Specifically, the corresponding variation group table is set by the variation pattern group number. The variation pattern group number functions as a parameter (index value, mediation value) that defines the variation group table in association with the variation group table. In addition to the variation pattern group number, the variation group table is also based on the current game state (probability variation state, normal state, etc.) and the result of the special figure variation display game to be started (outage, small hit, big hit). Is set.

Then, a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4302). Then, the 2-byte distribution process is executed (A4303), the address of the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the variation selection table is prepared (A4304).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) (A4305). Then, the distribution process is executed (A430).
6) Obtain the variation number obtained as a result of the distribution and save it in the variation number area (A4).
307).

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4303) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142A is a flowchart showing a procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the top data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in A4301) is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4401). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation selection table. However, the variation group table that defines only the variation selection table with the variation pattern “no reach” (for example, In some variation group tables when the result is out of place, there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value “
“0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the head.

When the first data of the selection table (variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407), the 2-byte sorting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the top data of the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “N”), the selection table (variation group table)
1 is first obtained (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4302 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404).
Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4405). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403. Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. (A4404
), It is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4405).

In step A4405, it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4
Execute until the result of 405 is “Y”. As a result, any one variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is selected from at least one variation selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4306) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 142B is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the distribution process. The distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the top data of the target selection table (variation selection table prepared in step A4304) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the variation selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation number), but in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, the distribution value “0”, that is, A code with no sorting is specified at the top.

When the leading data of the target selection table (variation selection table) is a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the data address corresponding to the distribution result. (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (variation selection table) is not a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “N”), the first specified in the target selection table (variation selection table) A distribution value is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A4503 from the random value prepared in Step A4305 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2) (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), step A4
The processing shifts to step 503, and the subsequent processing is performed.

That is, a distribution value specified next in the target selection table (variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then a new value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random number determined in the previous step A4505. A random value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). The above process is performed in step A4.
The process is executed until it is determined in 505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, any one variation pattern (variation number) is selected from at least one variation pattern (variation number) defined in the target selection table (variation selection table).
Is selected.

If the game control apparatus 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4507), the distribution process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 19) described above will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the fifteenth embodiment which is executed by the game control apparatus 100.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, a variation time value table is set (A4602), and a variation time value corresponding to the variation number is acquired (A4603).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the variation time value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4604). After that, the change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change number
Is prepared as an effect command (A4605), and an effect command setting process is performed (A460).
6). Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by −1 (A4607),
The address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (A4608). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4609), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A46).
10) The variation start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random values stored in the start storage means (game control apparatus 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to the extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Big hits end processing]
Referring to FIG. 144, the jackpot end process (A
2614) will be described in detail. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process according to the fifteenth embodiment executed by the game control apparatus 100.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability variation determination data is high probability data (A6201). In this embodiment, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25).
In step A4008 and the step A4108 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), it is assumed that probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is set. Probability fluctuation judgment data becomes high probability data when it is a probabilistic big hit stop symbol number that becomes probabilistic after the big hit ends, and becomes low probability data when it is a normal big hit stop symbol number that becomes short after the big hit ends .

The game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 when the data is not high probability data (result of A6201 is “N”) (A6202), and when the data is high probability data (result of A6201 is “Y”). Then, the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6203).

In the big hit end setting process 1, in order to enter a short time state (low probability state of the special figure variation display game) after the big hit, the special high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure game mode flag Save the special flag low probability & short time flag in the area. Further, in the big hit end setting process 1, the initial value of the time shortening fluctuation count is saved in the time shortening fluctuation count area.

In the big hit end setting process 2, in order to enter a probable change state (high probability state of special figure variation display game) after the big hit ends, the special figure game mode flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area. Save special flag high probability & short time flag in the area.

In the present embodiment, since the electric power support (short time) occurs after the big hit ends (FIG. 14).
6), in the jackpot end setting process 2, the latent probability changing state without the support for ordinary power is not generated. However, when the latent probability change state is generated, the big hit end setting process 2 saves the normal figure low probability flag in the normal figure game mode flag area, and there is no special figure high probability & short time in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the flag.

Next, the game control device 100 sets an effect mode information address table (A6204).
), The address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process at the start of change (especially A4009, A4109) is acquired (A6205), and the presentation set after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state) The mode production mode number (production mode number) is acquired and saved (A6206).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The next mode transition information is acquired and saved (A6208).

Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the power command restoration transmission command area ( A6210), the effect command setting process is executed (A6211).

Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the presence or absence of time reduction (general power support), and the production mode. As a probability information command, one of “high probability / short time”, “low probability / short time”, “high probability / short time”,
Further, there are a plurality of commands including information on the production mode.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213).
Then, a time shortening variation number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is a short time (general power support) after the end of the jackpot (A6216). When there is a short time (Fujiden Support) (A6216 result is “Y”)
Then, the process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time reduction (Fujiden support) (A6216
Result is “N”), and a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6217)
Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A6218), and the process proceeds to step A6219.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure routine process (A
6219), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6220).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is off, the big hit 3 signal is off, the big hit 4 signal is off) in the external information output data area (A6221). Signals related to termination (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A6222).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A622).
3) Clear the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of jackpot (
A6224), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (A6225). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (A6226), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6227).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the specific gaming state is reached after the big hit is over (
A6228). In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state), but may include a short time state or a general power support state. In the jackpot end setting processing 1 and 2, a short time state (with ordinary power support) or a probable change state (with ordinary power support) is set as the specific gaming state after the end of the jackpot state (see FIG. 146). When the big hit is a promiscuous big hit, the promiscuous state is entered after the big hit state is completed, and when the big hit is normal, the time is shortened.

When the game control device 100 does not enter the specific gaming state after the big hit (the result of A6228 is “N”), the game control device 100 normally sets the variation pattern group number (variation group table number) corresponding to the variation pattern group (A6229). . In normal settings, production mode information,
Fluctuation distribution information is derived based on the stop symbol pattern, etc., the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information is acquired, and the fluctuation group table number is set (FIG. 1 described later).
63, see FIG. 164).

When the game control device 100 enters the specific gaming state after the big hit (the result of A6228 is “Y”), the variation pattern group number corresponding to the variation pattern group (variation group table) is selected and set according to the set value. (A6230). The variation pattern group number is a parameter that defines the variation pattern group. Here, the numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of the variation group tables A to E are selected by lottery at a selection rate according to the set value as defined in the selection rate table (see FIG. 147). It should be noted that the process may proceed to step A6230 in consideration of conditions other than the special game state after the special game state is finished.

As described above, when the game state is the specific game state (the result of A6228 is “Y”), the variable group table number is set by a method (aspect) different from the normal setting according to the general electric power support of the specific game state. This corresponds to the occurrence of “small hit RUSH” (small hit rush). Therefore, when the latent probability changing state without the utility support occurs after the big hit state ends, the latent probability changing state may not be included in the specific gaming state in the determination of step A6228. As shown in FIG. 145 (described later), in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs only in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a small hit occurs with a high probability every time the special figure 2 variable display game. Small hit R
USH "occurs. Also, as in the first embodiment, if a small hit occurs only in the special figure 1 variable display game instead of the special figure 2 variable display game, the normal setting and A configuration in which the variation group table number is set by a different method (mode) is also possible.

In each of the variation group tables A to E, a distribution value (ratio of distribution of the variation pattern) of the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) is defined (see FIG. 148).
. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed in the specific game state after the end of the special game state is determined by lottery according to the set value. Therefore, apart from the big hit probability, the increasing speed of the number of acquired game balls acquired by the player can be flexibly adjusted through a variation pattern (that is, a variation time value) drawn in accordance with the set value. Note that the increase speed of the number of acquired balls (departure speed) is the number of acquired game balls that a player can acquire per unit time.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 ends the jackpot ending process.

[Big hit probability and small hit probability]
FIG. 145 exemplifies the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability of the special figure display game determined as a result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22) and the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) for each setting (each set value). It is a table to do.

In the present embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the small hit occurs as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game and does not occur as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game has a small amount). The hit probability is 0 for each setting). The jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment (FIGS. 104C and 104D).

In the fifteenth embodiment, the jackpot probability, which is the probability that a jackpot will occur, increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of acquired balls (the total number of balls and prize balls) obtained by jackpot in unit time increases in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Increases the number of acquired balls.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability that a small hit will occur, is constant regardless of the set value. Further, as shown in the small hit determination process (FIG. 23), there is no distinction between the low probability state and the high probability state in the small hit probability. A configuration in which a slight setting difference is provided for the small hit probability and the small hit probability is slightly changed according to the set value is also possible. Small hit probability is normal (about big hit probability)
It is set higher than normal, and in the ordinary power support state (probability change state, short time state), “small hits” where a small hit occurs with a high probability (about 60% here) for each special figure 2 variable display game. RUS
H "(small hit rush) occurs.

[Example of special figure big hit symbol distribution]
FIG. 146 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (breakdown breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the allocation rate of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 5) is constant regardless of the set value, and the probability variation entry rate is also constant regardless of the set value. Special figure 2
The variable display game is more likely to hit 16R than the special figure 1 variable display game, and is advantageous to the player.

[Selection rate of variable group table]
FIG. 147 shows the variation group tables A to B selected by the lottery in step A6230.
It is a selection rate table (distribution table) which prescribes | regulates the selection rate (ratio, distribution rate) of the number of E (variation pattern group number). As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern group number is drawn in accordance with the set value in the case where the specific game state is entered after the jackpot is over (A6230 in FIG. 141). In this way, the variation group table (distribution table) that defines the ratio of distribution of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed after the special gaming state is drawn at a probability (selection rate) corresponding to the set value. .

Regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of the variation time is A
It becomes smaller in the order of>B>C>D> E. That is, the average variation time (average variation time) of the special figure variation display game becomes smaller in the order of A>B>C>D> E with respect to the selected variation group tables A to E. The average variation time is the longest when the variation group table A is selected, and is the shortest when the variation group table E is selected.

As described above, the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game to be executed is different for each selected variation group table (distribution table). In the selection rate table of FIG. 147, the lower the setting value is, the easier it is to select the variation group table E having a small variation time expectation value, and the variation group table B having a relatively large variation time expectation value is selected. It becomes difficult to be done. Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10.

In this way, the lower the setting value is, the smaller the average variation time (expected value of the variation time) of the special figure variation display game is. The expected value of the number of acquired balls (the total number of balls and prize balls) obtained by “small hit RUSH” in the unit time of state) is set 6 <setting 5 <setting 4 <setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1 It increases in order, and the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls becomes higher as the setting is lower. In addition, the lower the setting, the smaller the average fluctuation time of the special figure display game in the specific gaming state, so the digestion of the reservation becomes faster and the increase rate of the number of acquired balls obtained by “small hit RUSH” In addition, the number of fired balls for which the special figure variation display game does not start even if the holding reaches the upper limit and wins the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port) is reduced. In this way, the lower the setting for the small hit, the more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the higher the setting for the big hit, the opposite to the advantage for the player, and the difference (setting difference) due to the set value is alleviated. The

[Example of variation group table and variation selection table]
FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 exemplify the fluctuation group tables A to E and the fluctuation selection table of the non-reach system that can be selected in each fluctuation group table. Note that FIG. 148 is an example in the case where the special figure variation display game is lost in the probability variation state, and FIG. 149 is an example in which the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state. The specific variation group table as shown in FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 is the variation pattern setting process step A4301.
In addition to the variation pattern group number, it is set based on the current game state and the result of the special figure variation display game to be started (disconnected, small hit, big hit).

In FIGS. 148A-E, each variation group table A to E constitutes a variation pattern group composed of variation patterns of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system. As a result of the 2-byte sorting process (A4303) by the set variation group tables A to E, a variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system is selected at a predetermined ratio. Furthermore, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) using the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined rate. In FIG. 148, for the sake of simplicity, an example in which one variation number is selected at a rate of 100% by the variation selection table is shown for a non-reach system, but FIG.
As shown in another example, a plurality of variation numbers may be selected at a predetermined ratio by a variation selection table.

As shown in FIGS. 148A-E, when the variation selection tables for the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system are selected, the expected value of the variation time increases in the order of the non-reach system <normal reach system <SP1 reach system. Is set as follows. For example, the expected value of the variation time may be set to 7 seconds for the non-reach system, 15 seconds for the normal reach system, and 30 seconds for the SP1 reach system.

The selected ratio of the fluctuation selection table of the non-reach system is as follows: fluctuation group table A <fluctuation group table B <fluctuation group table C ≦ fluctuation group tables D and E (D ′, E
'), And the ratio of the normal reach type or SP1 reach type change selection table selected is: change group table A> change group table B> change group table C
≧ Decrease in the order of variation group tables D and E (D ′, E ′). Furthermore, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system (the same one of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, and the SP1 reach system) is selected is the fluctuation group table A> the fluctuation group. Table B> variable group table C> variable group table D (including D ′)> variable group table E (including E ′) is set so as to decrease. Accordingly, the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time decreases in the order of fluctuation group table A> fluctuation group table B> fluctuation group table C> fluctuation group table D> fluctuation group table E, and the special figure fluctuation display game. Becomes a short fluctuation.

The variation group tables D and E and the variation selection table associated therewith are the variation pattern groups when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit state exceeds a predetermined number n (here, 100 times). By switching the number (parameter), the change group tables D ′ and E ′ and the change selection table associated therewith are switched. That is, these are switched according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit state. For example,
For example, the variation pattern group number corresponding to the variation group table D ′, E ′ is number 6,
When the number of executions of the special figure variation display game exceeds a predetermined number n (here, 100 times), the variation pattern group number is changed from numbers 4, 5 to numbers 6, 7. In the variation group table E ′, the expected value of the variation time is significantly shorter than that of the variation group table D ′.

In this way, the expected value of the variation time is the normal length (for example, the same as the variation group table C) until the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit ends from 1 to n times (here, 100 times). However, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit is n + 1 times (here, 10
1 time) or more, the expected value of the variation time is shortened. Therefore, if the state where the special gaming state (big hit state) does not occur easily (so-called humiliation state) continues for a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), the rate of increase in the number of acquired balls is increased to give the player a bonus. And the interest of the game is improved. Also, in a specific game state (probability change state, short time state, general power support state) where the influence of the change time on the increase rate of the number of acquired balls is large, the number of executions of the special figure change display game after the big hit ends is In the case of exceeding 100 times, the expected value of the variation time can be shortened, and the increasing speed of the number of acquired balls can be remarkably improved.

As described above, when a specific game state (in this case, a probable variation state) in which a special game state is more likely to occur than the normal state occurs after the special game state, execution of the special figure change display game executed after the special game state The variation group table (distribution table) is switched by changing the parameter (variation pattern group number) corresponding to the variation group table (distribution table) according to the number of times. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to estimate the set value from the variation pattern.

Note that the expected value (average value) of the fluctuation time when the fluctuation selection table of the same reach system is selected is the fluctuation group table A (7.0 seconds) for only the fluctuation selection table of the non-reach system shown in FIG. > Variable group table B (5.0 seconds)> Variable group table C
(3.0 seconds)> Fluctuation group table D (3.0 seconds to 2.0 seconds)> Fluctuation group table E (3.0 seconds to 0.5 seconds) is decreased in this order, normal reach system or SP1 reach system Then, it may not be changed.

FIG. 149 is also similar to FIG. 148, but when the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the probability variation state, the variation selection table that can be selected in each variation group table A to E is:
Only reachless and normal reach systems. Further, the fluctuation time value of the fluctuation of the non-reach system defined by the fluctuation selection table of the non-reach system is different from that in FIG. The fluctuation time value of the fluctuation in the non-reach system is shorter than that in FIG. 148 in FIG. 149, but may be longer. Special Figure 2 Because the small hit probability in the fluctuation display game is higher than the probability of losing, if the fluctuation time value when the small hit occurs is shorter than that in the case of losing, the speed of pending digest in “small hit RUSH” will be As the speed increases, the number of acquired balls increases.

Further, when the special figure variation display game is out of the small hit in the probability variation state, the content of the variation group tables A to E and the variation selection table may be the same, and the data capacity of the table may be reduced.

[Modification of Fifteenth Embodiment]
A modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 and 151. The present variation relates to lottery / setting of a variation group table (variation pattern group).

With reference to FIG. 150, the jackpot end process (A2614) in the special figure game process (FIG. 12) according to the modification will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process according to the modification of the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 144, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (A7201). Note that step A400 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25).
8 and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), step A4108 sets the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number. In addition, when there is ordinary power support after the big hit, the time shortening determination data becomes the short-time operation data, and when there is no common electric support after the big hit, the time reduction determination data is not the short-time operation data.

First, when the game control device 100 is not the short-time operation data (the result of A7201 is “N”).
) Executes the jackpot end setting process 3 (A7202), and when it is the short time operation data (A7)
If the result of 201 is “Y”), the jackpot end setting process 4 is executed (A7203).

In the big hit end setting process 3, in order to enter the latent probability change state after the big hit, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and the special figure high probability & no short time flag in the special figure game mode flag area Save. In the big hit end setting process 3, the initial value of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region. In addition, in this modification, since it is the structure in which the public power support always occurs after the big hit ends, the big hit end setting process 3 is not executed, and the latent probability changing state does not occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the latent probability variation state is generated after the end of the big hit is also possible.

In the big hit end setting process 4, in order to enter the probability change state (not the latent probability change state) after the big hit, the special figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area and the special figure high in the special figure game mode flag area. Saves the probabilities and short time flags. In the big hit end setting process 4, the initial value of the high probability variation count is saved in the high probability variation count area.

In addition, after step A6213, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number as an effect command (A7214), and executes an effect command setting process (A6215).

When the game control device 100 enters the specific gaming state (here, the probability variation state) after the big hit (the result of A6228 is “Y”), the variation pattern group number (and the variation group table) is set according to the set value. Set according to the jackpot symbol that was drawn with the probability (A
7230). In addition, in this modification, it is comprised so that it may be in a specific game state (here, a probable variation state) after the big hit.

Note that the jackpot symbol (hit stop symbol) is a parameter (index value, mediation value) associated with the variation group table in order to define the variation group table (distribution table). In step A4004 of the 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 25) and step A4104 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 26), a big hit stop symbol number is selected according to the set value.

FIG. 151 is a jackpot symbol table exemplifying the jackpot symbol distribution (breakdown breakdown) of the special figure variation display game for each setting in the modification of the fifteenth embodiment. As with FIG. 27, this jackpot symbol table defines jackpot symbols A to E (corresponding to jackpot stop symbol numbers) indicating the types of jackpots and their distribution rate (selection rate). In the present embodiment, all types of jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, and the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine with a high probability variation count of a predetermined count (for example, 300).

The jackpot symbol A to lottery (distribution) based on the allocation rate (selection rate) of the jackpot symbol table
The numbers (variation pattern group numbers) of the variation group tables A to E are set in correspondence with E (A7230).

Regarding the variation patterns of the variation group tables A to E, the expected value of the variation time is A
It becomes smaller in the order of>B>C>D> E. In the jackpot symbol table of FIG. 151, the lower the setting is, the easier it is to select the variation group table E with a small variation time expectation value, and it becomes difficult to select the variation group table B with a relatively large variation time expectation value ( Same as FIG. 147). Therefore, the lower the setting, the smaller the average variation time (expected value of variation time) of the special figure variation display game during operation of the gaming machine 10.

[Operations and effects of the fifteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment includes control means (game control device 1) that can execute a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, winning in the start winning opening).
00, an effect control device 300), and when the result of stopping the variable display game is a special result, a special game state (big hit state) advantageous for the player is generated. The gaming machine 10 has a setting changing means (for example, a setting key switch 93) that can change a setting value corresponding to the setting relating to the game.
And a set value change switch 102). The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special gaming state (for example, big hit) by lottery according to the set value.

Therefore, apart from the probability of occurrence of a special gaming state (big hit probability), the rate of increase in the number of game balls acquired by a player can be flexibly controlled through a variation pattern (that is, a variation time value) drawn in accordance with a set value. Can be adjusted. In particular, after the special game state, since it is usually a specific game state (probability change state, short time state, normal power support state), the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation time value) has a great influence on the increase rate of the number of acquired balls. .

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300)
A parameter (for example, a variation pattern group number or a jackpot symbol) associated with a distribution table (for example, a variation group table) that prescribes a ratio for distributing a variation pattern of a variation display game executed after the special game state is set to a set value. A lottery with a probability corresponding to

Therefore, it is possible to select a distribution table by drawing lots of parameters associated with the distribution table with a probability corresponding to a set value, and to further distribute a variation pattern using the distribution table. For this reason, it is possible to preferably draw the variation pattern according to the set value. Also,
For example, if you change the ratio (selection rate) to distribute the variation pattern for each distribution table,
More preferably, the variation pattern can be randomly selected according to the set value.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the expected value of the variation time of the variation pattern distributed by the distribution table is different for each distribution table. Therefore, for the setting value with a low probability of jackpot,
By making it easy to draw a sorting table with a short expected value of the variation time, the increase speed of the number of acquired balls can be increased, and the setting difference (the difference due to the set value) with respect to the increase speed of the acquired number of balls can be reduced. Conversely, by making it easier to draw a sorting table with a short expected variation time for a setting value with a high probability of jackpot, increasing the increase rate of the number of acquired balls, setting difference to the increase rate of the number of acquired balls (Difference by setting value) can be increased.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the parameters corresponding to the distribution table (for example, the switching table are switched so as to be switched according to the number of executions of the variable display game executed after the special gaming state).
Change the fluctuation pattern group number). Therefore, according to the number of executions of the variable display game after the special game state, the player estimates the set value from the variation pattern by switching to a distribution table with a short or long expected value of the variation time, compared with the case where the switching is not performed. It becomes difficult to do.

Further, for example, the number of executions of the variable display game after the special gaming state is a predetermined number (for example, 10
When it becomes larger than (0 times), a state where the special gaming state (big hit state) does not occur easily (so-called humming state) has continued over a predetermined number of times by switching to a distribution table with a short expected value of the variation time In this case, it is possible to give the player a privilege by increasing the increase rate of the number of acquired balls, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means generates the first special game state (big hit state) when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result, and the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result. When a result is obtained, a second special game state (small hit state) is generated that has a smaller game value that the player can acquire than the first special game state. The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special gaming state by lottery according to the set value. The control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of a probable big hit), a gaming state in which the second special gaming state (small hit state) is likely to occur after the first special gaming state (for example, in a specific gaming state) Small hits RUSH) can be generated. Accordingly, when the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the first special gaming state (big hit state) is drawn so as to be shortened according to the set value, the second special gaming state (small hit state) is likely to occur. The speed of on-hold digestion in the state (for example, the small hit RUSH in the specific game state) is increased, the increase rate of the number of acquired balls in the second special game state (the small hit state) is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the fifteenth embodiment, the control means draws a parameter associated with a distribution table that defines a ratio for distributing the variation pattern of the variation display game executed after the special gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value. . The control means determines the variation pattern of the variation display game to be executed after the special gaming state by lottery based on the distribution table corresponding to the selected parameter. The control means, after a special gaming state (big hit state), when a specific gaming state (probability change state, short time state, general power support state) in which a special gaming state is more likely to occur than the normal state occurs, after the special gaming state In accordance with the number of executions of the variation display game to be executed, a parameter (for example, a variation pattern group number) corresponding to the distribution table is changed so as to switch the distribution table. Therefore, for example, by switching to a distribution table with a short expected value of the variation time according to the number of times of execution of the variation display game, the specific game has a greater influence of the variation time on the increase rate of the number of acquired balls than in the normal gaming state In the state, the increase rate of the number of acquired balls can be greatly improved.

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
The sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 166. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The sixteenth embodiment relates to changing the effect pattern (effect mode) in accordance with the set value (setting) described above. In particular, in the sixteenth embodiment, even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined effect is varied for each setting value of the plurality of setting values. As will be described later, the predetermined effects include a normal notice, a reach effect, a look-ahead effect, a special number notification effect of a lucky number notification effect, a character effect, a background effect, and the like. The appearance rate of the effect may be a probability (appearance probability) that the effect appears per one special figure variation display game, or the appearance of the effect per unit time (for example, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day). It may be the number of times (appearance speed).

[Game board]
FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The gaming board 30 according to the sixteenth embodiment is obtained by adding a lucky number display device 82 to the gaming board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment. The lucky number display device 82 is controlled by the effect control device 300, and performs a lucky number notification effect that notifies the numbers (lucky numbers, here 1 to 9) selected by lottery when a big hit occurs. The lucky number display device 82 may be controlled by the effect control device 300 so as to continuously notify the selected number (lucky number) when a big hit occurs until the next big hit occurs.

Further, in the lucky number display device 82, when a special number notification effect (special notification effect) for notifying a specific number (for example, 3, 7) out of the lucky numbers (1 to 9) appears, a game hall (game) A privilege is given to the player from the staff of the store) or the manager. Benefits include the right not to exchange prizes for acquired game balls for each big hit, points that can be used at the game hall, and the like. Thereby, a player comes to pay attention to the number (display content) of the lucky number display device 82, and the interest of the game is improved.

In FIG. 152, the position of the lucky number display device 82 is on the lower right side of the game board 30 and on the lower side of the special variation winning device 39, but is not limited thereto. As shown in FIG. 152, when the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposite to) the special variable winning device 39, the special variable winning device 39 is caused by the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 and the big hit.
The player can visually recognize that the game is in the open state continuously or simultaneously, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 152, when the lucky number display device 82 is provided adjacent to (opposite) the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50,
The special figure fluctuation display game in the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 and the light emission of the lucky number display device 82 can be viewed in a continuous or simultaneous manner, and the fun of the game is improved. To do.

In the present embodiment, the lucky number display device 82 includes LEs corresponding to the numbers 1-9.
LED with D lamp as light emitting part, LED corresponding to the number selected from numbers 1-9
The lamp is turned on or blinked to notify the player of the selected number. For example, when the number 3 is selected, the number 3 LED lamp of the lucky number display device 82 emits light.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting section is an LED lamp that illuminates the numbers written on the surface cover and represented as forms from the back by the light of the light emitting member (LED). ) Is provided. However, the lucky number display device 82 may be one 7-segment lamp or one liquid crystal display device (the display device 41 can also be used) that displays selected numbers by lighting or blinking.

[Hit probability and production pattern]
FIG. 153 is a table illustrating the big hit probability and the effect pattern with respect to each setting (each setting value). The jackpot probability, which is the probability that a jackpot will occur in the special figure variation display game, is the same in settings 1, 2, and 3, and is the same in settings 4, 5, and 6. Settings 4, 5, 6
The jackpot probability of is higher than the jackpot probabilities of settings 1, 2, and 3. Even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values (1, 2, 3 or 4, 5, 6), the effect control device 300 generates an effect pattern for each setting value of the plurality of setting values. Make it different. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern is a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, pre-read effect, special number notification effect,
Character appearance, background effect, etc.).

In settings 1, 2, and 3 of the same jackpot probability, setting 1 is effect pattern 1 and setting 2
Is the production pattern 2, the setting 3 is the production pattern 3, and is different for each set value. In the same jackpot probability settings 4, 5, and 6, the setting pattern 4 is the effect pattern 1, the setting 5 is the effect pattern 2, the setting 6 is the effect pattern 3, and the effect pattern is different for each set value.

FIGS. 154A and 154B show another example of the jackpot probability and the effect pattern according to the set value. In FIG. 154 (A), in settings 1 and 2 of the same big hit probability, setting 1 is effect pattern 1 and setting 2 is effect pattern 2, and the effect pattern differs for each set value. In the same jackpot probability settings 3, 4, the setting 3 is the effect pattern 1, the setting 4 is the effect pattern 2, and the effect pattern is different for each set value. Same jackpot probability setting 5
6, the setting pattern 5 is the effect pattern 1, the setting 6 is the effect pattern 2, and the effect pattern is different for each set value. In FIG. 154 (B), the same jackpot probability setting 1
2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, setting 1 is effect pattern 1, setting 2 is effect pattern 2, setting 3 is effect pattern 3, setting 4 is effect pattern 4, setting 5 Is the production pattern 5, the setting 6 is the production pattern 6, and the production pattern is different for each set value.

As described above, even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of setting values and there is no difference in the number of acquired balls (setting difference) due to the setting value, the player can change the effect pattern difference ( It is possible to select a gaming machine that can be expected to have a large difference in performance. And the operation of the gaming machine is improved in the game hall.

Further, for example, in the production pattern 1, as a predetermined production, the appearance rate of the character production by the character A (for example, Tadama) and the background production (for example, New Year) that matches the character A (
(Selection rate) is set to 100%, the character effect by character B (for example, Santa Claus) and the appearance rate (selection rate) of the background effect (for example, Christmas) that matches character B are set to 0%. Character production by character A and character A
Can be set to 0%, and the appearance ratio of the character effect by the character B and the background effect suitable to the character B can be set to 100%. In this way,
The atmosphere of the effect of the gaming machine can be changed extremely according to the setting value, it can give the impression of being a different gaming machine, and the type of gaming machine installed in the game hall can be increased apparently it can.

Note that the character effect may be an effect of displaying the character on the display device 41, an effect of making the decoration identification symbol include the character, an effect of operating a movable accessory imitating the character, or the like. The background effect is an effect of displaying the background on the display device 41.

[Variation production setting processing]
Referring to FIG. 155, the variation effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 43) according to the sixteenth embodiment.
Details will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 44 are denoted by the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 155 corresponding to steps B2002 and B2004 in FIG.
In steps B2002a and B2004a, the first half notice allocation group address table is set independently of the set value. Therefore, the lottery for the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (selection rate, notice appearance rate) does not depend on the set value.

In step B2007a, the production control device 300 determines the number of production points,
A second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode, and symbol type is set. Note that, in order to simplify the explanation, unlike the step B2007 of FIG. 44, the second half notice allocation group address table does not depend on the set value. Next, the address of the latter half notice group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command is acquired (B20).
08).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 executes the second half notice distribution group table change process that can change the second half notice distribution group table by changing the address acquired in step B2008 (B2008a). Note that changing the second half notice allocation group table is synonymous with changing the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, based on the changed second half notice allocation group table (which may not be changed), a lottery for the second half notice, which is a notice that appears during the second half change (during reach), is performed (B2009).

Further, after step B2018, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game started by the variation command (variation command) received this time is a big hit (B2019). Whether or not it is a big hit is known from the symbol type (B1802). When the decoration special figure variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B2019 is “N”), the variation effect setting processing is ended.

The effect control device 300 sets the lucky number distribution table according to the set value and the previous lucky number (B2020) when the decoration special figure variation display game is a big hit (the result of B2019 is “Y”). Lucky number assignment table that has been set (see FIG. 161)
Based on the above, the lucky number is randomly selected from the numerical values 1 to 9 (B2021). The previous lucky number is the lucky number selected at the time of the last big hit. Thereafter, notification setting for notifying the lucky number selected by the lottery to the lucky number display device 82 is performed (B2022). The setting value included in the setting value information command is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM in the setting value reception process (B1324).

Thereby, the lucky number notification effect is executed. Here, as a notification setting, the LED lamps of the numbers of the lucky number display device 82 are turned on cyclically during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game (or the lucky number in the case of one 7-segment lamp). The lucky number from 1 to 9 may be displayed cyclically on the display device 82), and the lucky number selected immediately before the end of the special figure variation display game may be notified to the lucky number display device 82.

A configuration in which the process of steps B2019-B2022 is executed when the symbol stop command is normally received (when the result of B1329 in FIG. 39 is “Y” and the result of B1330 is “Y”) is also possible. is there. In this configuration, the lucky number display device 82 is notified of the selected lucky number when the ornament identification symbol is stopped.

Further, the processing of steps B2019-B2022 is the fanfare effect setting processing (B2
The configuration executed in step 102) is also possible. In this configuration, the selected lucky number is notified to the lucky number display device 82 as part of the fanfare effect.

Furthermore, the process of step B2019-B2022 is a stop symbol setting process (B2012).
A configuration implemented in is also possible. In this configuration, the display device 41 is used as the lucky number display device 82, and the jackpot stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game becomes the number of the selected lucky number. That is, corresponding to each of the lucky numbers 1 to 9, the big hit stop symbols are “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2”... “9, 9, 9”. In other words, the number of the big hit stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is used as the lucky number.

[Second half notice allocation group table change processing]
With reference to FIG. 156, the latter half notice allocation group table change processing (
Details of B2008a) in FIG. 155 will be described. FIG. 156A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter-half notice allocation group table change process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 156B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A), and is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half notice grouping group table changing process executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 156A, the production control device 300 first executes a branch process according to the set value (B5201).

When the set value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 does not do anything and ends the latter half notice group group changing process, and the latter half notice group group set by the address in step B2008 is not changed. .

FIG. 157 (A) illustrates a normal second half notice allocation group table that is not changed. In addition, the second half notice (appears during the reach) that pushes down the button operation system, the object action system notice, the object light emitting system notice, and the group notice in the order of the bottom of the table and gives the player a lively impression and expectation. Notice).

When the set value is 2 or 5, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or time timer) is within a predetermined period (B52).
02). The predetermined period may be a period periodically set every hour (for example, 5 minutes every hour) or a specific period of the day (for example, a period from 2 pm to 2:30 pm) But you can. If the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5202 is “N”), the second half notice distribution group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period (B5
If the result of 202 is “Y”), the latter half of the notice distribution group table (address change) referred to in the subsequent step B2009 is changed (B5203), and the latter notice distribution group table change process is terminated.

FIG. 157 (B) exemplifies the latter half notice allocation group table when the set value is 2 or 5 and there is a change. In FIG. 157 (B), the normal case of FIG. 157 (A) (setting value is 1).
(In the case of 4), the lively second half of the notice below the table (the notice that appears during the reach)
The selectivity (ratio) of increases. In addition, the selection rate without notice is reduced as compared with the normal case. Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, the advance notice during reach makes the player have high expectation within a predetermined period, so that the player is not bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether the customer is currently waiting (i.e., when a variable command is received) (B5204). If the customer waiting demo command is received and the customer waiting demo is being executed on the display device 41, it can be determined that the customer is waiting. If the customer is not waiting (the result of B5204 is “N”), the second half notice group group change process is terminated without doing anything. If the customer is waiting (the result of B5204 is “Y”), the latter half notice distribution group table (address change) referred to in the subsequent step B2009 is changed (B5205), and the latter half notice distribution group table. End the change process.

FIG. 157 (C) exemplifies the latter half notice allocation group table when the set value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In FIG. 157 (C), the normal case of FIG. 157 (A) (setting value is 1).
Or in the case of 4) or when the setting value is changed in 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 157 (B),
The selection rate of the lively second half notice (the notice that appears during the reach) below the table further increases. In addition, the selection rate without notice is further reduced. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the notice during the first reach immediately after the end of waiting for customers becomes lively and makes the player have high expectations, so that the player tends to continue the game after that. Become stronger.

As described above, the production pattern as the appearance mode of the notice (predetermined production) that appears during the latter half of the fluctuation corresponds to FIG. 153, with the setting value 1 or 4, the production pattern 1, and the setting value 2 or 5. The production pattern 2 becomes the production pattern 3 when the set value is 3 or 6.

FIG. 156B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half notice allocation group table change process. In FIG. 156B, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents as in FIG. 156A.

In FIG. 156B, the production control device 300 first executes a branch process according to the set value (B5201).

When the set value is 1, 3, or 5, the production control device 300 does not do anything and ends the latter half notice group group change process, and the latter half notice group group table set by the address in step B2008 is Not changed.

When the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the production control device 300 determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5202a).
). When the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5202a is “N”)
Then, the second half notice allocation group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period or the customer is currently waiting (the result of B5202a is “Y”), the subsequent step B20
Change (address change) the latter half notice allocation group table referenced in 09 (B5
203), the second half notice allocation group table change processing is terminated.

FIG. 157 shows the second half notice allocation group table when there is a change in the setting values 2, 4, and 6.
It may be the same as (B), and the selection rate of the second half notice that brings the expectation on the lower side of the table is higher than in the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5). In addition, the selection rate without notice is reduced as compared with the normal case.

As shown in FIGS. 156A and 156B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) has a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values, or In the case of waiting for customers), change the second half notice group table according to the set value, and set the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) that appears during the second half change for each set value To do. For this reason, the notice that appears during the latter half of the fluctuation for the specific set value can be made intense or lively only under a predetermined condition.

In FIGS. 156A and 156B, step B5202 (B5202a) and step B5 are performed.
204 is omitted, the second half notice group table is changed according to the set value regardless of the predetermined condition, and the appearance rate of the notice (predetermined effect) appearing during the second half change is always set for each set value. It is also possible to configure different settings.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Referring to FIG. 158, the look-ahead variation command processing (B1 in FIG. 38) according to the sixteenth embodiment.
216) will be described in detail. FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by the effect control device 300. Note that FIG. 158 is similar to FIG.
Step B1711a is only added to 1, and the same step number is assigned to the process having the same contents as in FIG.

The effect control device 300 loads pre-read target hold information from the pre-reading variation command area in step B 1711, and then executes pre-read effect distribution table setting processing for setting a pre-read effect distribution table for each set value (B 1711 a). Thereafter, a prefetch lottery process for lottery of a prefetch effect based on the set prefetch effect distribution table and the hold information to be prefetched is executed (B1712).

[Pre-reading effect distribution table setting process]
Referring to FIG. 159, the prefetch effect distribution table setting process (FIG. 15) according to the sixteenth embodiment.
No. 8 B1711a) will be described in detail. FIG. 159A corresponds to FIG. 153, and is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch effect distribution table setting processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 159B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A), and is another example of a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch effect distribution table setting processing executed by the effect control device 300.

In FIG. 159A, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal prefetch effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes a branch process according to the set value (B5402).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the effect control device 300 does nothing and ends the prefetch effect distribution table setting process, and the prefetch effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

FIG. 160 (A) exemplifies a normal prefetch effect distribution table that is not changed. Note that FIG.
In 60, the prefetch effect distribution table regarding a pending change notice is illustrated. Hold (start memory)
The display mode of the hold display (start-up storage display) displayed on the display device 41 or the like corresponding to is lottery with a different distribution rate (selection rate) depending on whether the pre-read target hold is a big hit or not. . The display mode of the hold display is more likely to be selected in the case of big hit in the order of white (normal mode), blue (first color change mode), red (second color change mode), and less likely to be selected in the event of a loss. The degree of expectation of jackpot increases in this order.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC 338 or time timer) is within a predetermined period (B54).
03). The predetermined period may be a period periodically provided every hour or a specific period of the day. If the time is not within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is “N”), the prefetch effect distribution table is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period (the result of B5403 is “Y”), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to in the subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404), and the prefetch effect distribution table is changed. finish.

FIG. 160B illustrates a prefetch effect distribution table when the setting value is 2 or 5 and there is a change. In FIG. 160 (B), the normal case of FIG. 160 (A) (set value is 1 or 4).
), The distribution rate (selection rate) of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with a high expectation level of the jackpot on the lower side of the table is increased. Here, in particular, when the pre-read target hold occurs more frequently than the big hit, the selection rate of the hold display having a higher expectation than the normal mode increases.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, more pending change notices to a display mode with a high expectation occur than usual within a predetermined period, and the player has high expectations, so that the player is not bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the effect control device 300 determines whether the customer is currently waiting (that is, when a variable command is received) (B5405). If you are not waiting for customers (
If the result of B5405 is “N”), the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is terminated without doing anything. If the customer is waiting (the result of B5405 is “Y”), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to in the subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5406), and the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is performed. finish.

FIG. 160C illustrates a prefetch effect distribution table when the setting value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In FIG. 160C, the normal case of FIG. 160A (the set value is 1 or 4).
) And the selection rate of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with a high expectation degree of jackpot on the lower side of the table than when the setting value is changed to 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 160 (B) Increases further. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the pre-reading effect immediately after the end of the customer waiting is particularly lively and makes the player have high expectations, so that the player is more likely to continue playing the game thereafter.

Thus, the effect pattern as an appearance mode of the prefetch effect (predetermined effect) is shown in FIG.
Corresponding to the effect pattern 1 when the set value is 1 or 4, effect pattern 2 when the set value is 2 or 5,
When the set value is 3 or 6, the production pattern 3 is obtained.

FIG. 159B is another example of the flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch effect distribution table setting process. Note that in FIG. 159B, the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same contents as in FIG. 159A.

In FIG. 159B, the effect control device 300 first sets a normal prefetch effect distribution table (B5401), and then executes a branch process according to the set value (B5402).

When the set values are 1, 3, and 5, the effect control device 300 does nothing and ends the prefetch effect distribution table setting process, and the prefetch effect distribution table set in step B5401 is not changed.

When the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the production control device 300 determines whether the time measured by the time measuring means is within a predetermined period or is currently waiting for a customer (B5403a).
). When the time is not within the predetermined period and the customer is not waiting (the result of B5403a is “N”)
Then, the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is terminated without doing anything. When the time is within the predetermined period or waiting for the current customer (the result of B5403a is “Y”), the prefetch effect distribution table referred to in the subsequent step B1712 is changed from the normal one (B5404). Then, the prefetch effect distribution table setting process is terminated.

The pre-reading effect distribution table when there is a change in the setting values 2, 4, and 6 is shown in FIG. 160 (B).
The selection rate of the hold display (red hold, blue hold) with high expectation below the table is higher than in the normal case (when the set values are 1, 3, and 5).

As shown in FIGS. 159A and 159B, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) is in a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values, or In the case of waiting for a customer), the pre-reading effect distribution table is changed according to the set value, and the appearance rate of the pending change notice as the pre-reading effect (predetermined effect) is set differently for each set value. . For this reason, the pre-reading effect can be intensified or lively with respect to a specific set value only under predetermined conditions.

In FIGS. 159A and 159B, Step B5403 (B5403a) and Step B5
A configuration in which 405 is omitted, and the prefetch effect distribution table is changed according to the set value regardless of the predetermined condition, and the appearance rate of the prefetch effect (holding change notice) is always set differently for each set value. Is also possible.

[Lucky number distribution table]
FIG. 161 shows a lucky number distribution table set in step B2020 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 155).

The lucky number distribution table I in FIG. 161 (A) is normally used, and the distribution (selection rate) of each lucky number is the same. In the lucky number distribution table II of FIG. 161 (B), the distribution (selection rate) of the predetermined numbers (4, 9) is lower than the other numbers. In the lucky number distribution table III in FIG. 161 (C), the distribution of specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given is higher than other numbers. In the lucky number distribution table IV of FIG. 161 (D), specific numbers (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given.
The distribution of is lower than other numbers and is zero.

[Change pattern of lucky number distribution table]
FIG. 162 shows a change pattern of the lucky number distribution table (B2020) set corresponding to the set value and the previous lucky number when a big hit occurs.

When the set value is 1 or 4, the lucky number distribution table I is always set without changing the lucky number distribution table, and the lucky number effect pattern which is the appearance mode of the lucky number is the production pattern 1 It becomes.

When the set value is 2 or 5, if the previous lucky number (selected at the time of the previous big hit) is a specific number (for example, 3, 7), the lucky number distribution table is from normal I Change to II, then return from II to I (I → II → I change pattern)
. Thereby, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given is selected as the lucky number, a predetermined number (4, 9) to which the privilege is not temporarily given at the next big hit is selected. It becomes difficult. Therefore, the lottery of the lucky number (appearance rate) is improved and the interest of the game is improved. Thus, when the set value is 2 or 5, the lucky number effect pattern that is the appearance mode of the lucky number is the effect pattern 2.

The normal lucky number distribution table I to the lucky number distribution table II
After being changed to, the lucky number distribution table II may be continuously set not only once but also several times. Further, when a specific number (for example, 3, 7) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from II to I.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number distribution table III in which the distribution of specific numbers (for example, 3 and 7) to which the privilege is given is higher than the other numbers is selected by default.
The last lucky number (selected at the last big hit) is a specific number (eg 3,
7), the lucky number distribution table is changed from III to IV, and then
Return from IV to III (change pattern of III → IV → III). Thereby, once a specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which a privilege is given is selected as the lucky number, the specific number (for example, 3, 7) to which the privilege is temporarily given at the next big hit Is difficult to select. Therefore, the lottery of the lucky number (appearance rate) is improved and the interest of the game is improved. Thus, when the set value is 3 or 6, the lucky number effect pattern that is the appearance mode of the lucky number is the effect pattern 3.

In addition, after changing from the normal lucky number distribution table III to the lucky number distribution table IV, the lucky number distribution table IV may be set continuously not only once but several times. Further, when a predetermined number (4, 9) is selected, the lucky number distribution table may return from IV to III.

As described above, the effect control device 300 (effect appearance rate setting means) is used when the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a big hit (special result mode) even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values. The appearance rate of the special number notification effect (predetermined effect) for notifying specific numbers (for example, 3 and 7) out of the lucky numbers (1 to 9) is set differently for each set value (see FIG. 161). For this reason, the number of lucky numbers is enhanced and the interest of the game is improved.

[Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment]
A modification of the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. In the present modification, the game control device 100 has an appearance rate (appearance mode) of a predetermined effect according to a set value (setting).
Make them different. Here, the predetermined effect is a reach effect.

[Special figure information setting process]
Referring to FIG. 163, special figure information setting processing (A3404 in FIG. 18, FIG.
A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process executed by the game control apparatus 100 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 19).

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A42).
01), obtaining a variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (A4202).
. Next, the variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable distribution information area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information area. This fluctuation distribution information is a table pointer,
This is used later to select a variation group table (variation pattern group).

With reference to FIG. 164, the variation pattern setting process (A340) according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
6, A3506) will be described in detail. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process executed by the game control device 100 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 18) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 19). The processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 141 are denoted by the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A43).
00). Next, referring to the variation group selection address table, the address of the variation group table (variation pattern group) corresponding to the variation distribution information is acquired, and the variation group table is prepared (A4301a). Thereafter, a change group table change process capable of changing the change group table is executed (A4301b).

Then, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a random number from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (A4302). Then, the 2-byte distribution process is executed with reference to the variation group table prepared in step A4301a or the variation group table changed in step A4301b (A4303).

[Variation group table change processing]
With reference to FIG. 165, the change group table change process according to the modification of the sixteenth embodiment (
Details of A4301b) in FIG. 164 will be described. FIG. 165A corresponds to FIG. 153 and is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change group table change process executed by the game control apparatus 100. FIG. 165B corresponds to FIG. 154 (A),
It is another example of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the change group table change process performed by the game control apparatus.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the set value (A4801).

When the setting value is 1 or 4, the game control apparatus 100 does nothing and ends the change group table change process, and the change group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

FIG. 166 (A) exemplifies a normal variation group table with no change in a case where the special figure variation display game is out of the normal state (normal game state). The variable group table is
A variation pattern group composed of variation patterns of a non-reach system, a normal reach system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system is configured. It should be noted that, in the order of the variation patterns of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system, the variation time becomes longer as it goes to the lower side of the table, and the player is expected to win a big hit. As a result of the 2-byte distribution process (A4303), the variation selection table (variation pattern selection table) of the non-reach system, the normal reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system
Are selected at a predetermined rate. Furthermore, as a result of the sorting process (A4306) using the selected variation selection table, variation numbers (variation pattern numbers) are selected at a predetermined rate.

When the set value is 2 or 5, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games (number of rotations) of the current special figure variation display game is within a predetermined range (A4802). The predetermined range may be a range provided periodically every 300 revolutions (for example, 50 revolutions every 300 revolutions), or a specific rotational speed range within a day (eg, a range from 1000 revolutions to 1100 revolutions). . Note that the number of games of the special figure variation display game may be the number of games since the power-on of the gaming machine 10 or the number of games since the end of the big hit. If the number of games is not within the predetermined range (the result of A4802 is “N”), the change group table change process is terminated without doing anything.
When the number of games is within the predetermined range (the result of A4802 is “Y”), change (address change) of the change group table referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) is performed (A4803), and change The group table change process is terminated.

FIG. 166 (B) shows the change group table when the set value is 2 or 5 and there is a change.
The case where the special figure variation display game is out of play in the normal state (normal game state) is illustrated. In FIG. 166 (B), the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern (long reach) at the lower side of the table is longer than in the normal case of FIG. 166 (A) (when the setting value is 1 or 4). Will increase.
Therefore, when the set value is 2 or 5, a large number of variation patterns (long reach effects) that can be expected by the display device 41 appear with the number of games within a predetermined range, and the player is not bored.

When the set value is 3 or 6, the game control apparatus 100 is currently (that is, at the start of fluctuation),
It is determined whether the customer is waiting (A4804). The gaming control device 100 can determine that the customer is waiting if the customer waiting demo flag (A3210) is set. If the customer is not waiting (the result of A4804 is “N”), the change group table changing process is terminated without doing anything. If the customer is waiting (the result of A4804 is “Y”), the change (address change) of the change group table referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) is performed (
A4805), the change group table changing process is terminated.

FIG. 166 (C) illustrates a variation group table when the setting value is 3 or 6 and there is a change. In FIG. 166 (C), the normal case of FIG. 166 (A) (when the set value is 1 or 4) or the case where the set value is changed to 2 or 5 as shown in FIG. 166 (B). However, the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern (long reach) with a long fluctuation time on the lower side of the table increases. Therefore, when the set value is 3 or 6, the reach effect on the display device 41 immediately after the end of the waiting for the customer is particularly long and lively, and the player has great expectation. Therefore, the player tends to continue the game after that. Becomes stronger.

FIG. 165B is another example of a flowchart showing the procedure of the change group table change process. In FIG. 165B, processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 165A are given the same step numbers.

In FIG. 165A, the game control device 100 first executes a branch process according to the set value (A4801).

If the setting value is 1, 3, or 5, the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the changing group table changing process, and the changing group table set by the address in step A4301a is not changed.

When the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of games of the special figure variation display game is currently within a predetermined range or whether or not the current customer is waiting. Determine (A4
802a). If the number of games is not within the predetermined range and the customer is not waiting (the result of A4802a is “N”), the change group table change process is terminated without doing anything. When the number of games is within a predetermined range or waiting for a customer (the result of A4802a is “Y”), change of the change group table (address change) referred to in the subsequent 2-byte distribution process (A4303) (A4803), and the change group table change process is terminated.

The change group table when the set value is changed to 2, 4, and 6 may be the same as that in FIG. 166 (B), and the table of the table is larger than the normal case (when the set value is 1, 3, and 5). The selectivity (ratio) of the fluctuation pattern (long-time reach) that makes the lower fluctuation time long and has an expectation increases.

As shown in FIGS. 165A and 165B, the game control device 100 (production appearance rate setting means) has a predetermined condition (for example, the number of games in the special figure variation display game) even if the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values. Change the change group table according to the setting value, and change the appearance rate of the change pattern with long change time (long reach) for each set value. Set. For this reason, the player can be greatly expected to win a big hit only under predetermined conditions.

[Operations and effects of the sixteenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner is the special result mode. The gaming machine 10 includes setting changing means (for example, a setting key switch 93 and a setting value changing switch 102) that can change setting values according to settings relating to the game. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 has the same probability of occurrence of a special gaming state among a plurality of setting values, the gaming machine 10 performs a predetermined effect (normal notice, reach effect, There is provided an effect appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for changing the appearance rate of a special number notification effect, a character effect, a background effect, etc. of the pre-reading effect and the lucky number notification effect.

Therefore, even when the jackpot probability is the same among a plurality of set values, and there is no difference in the number of acquired balls (set difference) due to the set value, the player can make a difference in effect pattern (effect difference) due to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to select a gaming machine having a large number of predetermined effects. And the operation of the gaming machine is improved in the game hall (game shop).

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the production appearance rate setting means (game control device 100, production control device 3
00) varies the appearance rate of a predetermined effect for each set value under a predetermined condition (for example, when the time is within a predetermined period or when waiting for a customer). Therefore, the appearance of a predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to a specific set value only under a predetermined condition.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes time measuring means for measuring time. The effect appearance rate setting unit varies the appearance rate of the predetermined effect for each set value when the time measured by the time measuring unit is within a predetermined period. Therefore, when the time is within the predetermined period, the appearance of the predetermined effect can be increased or decreased with respect to the specific set value, and the interest of the game within the predetermined period can be significantly improved. By periodically providing the predetermined period, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, when the variable display game starts while waiting for a customer, the effect appearance rate setting means varies the appearance rate of a predetermined effect related to the variable display game for each set value. Therefore, for a specific set value, the appearance of a lively (flashy) predetermined effect after the end of waiting for a customer can be increased, the player's expectation can be increased, and the operating time of the gaming machine can be increased.

According to the sixteenth embodiment, the effect appearance rate setting means varies the appearance rate of a predetermined effect for each set value when the result mode of the variable display game is a special result mode. Therefore, for a specific set value, an effect related to a special result mode (for example, a jackpot mode) (special number notification effect) or an effect related to a special gaming state (a jackpot state) (fanfare effect, jackpot effect) appears. Can increase the player's expectations and increase the operating time of the gaming machine.

[Seventeenth embodiment]
The seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 189. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments. First
The seventh embodiment relates to a prediction effect using a touch sensor or the like.

[Game board according to the seventeenth embodiment]
First, the game board 30 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment. A character effect unit 40f and a touch sensor 530 are provided in the upper left part of the center case 40 of the game board 30.

The character effect unit 40f is composed of a translucent character member (tiger taro) and a light emitting member provided behind the character member and having an LED capable of emitting an image of the character. In addition, you may make it illuminate a character member with the light emission member provided in the periphery of the character member using a non-light-transmissive character member.

The touch sensor 530 is a sensor that is provided near the center of the character member (for example, the nose portion of the tiger taro) and functions as an operation detection unit that detects the player's operation. In the present embodiment, the touch sensor 530 is an infrared sensor that emits infrared light from the light projecting unit, and the player's operation is performed by detecting the infrared light reflected from the detected object such as the player's hand with the light receiving unit. Can be detected.

The touch sensor 530 is a predetermined range of the cover glass 14 (transparent member) of the glass frame 15 (
An operation in which the player's hand approaches the detection range) can be detected. The touch sensor 530 is referred to as a “touch sensor” in the sense that it detects an operation of the player trying to touch the cover glass 14, but the operation can be detected even if the player does not necessarily touch the cover glass 14. Instead of the touch sensor 530 of the infrared sensor, a touch panel may be provided on the cover glass 14 to detect that the hand actually touches the cover glass 14. Further, instead of the touch sensor 530, a touch switch of the operation handle 24 may be used.

Note that the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be caused to emit light when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation or when the player's operation can be detected. Further, in this case, the light emission degree of the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f can be changed between when the player's operation is detected and when the operation can be detected (for example, when the detection is possible, the light is dimmed dimly). And light up brightly when an operation is detected).

In order to reduce the manufacturing cost, instead of providing the character effect unit 40f,
When the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation, the character image of the character effect unit 40f may appear and be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Production control device according to the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, a configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment.

In the presentation control apparatus 300 of the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG.
A signal from 0 is also input to the SW input circuit 366. Character production unit 40f
The light emitting member is controlled to emit light as part of the board decoration device 46 by receiving a signal from the board decoration LED control circuit 332 of the effect control device 300.

[Main Processing According to Seventeenth Embodiment]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing of the effect control device 300 according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The main processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 36), but FIG.
After the effect button input process (B0010), the touch sensor input process (B560)
0) and the touch game process (B5601) are executed, and then the process proceeds to the hall / player setting mode process (B0011). The touch game is a game played when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation.

[Touch sensor input processing]
170, details of the touch sensor input process (B5600) in the main process (FIG. 169) described above will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a procedure of touch sensor input processing according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an input to the touch sensor 530 (B5601). When there is no input to the touch sensor 530, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B5601 is “N”), and the touch sensor input process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is an input to the touch sensor 530, the effect control device 300 (B5
If the result of 601 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B5602 and it is determined whether or not the touch game is in progress (B5602). The touch game period includes a period in which the player's handle operation is unnecessary, for example, when waiting for a customer or when the start-up memory is held to the upper limit, that is, a period in which the player's handle operation is relatively difficult to perform. Is set. Note that a predetermined period during reach in the variable display game may also be set as the touch game period. When the effect control apparatus 300 determines that the touch game period is in progress (the result of B5602 is “Y”).
), The touch sensor input process is terminated.

When it is determined that the touch game period is not in effect (the result of B5602 is “N”), the effect control device 300 proceeds to the process of step B5603 and determines whether or not the identification information is fluctuating (during special figure fluctuation). Determine (B5603). For example, it is determined that there is a fluctuation from the time when the variable command (B1206) is received until the symbol stop command (B1329) is received. When it is determined that the identification information is not changing (the result of B5603 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the touch sensor input process.

When it is determined that the identification information is changing (result of B5603 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 proceeds to the process of step B5604 and executes the predictive effect process (B5604).
. The predictive effect process is a process for executing a predictive effect that predicts and notifies the contents of a predetermined effect in advance, and functions as a predictive effect executing means. The prediction effect is executed in response to the input to the touch sensor 530. Then, the affection level notification effect process (B5
605), it is determined whether or not there is an effect that overlaps with the previously set effect (the effect set in the change effect setting process) (B5606). When there is no effect overlapping with the previously set effect (the result of B5606 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the touch sensor input process.

In the case where there is an effect that overlaps the effect set previously, the effect control device 300 (B560)
6 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step B5607, the prediction effect or the affection notification effect overlapping with the previously set effect is stopped (B5607), and then the effect control device 300 performs the touch sensor input process. Exit.

[Prediction effect processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 171 and 172, the touch sensor input process described above (FIG. 170).
Details of the prediction effect process (B5604) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the prediction effect processing according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the prediction effect processing.

By the predictive effect process, the predictive effects such as one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, and continuous suggestion notification effect described later are executed. Note that the change content notification effect and the continuation suggestion notification effect predict and notify the content of the effect related to the special figure change display game being executed, and may be referred to as a first prediction effect. The one-shot notification effect, the hold content notification effect, and the SP reach content notification effect predict the content of the effect that appears in at least one of the plurality of variable display games based on the determination result (prefetch result) of the prior determination means. This is a notification and may be referred to as a second prediction effect.

For example, in the first predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) performs the notice effect or the variable effect set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182 described later) at the start of the change of the variable display game being executed. Based on the information (including the performance execution timing), these predetermined effects (notice effect and variable effect) executed in the running variation display game are predicted and notified before execution. For example, in the second predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) is executed in the variable display game based on the prefetch effect information set in the prefetch variable command processing (FIG. 181 described later). A predetermined effect (prefetch effect) is predicted and notified.

First, the production control device 300 determines whether or not there is a single notification flag (B5701).
). The single notification flag is a flag set in the process of step B5709 described later.
When there is a single notification flag (result of B5701 is “Y”), the production control device 300
The processing moves to step B5711.

If there is no one notification flag (the result of B5701 is “N”), the production control device 3
In 00, branch determination based on the degree of love (operation value) is performed (B5702), and one-notification lottery corresponding to the value of love degree is executed (B5703 to B5707). The degree of affection is a value that is increased or decreased by a degree of affection notification effect process (FIG. 173) described later, and is calculated by the effect control means 300 as a value that changes in response to the touch sensor 530 detecting a player's operation. The degree of affection is displayed as an integer from 0 to 100%, for example. Note that the degree of affection may be displayed in a range other than 0 to 100%, or may be displayed other than an integer. In this way, the production control means 30
0 functions as a love degree calculation means (operation value calculation means) for calculating a love degree (operation value).

The production control device 300 performs one announcement lottery for 0-20% when the love degree is 0-20% (B5703), and one announcement lottery for 21-40% when the degree of love is 21-40%. (B5704
) In the case of 41-60%, a one-notification lottery for 41-60% (B5705), 61-8
In the case of 0%, a single announcement lottery for 61-80% is performed (B5706), and in the case of 81-100%, a single announcement lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5707). The details of the winning rate a% (execution rate) of the one notification lottery according to each degree of love are described later with reference to FIG. 174A (a). After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the winner has been won in the single announcement lottery, that is, whether or not there is one announcement (B5708).

When there is a single notification (the result of B5708 is “Y”), the production control device 300 executes a single-announcement production informing that there is a big hit hold and sets a single announcement flag. (B5709). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no single notification (the result of B5708 is “N”), the production control device 300
Shifts the processing to step B5711, and determines whether or not there is a pending content notification flag (
B5711). When there is a pending content notification flag, the production control device 300 (B5711).
Is "Y"), the process proceeds to step B5721.

If there is no pending content notification flag (result of B5711 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of love (operation value) (B5712), and the hold according to the value of the degree of love. A content announcement lottery is executed (B5713 to B5717).

The production control device 300 performs a hold content notification lottery for 0-20% when the degree of love is 0-20% (B5713), and a hold content notification lottery for 21-40% when the degree of love is 21-40%. (B
5714) In the case of 41-60%, a hold content notice lottery for 41-60% (B5715)
), In the case of 61 to 80%, the reserved content announcement lottery for 61-80% (B5716), 81
In the case of ˜100%, the reserved content announcement lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5717). Details of the winning rate b% (execution rate) of the pending content notification lottery according to each degree of love are shown in FIG. 174A (b).
Will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the winning content notification lottery has been won, that is, whether or not there is a holding content notification (B5718).

When there is a pending content notification (the result of B5718 is “Y”), the production control device 300
A hold content notification effect for notifying the hold content is executed and a hold content notification flag is set (B5719). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no pending content notification (result of B5718 is “N”), the production control device 3
In 00, the process proceeds to step B5721, and it is determined whether there is an SP reach content notification flag (B5721). When there is an SP reach content notification flag (the result of B5721 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 shifts the process to step B5731.

Further, the production control device 300 does not have the SP reach content notification flag (B5721).
The result is “N”), branch determination based on the degree of love (operation value) is performed (B5722), and the SP reach content notification lottery corresponding to the value of love degree is executed (B5723 to B5727).

The production control device 300 performs the SP reach content announcement lottery for 0-20% when the degree of love is 0-20% (B5723), and the SP reach content for 21-40% when the degree is 21-40%. The notice lottery (B5724), 41-60%, 41-60% SP reach content announcement lottery (B5725), 61-80%, SP reach content announcement lottery 61-80% (B5726), in the case of 81-100%, SP reach content announcement lottery for 81-100% (B5727) is performed. Win rate c% of SP reach contents announcement lottery according to each degree of love (
Details of the execution ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 174A (c). Thereafter, the production control device 30
0 determines whether or not the SP reach content announcement lottery is won, that is, whether or not there is an SP reach content announcement (B5728).

When there is an SP reach content notification (result of B5728 is “Y”), the production control device 30
0 executes the SP reach content notification effect for notifying the content of SP reach and sets the SP reach content notification flag (B5729). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no SP reach content notification (result of B5728 is “N”), the production control device 300 shifts the process to step B5731 and determines whether or not there is a variation content notification flag (B5731). ). When there is a change content notification flag, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B5731 is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step B5741 (FIG. 172).

In addition, when there is no change content notification flag (result of B5731 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs branch determination based on the love degree (operation value) (B5732), and changes according to the value of the love degree. A content announcement lottery is executed (B5733 to B5737).

The production control device 300 performs a variation content notification lottery for 0-20% when the degree of affection is 0-20% (B5733), and a variation content notification lottery for 21-40% when the degree of love is 21-40%. (B
5734) In the case of 41 to 60%, a variation content notice lottery for 41-60% is selected (B5735).
), In the case of 61-80%, change content notification lottery for 61-80% (B5736), 81
In the case of ˜100%, a variation content notification lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5737). FIG. 174B (a) shows details of the winning rate d% (execution rate) of the variation content notification lottery according to each degree of love.
Will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the winner is won by the variation content notification lottery, that is, whether or not there is a variation content notification (B5738).

When there is a change content notification (the result of B5738 is “Y”), the production control device 300
A variation content notification effect for notifying the content of the special figure variation display game currently being executed is executed and a variation content notification flag is set (B5739). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no change content notification (result of B5738 is “N”), the production control device 3
In 00, the process proceeds to step B5741 (FIG. 172), and it is determined whether or not there is a continuation suggestion notification flag (B5741). When there is a continuation suggestion notification flag (result of B5741 is “Y”), the performance control device 300 shifts the process to step B5751.

In addition, when there is no continuation suggestion notification flag (result of B5741 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of affection (operation value) (B5742), and continues according to the value of degree of affection A suggestion lottery is executed (B5743 to B5747).

The production control device 300 performs a continuation suggestion lottery for 0-20% when the degree of affection is 0-20% (B5743), and a continuation suggestion lottery for 21-40% when the degree of love is 21-40%. (B
5744) In the case of 41 to 60%, a continuous suggestion notice lottery for 41-60% (B5745)
), In the case of 61 to 80%, the continuous suggestion notice lottery for 61-80% (B5746), 81
In the case of -100%, a continuous suggestion notice lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5747). Details of the winning rate e% (execution rate) of the continuous suggestion notification lottery according to each degree of love are shown in FIG. 174B (b).
Will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the winning is in the continuation suggestion lottery, that is, whether or not there is a continuation suggestion notification (B5748).

When there is a continuation suggestion notification (result of B5748 is “Y”), the production control device 300
A continuation suggestion notification effect for notifying the continuation of the variation of the currently displayed special figure variation display game is executed and a continuation suggestion notification flag is set (B5749). Thereafter, the production control device 300
The prediction effect process ends.

On the other hand, when there is no continuation suggestion notification (result of B5748 is “N”), the production control device 3
In 00, the process proceeds to step B5751, and it is determined whether there is a setting suggestion notification flag (B5751). When there is a setting suggestion notification flag, the effect control device 300 (B57
51 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B5762.

In addition, when there is no setting suggestion notification flag (the result of B5751 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs branch determination based on the degree of love (operation value) (B5752), and the setting according to the value of the degree of love The suggestion notice lottery is executed (B5753 to B5757).

The production control device 300 performs setting suggestion notice lottery for 0-20% when the degree of affection is 0-20% (B5743), and setting suggestion notice lottery for 21-40% when the degree of love is 21-40%. (B
5744) In the case of 41-60%, the setting suggestion notice lottery for 41-60% is selected (B5745).
), In the case of 61-80%, the setting suggestion notice lottery for 61-80% is (B5746), 81
In the case of -100%, a setting suggestion notice lottery for 81-100% is performed (B5747). FIG. 174B (c) shows details of the winning rate f% (execution rate) of the setting suggestion notification lottery according to each degree of love.
Will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the winning in the setting suggestion notice lottery is made, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion notice (B5758).

When there is a setting suggestion notification (result of B5758 is “Y”), the production control device 300
A setting suggestion notification effect for suggesting setting (setting value) is executed and a setting suggestion notification flag is set (B5759). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no setting suggestion notification (result of B5758 is “N”), the production control device 3
00 shifts the process to step B5762, and performs branch determination based on the degree of love (operation value) (
B5762), a line lottery corresponding to the value of the degree of love is executed (B5763 to B5767).

The production control device 300 draws a line drawing for 0-20% when the degree of love is 0-20% (
(B5763) In the case of 21-40%, the line drawing for 21-40% (B5764),
If it is 41-60%, the line drawing for 41-60% (B5765), if it is 61-80%, the line drawing for 61-80% (B5766), if it is 81-100% 81
-A 100% line drawing (B5767) is performed. Details of the winning rate g% (execution rate) of the line lottery according to each degree of affection will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the production control device 30
0 is determined whether or not winning is made in the line drawing, that is, whether or not there is a line (B5768).
. In this embodiment, since the winning rate g% is determined so that any line is always won, it is always determined that there is a line (the result of B5768 is “Y”). .

When there is a line (the result of B5768 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes a line effect such as displaying a line or outputting a sound (B5769). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process.

On the other hand, when there is no line (the result of B5768 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the prediction effect process as it is.

[Degree-of-friendliness notification processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the details of the affection level notification effect process (B5605) in the touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) described above will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the affection level notification effect process according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the degree of affection is less than 100% (B59).
01).

When the degree of affection is less than 100%, that is, when the degree of affection is 0 to 99% (the result of B5901 is “Y”), the production control device 300 shifts the process to step B5902 and plays the game condition (
Branch determination is performed based on setting values (settings 1 to 6) relating to (game) (B5902), and a love degree increase value lottery corresponding to the setting values is executed (B5903 to B5908). As described above, the setting value is changed by the operator operating the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 in the setting change mode (setting variable state).

When the set value is set 1, the production control device 300 performs a love degree increase value lottery for the set 1 (B
5903), in the case of setting 2, the love degree increase value lottery for setting 2 (B5904), in the case of setting 3, the love degree increase value lottery for setting 3 (B5905), and in the case of setting 4 A love degree increase value lottery for 4 (B5906), and in the case of setting 5, a love degree increase value lottery for setting 5 (B
5907), in the case of setting 6, the love degree increase value lottery for setting 6 is performed (B5908). The affection degree increase value is a value used to increase the affection degree in the process of step B5909. Details of the win rate h% (execution rate) of the love degree increase value lottery corresponding to each set value will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the production control device 300 calculates a new love degree by adding the love degree increase value won in the love degree increase value lottery to the current love degree (B5909), so that the player can recognize it. After the new degree of affection is notified (B5911), the affection level notification effect process is terminated. The calculated degree of love is stored in a storage unit such as the RAM 322. The mode that can be recognized by the player includes, for example, a mode of displaying on the display screen of the display device 41, a mode of displaying on a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) that can be confirmed by the player, and a mode of notifying by voice It is done.

On the other hand, when the degree of affection is not less than 100%, that is, when the degree of affection has reached the upper limit of 100% (result of B5901 is “N”), the production control device 300 shifts the process to step 5910. Then, the falling lottery is executed (B5910). The falling lottery is a lottery that reduces the degree of love to 50% when winning, and the winning rate is set to 1% (1/100), for example. Thereafter, the production control device 300 informs the degree of love in a manner that the player can recognize (B59).
11) End the affection level notification effect process. Therefore, when winning the falling lottery, the player can confirm the decreased degree of love. In addition, you may perform the effect which alert | reports to a player that it was won by a fall lottery.

In addition, every time there is a touch sensor input without performing the love degree increase value lottery, a predetermined value (for example, 1%)
) Is also possible to increase the degree of love.

[Winning rate of each lottery in predictive effect processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 174A, FIG. 174B and FIG. 175, one-notification notice lottery, hold contents notice lottery, SP reach contents notice lottery, variable contents notice lottery, continuous suggestion notice lottery, setting suggestion notice lottery The details of the winning rate (execution rate) of the line lottery will be described.
FIG. 174A is a diagram illustrating the winning rate of the one-notification lottery, the pending content announcement lottery, and the SP reach content announcement lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment with respect to each degree of love, and FIG. 174B is a variation according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the winning rate of content notice lottery, continuation suggestion notice lottery, and setting suggestion notice lottery with respect to each dear degree. In addition, FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating the winning rate of the line lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment with respect to each degree of love.

[Winning rate of one lottery announcement]
First, with reference to FIG. 174A (a), the winning rate a% of the one-notification lottery will be described.
In the one-shot notice lottery, for example, when there is a hold that becomes a big hit (special result mode) in the stored hold (startup memory) as a winning condition, the winning can be made with one notice and the big win is notified. Notifications can be made. If the winning conditions for winning are not met, or if the winner is not selected in the one notification lottery, there is no one notification (the result of B5708 is “N”), and one notification is not performed. Note that one-shot notification (one-shot notification effect) can be executed by display on the display device 41, sound output from a speaker, operation of an accessory such as the panel decoration device 46 or the panel effect device 44, light emission, or the like.

At that time, the winning rate a% of the one-notification lottery changes according to the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning rate a% with one announcement is, for example, 30% when the degree of love is 0-20%,
40% when the degree of affection is 21-40%, 50% when the degree of affection is 41-60%
When the affection degree is 61 to 80%, it becomes 60%, and when the affection degree is 81% to 100%, it becomes 70%. The winning rate a% is set to 100% so that the presence of one notification that satisfies the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate a% is set to 0 so as not to be notified according to the value of the degree of love.
% May be used.

[Winning rate of pending content announcement lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174A (b), the winning rate b% of the pending content notification lottery will be described. In the on-hold content notification lottery, when the winning conditions of each on-hold content notification (holding content notifications 1 to 5) are satisfied, the on-hold content notification satisfying the winning conditions can be won. In addition, hold contents notice 1
When a plurality of pending content notifications are won among the plurality of pending content notifications, only the pending content notification having the largest number (for example, the suspended content notification 5) is notified. If the winning condition is not satisfied or the winning content is not selected in the lottery for holding content notification, there is no holding content notification (result of B5718 is “N”), and the holding content notification is not performed.

In the hold content notification lottery, for example, as a winning condition, when there is a difference between the color (mode) of the current hold display and the color (mode) of the final hold display in the hold of the target of the pre-reading effect (hold change notice), the hold content notification 1 Will be able to win, and will be able to be notified of “focus on hold”. The current hold display is a hold display at the present time. The final hold display is the final hold display when the hold display changes stepwise from the initial state at the time of the hold in the hold change notice. The color of the hold display can be changed from a low-expected white to a blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, or a high-expected color according to the expected level of the stop display mode of the variable display game. In addition to the case where there is a difference in the colors of the current hold display and the final hold display, the same hold content notification may be performed if there is a difference in the hold display mode such as shape and pattern. In addition, for example, when the current hold display is less than green (for example, white) and the final hold display is more than green, it is possible to win the hold content notification 2 and notify “good hold”, and the current hold display is red. If it is less than (for example, blue) and the final hold display is red, the hold content notification 3 can be won and it can be informed that it is “red hold”. Furthermore, for example, when the current hold display is less than gold (for example, green) and the final hold display is gold, the hold content notification 4 can be won and it can be informed that it is “money hold”, and the current hold display is less than the rainbow ( Eg white)
Thus, when the final hold display is a rainbow, the hold content notification 5 can be won, and it can be informed that “it is intense heat hold”.

At that time, the winning rate b% of the pending content notification lottery changes in accordance with the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning rate b% of the pending content notification 1 is, for example, 20% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 30% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 40% when the love degree is 41 to 60%. When the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, it becomes 50%, and the degree of affection is 81% to 100
When it is%, it becomes 60%.

In addition, the winning rate b% of the pending content notification 2 is, for example, 30% when the degree of love is 0 to 20%.
When the affection degree is 21 to 40%, it becomes 40%, when the affection degree is 41 to 60%, it becomes 50%, when the affection degree is 61 to 80%, it becomes 60%, and the affection degree is 81% to 10%.
When it is 0%, it becomes 70%.

The winning rate b% of the reserved content notification 3 is, for example, 40% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 50% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 60 when the love degree is 41 to 60%.
%, 70% when the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, and 80% when the degree of affection is 81% to 100%.

The winning rate b% of the pending content notification 4 is, for example, 50% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 60% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 70 when the love degree is 41 to 60%.
When the affection degree is 61% to 80%, it becomes 80%, and when the affection degree is 81% to 100%, it becomes 90%.

The winning rate b% of the pending content notification 5 is, for example, 60% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 70% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 80 when the love degree is 41 to 60%.
It becomes 90% when the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, and becomes 99% when the degree of affection is 81% to 100%. It should be noted that the winning rate b% may be set to 100% so that a pending content notification that satisfies the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate b% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified according to the value of the degree of love.

As for the procedure for holding content notification lottery, if the winning condition for holding content notification 1 is satisfied, the lottery for holding content notification 1 is selected. If the winning condition for holding content notification 2 is satisfied, the holding content notification 2 is selected.
If the lottery of the hold content notification 3 is satisfied, the lottery of the hold content notification 3 will be held. If the win condition of the hold content notification 4 is satisfied, the lottery of the hold content notification 4 will be held. Announcement 5
If the winning condition is satisfied, the lottery of the pending content notification 5 is selected as the winning rate b in FIG. 174A (b).
Run in order based on%. Therefore, a plurality of lotteries are performed, and as described above, a plurality of pending content announcements may be won in duplicate.

[Winning rate of SP reach content announcement lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174A (c), the winning ratio c% of the SP reach content announcement lottery will be described. Similar to the above-described hold content announcement lottery, in the SP reach content announcement lottery, when the winning conditions of each SP reach content announcement (SP reach content announcements 1 to 3) are satisfied, the SP reach content announcement satisfying the winning conditions is satisfied. Will be able to win. In addition, when a plurality of SP reach content notifications among the SP reach content notifications 1 to 3 are won, the SP reach content notification having the largest number among the selected SP reach content notifications (for example, the SP reach content notification). Only 3) is notified. If the winning condition is not met or if the SP reach content announcement lottery is not won, the SP reach content is not notified (result of B5728 is “N”), and the SP reach content is not notified.

In the SP reach content announcement lottery, for example, as a winning condition, a character 7 described later in FIG.
If the hold that becomes the reach (for example, SP1 reach) in which 25a (Tiger Tarou) appears is in the stored hold (starting memory), the SP reach content announcement 1 can be won and "My turn!" Can be notified. Further, for example, when the hold that becomes the reach (for example, SP2 reach) in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is in the stored hold, S
It becomes possible to win the P-reach content announcement 2 and notify “Tora-mi!”. Further, for example, when the hold that becomes the reach (for example, SP3 reach) in which the character 725c (girl) appears is within the stored hold, the SP reach content announcement 3 can be won and can be informed of "Onigiri!" It becomes like this.

At that time, winning rate c% of SP reach contents announcement lottery according to the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions
Will change. The winning percentage c% of the SP reach content announcement 1 is, for example, 40% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 50% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and the love degree is 41 to 60.
% Is 60%, and when the degree of affection is 61-80%, it is 70%, and the degree of affection is 8
When it is 1% to 100%, it becomes 80%.

In addition, the winning percentage c% of the SP reach content announcement 2 is, for example, 50% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 60% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and the love degree is 41 to 60%. Sometimes it is 70%, and when the degree of affection is 61-80%, it becomes 80%, and the degree of affection is 81%.
When it is -100%, it becomes 90%.

The winning percentage c% of SP Reach Content Notification 3 is, for example, 60% when the degree of love is 0-20%
When the affection degree is 21 to 40%, it becomes 70%, when the affection degree is 41 to 60%, it becomes 80%, when the affection degree is 61 to 80%, it becomes 90%, and the affection degree is 81% to 10%.
When it is 0%, it becomes 99%. Note that the winning rate c% may be set to 100% so that the SP reach content notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified, or the winning rate c% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified according to the value of the degree of love. .

[Winning rate of lottery for lottery contents announcement]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B (a), the winning rate d% of the change content notification lottery will be described. Similar to the above-mentioned pending content notification lottery, in the variation content notification lottery, if the winning conditions of each variable content notification (variable content notifications 1 to 3) are satisfied, the variable content notification that satisfies the winning conditions can be won. It becomes. In addition, when a plurality of variation content notifications among the variation content notifications 1 to 3 are selected, only the variation content notification having the largest number (for example, the variation content notification 3) is notified. Is done. If the winning conditions are not met or if the winning lottery is not selected in the variation content notification lottery, there is no variation content notification (result of B5738 is “N”), and the variation content notification is not performed.

The variation content announcement lottery can be elected to the variation content announcement 1 when, for example, as a winning condition, an effect of reach or higher (reach effect of expectation level of normal reach or higher) occurs in the currently running variable display game, “Attention! Can be notified. Further, for example, when a reach production having an expectation level equal to or higher than SP1 reach occurs in the currently running variation display game, the variation content notification 2 can be won and can be notified of “chance!”. Further, for example, when an effect of SP3 reach occurs in the currently running variation display game, the variation content notification 3 can be won and it can be informed that “Intense Reach!”.

At that time, the winning rate d% of the change content notification lottery changes according to the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning percentage d% of the change content notification 1 is, for example, 40% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 50% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 60% when the love degree is 41 to 60%. When the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, it becomes 70%, and the degree of affection is 81% to 100
When it is%, it becomes 80%.

In addition, the winning rate d% of the change content notification 2 is, for example, 50% when the degree of love is 0 to 20%.
When the affection degree is 21 to 40%, it becomes 60%, when the affection degree is 41 to 60%, it becomes 70%, when the affection degree is 61 to 80%, it becomes 80%, and the affection degree is 81% to 10%.
When it is 0%, it becomes 90%.

The winning percentage d% of the change content notification 3 is, for example, 60% when the love degree is 0 to 20%, 70% when the love degree is 21 to 40%, and 80 when the love degree is 41 to 60%.
It becomes 90% when the degree of affection is 61 to 80%, and becomes 99% when the degree of affection is 81% to 100%. Note that the winning rate d% may be set to 100% so that a change content notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified according to the value of the degree of love, or the winning rate d% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified.

[Winning rate of continuous suggestion lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B (b), the winning ratio e% of the continuation suggestion lottery will be described. Similar to the above-mentioned pending content notification lottery, in the continuous suggestion notification lottery, if the winning conditions of each continuous suggestion notification (continuous suggestion notifications 1 and 2) are satisfied, the continuous suggestion notification that satisfies the winning conditions can be won. It becomes. In addition, when both the continuation suggestion notifications 1 and 2 are won simultaneously, only the continuation suggestion notification 2 having a large number is notified. If the winning condition is not met, or if the winning is not selected in the continuation suggestion lottery, there is no continuation suggestion notification (the result of B5748 is “N”), and the continuation suggestion notification is not performed.

The continuation suggestion notice lottery can be elected as the continuation suggestion notice 1 when, for example, as a winning condition, a pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-continuation) occurs in the currently running variable display game or an effect of reach or more occurs. Can you continue? " Further, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production occurs in the currently running variable display game, the continuation suggestion notice 2 can be won and it can be notified that “ready for continuation”.

At that time, the winning rate e% of the continuous suggestion notice lottery changes according to the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning rate e% of the continuation suggestion notification 1 is, for example, 1% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20%, 20% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40%, and 4 when the degree of affection is 41 to 60%.
0%, 60% when the degree of affection is 61-80%, 81% -100%
In this case, it becomes 80%.

In addition, the winning percentage e% of the continuation suggestion notice 2 is, for example, 20% when the degree of love is 0 to 20%.
When the affection degree is 21 to 40%, it becomes 50%, when the affection degree is 41 to 60%, it becomes 70%, when the affection degree is 61 to 80%, it becomes 90%, and the affection degree is 81% to 10%.
When it is 0%, it becomes 99%. Note that the winning rate e% may be set to 100% so that the continuous suggestion notification satisfying the winning condition is always notified according to the value of the degree of love, or the winning rate e% may be set to 0% so as not to be notified.

[Winning rate of setting suggestion lottery]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174B (c), the winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notice lottery will be described. Similar to the above-mentioned pending content notification lottery, in the setting suggestion notification lottery, if the winning conditions of each setting suggestion notification (setting suggestion notifications 1 to 3) are satisfied, the setting suggestion notification satisfying the winning conditions can be won. It becomes. In addition, when a plurality of setting suggestion notifications among the setting suggestion notifications 1 to 3 are won, only the setting suggestion notification having the largest number (for example, the change content notification 3) is notified. Is done.

In the setting suggestion notice lottery, for example, when the set value is set to 3 or more as a winning condition, the setting suggestion notice 1 can be won and it can be informed that “I feel good!”. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to 5 or more, the setting suggestion notification 2 can be won and it can be informed that “That is fine!”. Further, for example, when the set value is set to a value other than setting 1, that is, set to 2 to 6, the setting suggestion notification 3 can be won and it can be notified that “It is not a bad day!”.

At that time, the winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notice lottery changes in accordance with the degree of love after satisfying the winning conditions. The winning rate f% of the setting suggestion notification 1 is, for example, 0.00 when the degree of love is 0 to 20%.
1%, when the degree of affection is 21-40%, it becomes 0.010%, and the degree of affection is 41-60
%, It becomes 0.020%, when the affection degree is 61-80%, it becomes 0.050%, and when the affection degree is 81% -100%, it becomes 0.100%. Also, setting suggestion notices 2, 3
The win rate f% of the same changes in accordance with the degree of love as well as the win rate f% of the setting suggestion notification 1. In addition,
Depending on the value of the degree of affection, the winning rate f% so that the change content notification satisfying the winning condition is not notified
May be 0%.

[Winning rate of line drawing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the winning rate g% of the line lottery for drawing the lines of the line effect will be described. In the line drawing, when the winning conditions of each line (lines 1 to 5) are satisfied, it is possible to win a line that satisfies the winning condition. In the present embodiment, the winning conditions are always (in other words, there are no winning conditions). In the line drawing, each line (
When a range of random values is allocated (assigned) to the lines 1 to 5), and the random number extracted at the time of the line drawing matches the range, the line corresponding to the corresponding range is selected. The In addition, one of the lines (1 to 5) is always won by the line lottery. That is, unlike the above-described reserved content announcement lottery or the like, in the serif lottery, only one lottery is performed, and a plurality of serifs are not won simultaneously.

For example, if you win the line 1, you will be informed that “Do your best”, if you win the line 2, you will be informed that you are cheering, and if you win the line 3, you will be informed that “I'm getting fun”. . Also, for example, when winning the line 4, “Let's work together” is notified, and when winning the line 5, “I am on” is notified.

At that time, the winning rate g% of the line lottery, that is, the distribution of the random number 1-100, changes according to the degree of love. The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 0 to 20% is, for example, 70% for the speech 1 (random value 1-70), 20% for the speech 2 (random value 71-90), and 1 for the speech 3
0% (random number 91-100). In addition, the win rate g% when the degree of love is 0-20%,
0% for lines 4 and 5 (no distribution of random values).

In addition, the win rate g% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40% is, for example, 35% for the speech 1 (random value 1-35), 45% for the speech 2 (random value 36-80), and the speech 3 15%
(Random value 81-95) and 5% in the dialogue 4 (Random value 96-100). In addition, the winning rate g% when the degree of affection is 21 to 40% is 0% in the line 5 (no random value distribution).

The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 41 to 60% is, for example, 20% for the line 1 (random number 1-20), 25% for the line 2 (random number 21-45), and 35 for the line 3 % (Random value 46-80), 15% for line 4 (random value 81-95), 5% for line 5
(Random value 96-100).

The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 61 to 80% is, for example, 5% for the line 1 (random number 1-5), 10% for the line 2 (random number 6-15), and 25 for the line 3 % (Random value 16-40), 35% for line 4 (random value 41-75), and 25% for line 5 (random value 76-100).

The win rate g% when the degree of affection is 81 to 100% is, for example, 5% for the line 1 (random number 1-5), 10% for the line 2 (random number 6-15), and 15 for the line 3 % (Random value 16-30), 20% for line 4 (random number 31-50), and 50% for line 5 (random number 51-100).

In addition, in any range (0-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80)
%, 81-100%), it is always a line 1 in a single line drawing using a random number 1-100
Random values are assigned to each line so that one of ˜5 is won. Therefore, as described above, when the line drawing is performed, there is no case where there is no line (the result of B5768 is always “
Y ”).

Note that the above-described hold content notification, SP reach content notification, variation content notification, continuation suggestion notification, setting suggestion notification, and serif effect (serif notification) can be executed by display on the display device 41, sound output from a speaker, or the like.

[Display screen of display device for SP Reach 1 to 3]
Next, referring to FIG. 176, the winning S in the SP reach content announcement lottery of FIG. 174A (c)
An effect in which a character corresponding to the P-reach content announcement appears during SP reach will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when each character appears in the effect of SP reach according to the seventeenth embodiment. In FIG. 176, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed together with the display screen of the display device 41.

First, FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when an effect in which the character 725a (tiger taro) appears is executed during SP1 reach. After there is a hold to become a reach (for example, SP1 reach) where Toraro appears, after winning SP Reach Content Notification 1 and being informed that "My turn!", SP1 reach in the special figure display game related to this hold Is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the character 725a (tiger taro) that appears together with the letters “SP1 reach!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Fluctuation display game with reach (special map fluctuation display game, decorative special map fluctuation display game)
Since the decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A of the plurality of variable display regions 610 and the decorative first symbol B of the right region 610B are temporarily stopped by displaying the identification information (symbol) of “3”. The decorative first pattern C in the middle region 610C is displayed with a variation “↓”. In addition, the reserved digestion region 640
In the (specific display portion, changing hold display area), a special figure changing hold display 643 (starting memory display, special drawing digest display) corresponding to the running change display game is displayed. In addition, since the identification information is fluctuating (the result of B5603 is “Y”), the touch sensor 530 can detect an input in the prediction effect process (B5604) or the affection degree notification effect process (B5605).
Waiting for player's operation. In addition, the character effect unit 40f includes the touch sensor 53.
When there is no input to 0, the light emitting member is turned off, and when there is an input, the light emitting member is turned on or blinked. Note that the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be appropriately lit or blinked in accordance with the effect of SP reach.

FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when an effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is executed at the time of SP2 reach. After there is a hold that becomes a reach where tiger beauty appears (for example, SP2 reach), the SP reach content announcement 2 is won and “Torami!” Is notified, and then the SP2 reach is displayed in the special figure fluctuation display game related to this hold. Be started. For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the display screen of the display device 41 displays “S
P2 reach! ! The character 725b (tiger beauty) that appeared together with the characters "" is displayed.

FIG. 176 (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the display device 41 when the effect in which the character 725c (girl) appears is executed during the SP3 reach. After there is a hold to become a reach where girls appear (for example, SP3 reach), the SP Reach Content Notification 3 is won and “Onigiri!” Is notified, and then the SP3 reach is started in the special figure change display game related to this hold. The For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), the display screen of the display device 41 displays “SP3”.
reach! ! The character 725c (girl) that appears along with the characters "" is displayed.

Note that the characters 725a to 725c may be made to appear in any of the effects of SP1 to 3 to make the effects more diverse without being associated with the system of reach effects (SP1 to 3 reach). Further, characters such as “SP1 reach!” On the display screen of the display device 41 may be hidden. Furthermore, even when the SP reach content announcement is not performed before the SP reach effect is performed, the effect in which the character appears during the SP reach may be appropriately executed. In addition, a plurality of characters may be allowed to appear so as to include characters whose appearance is suggested by the SP reach content notification in the effect at the time of SP reach after the SP reach content notification is performed.

[Winning rate of love degree increase value lottery in the affection level notification production process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the win rate h of the love degree increase value lottery in the love degree notification effect process.
Details of% (execution rate) will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram exemplifying the winning rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery according to the seventeenth embodiment for each set value.

In the degree of love increase value lottery that draws the increase value of love degree, if the win condition of each love degree increase value (1% increase, 3% increase, 5% increase, 10% increase) is satisfied, It will be possible to win the degree of increase in the degree of love that has been met. In the present embodiment, the winning conditions are always (in other words, there are no winning conditions). In addition, in the love degree increase value lottery, a range of random values is assigned to each love degree increase value (assigned), and the random value extracted at the time of the love degree increase value lottery matches the range. , The degree of love increase corresponding to the matched range is selected.
Then, the selected degree of love increase is added to the current degree of love. In addition, since the degree of friendship increase value lottery is performed, one of the friendship degree increase values is always won. That is, unlike the above-described pending content announcement lottery, etc., in the love degree increase value lottery, only one lottery is performed, and a plurality of love degree increase values are not won simultaneously.

At that time, according to the set value (settings 1 to 6), the win rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery, that is, the distribution of the random value 1-100 changes. When the setting value is setting 1, the win rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 47% (random value 1-47), 3% increase is 28% (random number 48-75). ) 5% increase to 18% (random number 76-93), 10% increase to 7
% (Random value 94-100).

In addition, when the setting value is setting 2, the win rate h% of the degree of love increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 46% (random number 1-46), 3% increase is 28% (random number 47 -74), 5%
The increase is 18% (random value 75-92), the 10% increase is 8% (random number 93-10)
0).

When the setting value is setting 3, the win rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 45%
(Random number 1-45), 3% increase becomes 29% (random number value 46-74), 5% increase becomes 18% (random number value 75-92), 10% increase becomes 8% (random number value) 93-100).

When the setting value is setting 4, the win rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 44%
(Random value 1-44), 3% increase is 29% (random value 45-73), 5% increase is 19% (random value 74-92), 10% increase is 8% (random value) 93-100).

When the setting value is setting 5, the win rate h% of the degree of love increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 43%
(Random value 1-43) 3% increase 29% (Random value 44-72) 5% increase 19% (Random value 73-91) 10% increase 9% (Random value 92-100).

When the setting value is setting 6, the win rate h% of the love degree increase value lottery is, for example, 1% increase is 40%
(Random number 1-40), 3% increase becomes 30% (random number value 41-70), 5% increase becomes 20% (random number value 71-90), 10% increase becomes 10% (random number value) 91-100)
. In FIG. 177, all of the love level increase values are positive values, but the love level increase / decrease values may be set so that there is 0 or a negative value. Note that the absolute value of the negative value is the love degree reduction value.

[Design Command Processing According to Seventeenth Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the details of the symbol command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The symbolic command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 42).
As shown in FIG. 178, after the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set and saved (B1802), it is determined whether or not the symbol type is a normal jackpot symbol (B1803).
When the symbol type is a normal jackpot symbol (the result of B1803 is “Y”), a process of clearing the affection degree (affinity = 0%) is performed (B1804).

On the other hand, when the symbol type is not a normal jackpot symbol, that is, an outlier symbol or a probabilistic jackpot symbol (result of B1803 is “N”), the processing of B1804 is not performed (the degree of love is not cleared). Then, the symbol system command processing is finished as it is.

Therefore, the degree of love is not cleared until a big hit usually appears. Even in the case of the normal big hit symbol, when the short time state occurs after the normal big hit, the degree of love may be cleared when the short time state ends.

[Single command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 179, details of the single command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the single command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The single-shot command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 39).
As shown in FIG. 179, after all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and then the variation content notification flag, the continuation suggestion notification flag, and the setting suggestion notification flag are cleared as the first predetermined flag. Processing is performed (B1333). In addition, change content notification flag,
The continuation suggestion notification flag and the setting suggestion notification flag are collectively referred to as a first predetermined flag. That is, during the execution of the one-time (single hold) variation display game, the variation content notification flag is set as the first predetermined flag by performing the variation content notification effect (B5739), and the continuous suggestion notification effect is performed. Thus, the continuation suggestion notification flag is set as the first predetermined flag (B
5749), the setting suggestion notification flag is set as the first predetermined flag by performing the setting suggestion notification effect (B5759). The first predetermined flag is cleared every time the symbol is stopped at the end of one variation display game.

In addition, when a variation content notification flag, a continuation suggestion notification flag, and a setting suggestion notification flag are set as the first predetermined flag, the results of B5731 in FIG. 171 and B5741 and B5751 in FIG. 172 become “Y” and change in the prediction effect processing. Content notification lottery, continuation suggestion notification lottery, and setting suggestion notification lottery will not be performed. In other words, once the variation content notification lottery, the continuation suggestion notification lottery, or the setting suggestion notification is executed once, the executed notification is not executed thereafter in this one variation display game. As a result, when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation a plurality of times in a variable display game within a single hold and a notification lottery is performed a plurality of times, the same type of notification is performed repeatedly. It can be avoided.

[Screen transition example when a notice lottery is performed multiple times in a variable display game within a single hold]
FIG. 180 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the seventeenth embodiment, and the entire game screen when the notice lottery is performed a plurality of times in the variable display game within a single hold. It is an example of a transition. In addition to the display screen of the display device 41, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed.

180 in FIG. 180 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is started. In the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left area 610 of the plurality of variable display areas 610
In A, the decorative first symbol A is displayed. In the right area 610B, the decorative first symbol B is displayed. In the middle region 610C, the decorative first symbol C is displayed in an enlarged manner. Has been. In addition, in the holding digest area 640, a special figure changing hold display 643 corresponding to the changing display game to be started is displayed.

180 in FIG. 180 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. In the plurality of variable display areas 610, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner "↓↓↓". The degree of affection is 88% inside, but it is not displayed on the display screen.

FIG. 180 () is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation during the execution of the variable display game. When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the change (results of B5601 and B5603 in FIG. 170 are “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection level notification effect process are executed (B5604, B5605).

Then, in the variation content notification lottery of the prediction effect process, by winning the variation content notification 3 whose winning condition is SP3 reach occurrence, as shown in FIG. The notification is made, and the characters 724 “extremely reach!” Are also displayed on the display screen. Further, when the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f also emits light. In addition, since the change content notification is a notification of the reach production system (reach type), the change content notification lottery may be executed only before the reach occurrence or the SP reach development.

Note that an upper speaker 19a (see FIG. 5) provided at the upper left corner of the glass frame 15 relatively close to the character effect unit 40f so that the player feels as if the character drawn in the character effect unit 40f is speaking. 1) may be larger than the outputs of other speakers (upper right corner portion upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b). Moreover, a speaker may be provided in the character effect unit 40f so that the voice is directly notified from the character effect unit 40f.

In addition, in the affection degree notification lottery of the affection level notification effect process, when winning 1% increase, the increase in affection level (1% increase) is added to the current affection degree (88%) and a new affection degree (89 % = 8
8% + 1%) is calculated. The new love level is displayed as a love level display 726 at the upper left of the display screen.

FIG. 180 (and) shows the display device 41 when the SP3 reach state is reached in the variable display game.
It is a display screen. Note that the normal reach may be developed to be in the SP3 reach state.
The decorative first symbol A of the left region 610A of the plurality of variable display regions 610 and the decorative first symbol B of the right region 610B are temporarily stopped by displaying the identification information (symbol) of “3”, respectively.
The decorative pattern 1C of 10C is “↓” in a variable display. On the display screen, “SP3 reach!
"Is displayed.

180 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation during the SP3 reach state in the variable display game. When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the SP3 reach state (the results of B5601 and B5603 in FIG.
Y "), the prediction effect process and the affection notification effect process are executed (B5604, B5605).
.

Then, by winning the line 5 in the line drawing of the prediction effect process, FIG.
As shown at 0, the voice “I am on” is notified by voice, and the letter 724 “I am on” is displayed on the display screen, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f is displayed. Emits light. In addition, in the degree-of-friendly lottery drawing of the degree-of-friendliness notification process, when a 5% increase is won, a new degree of love calculated from the current degree of love (89%) and the degree of love increase (5% increase) ( 94% = 89% + 5%) is displayed as an affinity display 726 at the upper left of the display screen.

In addition, when there is a predetermined effect by the SP3 reach, the SP3 rather than the notification effect (speech 5 voice, characters 724, display 726, etc.) by the prediction effect process or the affection notification effect process.
A predetermined effect by reach may be executed with priority.

(Ni) in FIG. 180 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode (big hit, specific result mode). A plurality of variable display areas 610 (
In the left region 610A, the right region 610B, and the middle region 610C), the decorative first symbols A to C are “3,
“3, 3” and the numbers are aligned, and the display screen shows that it is a big hit (characters such as “hit!”).

[Prefetch Variation Command Processing According to Seventeenth Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the prefetch fluctuation command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a prefetch variation command processing procedure according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The prefetching variation command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 41), but as shown in FIG. 181, whether the prefetching notice effect (holding change notice) to be generated is an effect that starts immediately or not. The process after the determination (B1715) is different from that of the first embodiment.

The effect control device 300 according to the seventeenth embodiment determines that the prefetching notice effect to be generated (holding change notice) is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), and selects a prefetching effect (for example, The display corresponding to the continuous notice effect (including the chance look-ahead effect), the look-ahead zone effect, and the look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice) is set (B1716). That is, a display corresponding to a hold change notice (prefetch notice effect) when a hold occurs is set. Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the prefetching notice effect to be generated is not an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the prefetch effect at the time of the hold shift is set and stored. (B1717). That is, the display of the hold change notice (pre-read notice effect) at the time of the hold shift is set and saved, and the information of the step change (color change, shape change, etc.) is saved. Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Single command processing according to the seventeenth embodiment]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the changing effect setting process according to the seventeenth embodiment.

The variation effect setting process according to the seventeenth embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 44), but as shown in FIG. 182, after the lottery (B2006) of the notice (first notice) that appears during the first half change. The process, the process after the lottery (B2009) of the notice (second half notice) appearing during the latter half of the change, and the process after the display setting of the notice effect (B2014) are different from those of the first embodiment. In the variation effect setting process, as in the first embodiment (FIG. 44), the notice effect, the variation effect, and the execution timing of these effects are set.

After the lottery (B2006) for the notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (B2006), the effect control device 300 of the seventeenth embodiment performs a lottery for changing the first half notice according to the degree of love (B2006a). In the change lottery in the first half notice, the production control device 300 has, for example, a degree of love greater than or equal to a predetermined value,
A lottery is performed to change the production to a production with a higher expectation than the production lottery. Therefore, for example, when the degree of affection is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the probability (appearance rate) that an effect with high expectation occurs can be increased.

In addition, after the lottery of the notice (second half notice) that appears during the second half fluctuation (B2009), the production control device 300 performs the second lottery change lottery according to the degree of love (B2009a). In the change lottery for the second half notice, the effect control device 300 performs a lottery in which, for example, the affection degree is higher than a predetermined value and the effect is changed to a highly expected effect. Therefore, for example, when the degree of affection is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, it is possible to increase the probability (appearance rate) that an effect with a higher degree of expectation will occur than the effect drawn in B2009.

After the display setting of the notice effect (B2014), the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type, and reads the setting information related to the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift (B2015a). For example, FIG. 181 shows the setting information related to the hold change notice during the hold shift.
The information stored in the process of B1717. Note that the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift is not limited to the mode that is executed when the hold display 633 (hold, start memory) moves to the next one, but the hold display 633 shifts to the special figure changing hold display 643. It is good also as an aspect performed at the time.

After the processing of B2015a, when the change related to the target hold of the pre-reading effect (hold change notice, etc.) is started, the effect control device 300 displays the one-shot notification flag, the hold content notification flag, and the SP reach content notification flag for the second time. It is cleared as a predetermined flag (B2015b). The one-shot notification flag, the pending content notification flag, and the SP reach content notification flag are collectively referred to as a second predetermined flag (
This is called a prediction effect execution completion flag. In other words, the set one-shot notification flag, hold content notification flag, and SP reach content notification flag are maintained as the second predetermined flag over a plurality of change display games until the start of the change related to the pre-reading target hold. . And the 2nd predetermined flag is cleared by the change concerning the subject hold of prefetching production being started. Note that the second predetermined flag may be cleared when the change related to the target suspension of the pre-reading effect ends. Further, the second predetermined flag may be cleared when all the holds existing at the time of execution of the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, or SP reach content notification effect) are digested. In addition, each corresponding second predetermined flag (one-shot notification flag, hold content notification flag, or SP reach content notification flag) is cleared for the one-shot notification effect, the hold content notification effect, or the SP reach content notification effect. It will not run until it is done.

[Screen transition example when notice lottery is performed multiple times in a variable display game over multiple holds]
FIG. 183 and FIG. 184 are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the seventeenth embodiment, and the variable display game is performed a plurality of times based on a plurality of stored start memories. It is an example of the screen transition of the whole game at the time. In addition to the display screen of the display device 41, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530 are also displayed.

(Nu) in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. On the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative first design A to which the variation display “↓↓↓” is displayed.
C is displayed in a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B middle area 610C). In addition, a special figure changing hold display 643 corresponding to the change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digest area 640, and three hold displays are displayed in the hold display portion 630. In the description of FIGS. 183 and 184, the third hold display is referred to as a hold display 633a. The hold display 633a is a white hold display, but is a hold display whose color is changed to a red hold display by a pre-reading notice effect (hold change notice) as described later in FIG. The hold display has a difference between the display and the final hold display. In addition, the hold display 63
In the special figure fluctuation display game based on 3a, as will be described later in FIG.
And an effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears is performed.

(Ne) in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the number of holds increases during the execution of the variable display game. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area), FIG.
As indicated by 3 (Ne), the hold display 633b is displayed as the fourth hold display. Therefore, four hold displays including the hold displays 633a and 633b are displayed on the hold display unit 630.

183 in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects a player's operation during the execution of the variable display game. When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the change (results of B5601 and B5603 in FIG. 170 are “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection notification effect are executed (B5604, B5605).

Then, in the hold content notification lottery of the predictive effect process, the hold content notification 3 is won in which the current hold display is less than red (for example, white) and the final hold display is red. As a result, as shown in () of FIG. 183, “whether it is red on hold” is notified by voice, and a character 724 “whether it is red on hold” is displayed on the display screen, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40 f is displayed. Emits light. In addition, in the degree-of-friendliness increase value lottery of the degree-of-friendliness notification effect process, when a 1% increase is won, a new degree of love (8
9% = 88% + 1%) is displayed as an affinity display 726 at the upper left of the display screen.

In FIG. 183 (ha), when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C). It is displayed as a stop symbol instead of “8, 4, 3”. The special figure fluctuation hold display 643 in the hold digest area 640 becomes non-display (digestion state) when the change display game ends.

(H) in FIG. 183 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the next variable display game is being executed. The hold display 633 moves one by one to the left (hold shift), the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in the hold digestion area 640, and the decorative first symbols A to C change in the plurality of change display areas 610. The display is “↓↓↓”.

Further, when the touch sensor 530 is touched during the fluctuation (B5601 and B570 in FIG. 170).
The result of 5603 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection notification effect are executed (B5604,
B5605). Then, in the SP reach content announcement lottery of the predictive effect process, by winning the SP reach content announcement 2 where the winning condition is that the reach where the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears (for example, SP2 reach) is on hold, As shown in FIG. 183 (iii), “Torami!” Is notified by voice, and the character 724 “Torami!” Is displayed on the display screen, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light.

In addition, by winning a 1% increase in the affection level increase value lottery in the affection level notification effect process,
A new love level (90% = 89% + 1%) to which the love level increase value (1% increase) is added is displayed as a love level display 726 on the display screen. Note that in the prediction effect process, the hold content notification has already been made regarding the hold content of the hold display 633a that is the subject of the hold change notice (() in FIG. 183), so the hold content notification lottery is not performed.

Thereafter, in FIG. 183 (F), when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C). "6, 5, 1" is displayed as a stop symbol. The special figure fluctuation hold display 643 in the hold digest area 640 becomes non-display (digestion state) when the change display game ends.

FIG. 184 (f) shows the display device 41 when the next variable display game is being executed.
It is a display screen. The hold display 633 further moves to the left one by one (hold shift), the special figure changing hold display 643 is displayed in the hold digestion area 640, and the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of change display areas 610. Fluctuation display “↓↓↓” is displayed.

Then, a pre-reading notice effect (holding notice of change) is performed in which the color of the hold display 633a changes from a white hold display to a red hold display (displayed in black), and the characters “pre-reading!” Are displayed on the display screen. . Note that two hold displays 633a and 633b are displayed on the hold display section 630, and the hold display 633b is maintained in a white hold display state.

In the subsequent (e) of FIG. 184, when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of variable display regions 610 as “2, 5, 3” as stop symbols. The When the change display game is finished, the special figure change hold display 643 in the hold digest area 640 is not displayed (digested state).

Then, in FIG. 184 (ma), the hold display 633a is shifted to hold, and the hold digestion area 64 is displayed.
When the special figure change hold display 643 of red hold is displayed at 0 and the change display game is started, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a change display “↓↓↓” in the plurality of change display areas 610. . In addition, only one hold display 633b is displayed on the hold display section 630.

Further, when the touch sensor 530 is touched during the fluctuation (B5601 and B570 in FIG. 170).
When the result of 5603 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection level notification effect process are executed (B560).
4, B5605). In the lottery announcement of fluctuation contents in the prediction effect process, the winning condition is SP.
By winning the change content notification 2 that is an occurrence of 1 reach or more, as shown in FIG. 184, the voice is notified of “chance!”, And the character 724 “chance!” Is also displayed on the display screen. Is displayed, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light. Also, in the affection level notification effect process, the increase in the affection level (5% increase) is added to the new affection level (95% = 90% + 5%). Is displayed on the display screen as a degree of affinity display 726. In the predictive effect process, when the red-holding special figure change hold display 643 is the hold display 633a, the hold content has been notified and the SP reach content has been notified. There will be no announcement lottery.

184 of FIG. 184 after that is a display screen of the display device 41 when the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation after the variable display game is in the SP2 reach state. SP2
When the touch sensor 530 is touched during the reach state (B5601 and B5 in FIG. 170).
When the result of 603 is “Y”), the prediction effect process and the affection level notification effect process are executed (B560).
4, B5605).

Then, by winning the line 5 in the line drawing of the prediction effect process, FIG.
As shown in (4) of FIG. 4, “I am on” is notified by the voice and the character 724, and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f emits light. Further, by winning the 3% increase in the love level increase value lottery of the affection level notification effect process, a new love level (98% = 95% + 3%) is displayed in the love level display 726 on the display screen. In addition, in the prediction effect processing, since the red hold special map change hold display 643 or the hold display 633a is already displayed, the hold content notification lottery, the SP reach content notification lottery, and the variable content notification are displayed. There will be no lottery.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (mu), when the change display game is in the SP2 reach state, if the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation again, the prediction effect process and the affection degree notification effect process are executed again. (B5604, B5605). Further, the SP reach 2 is performed on the display screen of the display device 41, thereby producing an effect in which the character 725b (tiger beauty) appears.

Then, by winning the dialog lottery 2 of the predictive effect process, as shown in (M) of FIG. 184, the voice and the character 724 notify that “I am cheering” and the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f Emits light. By winning the 1% increase in the love level increase value lottery of the affection level notification effect process, a new love level (99% = 98% + 1%) is displayed in the love level display 726 on the display screen. In the prediction effect process, as described above, the pending content announcement lottery, the SP reach content announcement lottery, and the variation content announcement lottery are not performed, but the lottery is performed again even if the notification lottery has been announced. In this way, even if the notification has been made, the line drawing is performed again when the touch sensor 530 detects the player's operation, so that some kind of response can be made to the player's operation, and Can be improved.

Thereafter, in FIG. 184 (me), when the variable display game is in the stop result mode, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in the plurality of variable display regions 610 as “3, 6, 3” as stop symbols. . The special figure fluctuation hold display 643 in the hold digest area 640 becomes non-display (digestion state) when the change display game ends. Then, the red-holding special-fluctuation pending display 643 is digested and disappears, and the second predetermined flag (holding content notification flag, SP reach content notification flag) is cleared. The first predetermined flag (variation content notification flag) is cleared every time one variation display game becomes a stop result mode. Therefore, a hold content announcement lottery, an SP reach content announcement lottery, and a variation content announcement lottery are performed for the hold after the hold display 633a. In addition,
The second predetermined flag is not the time when the variable display game is finished and the red-pending special figure changing hold display 643 is digested and not displayed, but the variable display game based on the red-pending special figure changing hold display 643 It may be cleared when is started.

Further, the second predetermined flag may be maintained until after the red-holding special figure change hold display 643 is not displayed. In this case, the hold display 633b displayed before winning the hold content notification lottery in FIG. 183, that is, before the first second predetermined flag (hold content notification flag) is set. The second predetermined flag is cleared when the hold becomes the special figure change hold display 643 and is digested and not displayed. In addition, red pending special map change display 64
The second predetermined flag may be cleared after the suspension of winning before the start of the variable display game based on 3 is digested and hidden.

In addition, when there is a predetermined effect such as SP reach, a notification effect (voice or character 724, display 726, etc.) or a pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice) by a prediction effect process or a love degree notification effect process.
Instead, the predetermined effect by the SP reach or the like may be preferentially executed.

[Modification of 17th Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described.

[Production Button Input Processing According to Variation of Seventeenth Embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 185, an effect button input process according to a modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect button input process according to the modification of the seventeenth embodiment. The effect button input process according to the modification of the seventeenth embodiment is the seventeenth.
Although it is the same as the touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) of embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185,
Instead of the process of determining whether there is an input from the touch sensor (B5601), B6101
To B6103, and before finishing the effect button input process, the process of B6104 is performed.

In this modification, it is described that the touch sensor input process (FIG. 170) is not executed, but the touch sensor input process may be executed. When the touch sensor input process is executed, the prediction effect process and the affection level notification effect process can be executed based on either the operation detection by the effect button switch 25a or the operation detection by the touch sensor 530.

The effect control device 300 according to the modified example of the seventeenth embodiment determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 25 (operation means) is an effective button operation valid period (operation detectable period) (B61).
01). As described above, in the modified example of the seventeenth embodiment, the player's operation is detected using the effect button 25 instead of the touch sensor 530. (B
If the result of 6101 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 shifts the process to B6104.

On the other hand, when it is the button operation effective period (result of B6101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the detection of the button operation to be effective (B6102). In order that the player can recognize that the button operation is an effective button operation valid period, the light emitting member disposed at the position corresponding to the effect button 25 (operation means) (in the vicinity of the effect button 25 or in the vicinity thereof) is caused to emit light. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 186, the light emitting member and the like of the character effect unit 40f may be lit during the operation effective period. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board during the button operation effective period in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment. Note that the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may have a brightness higher than the lighting intensity during the operation valid period or blinking when a button operation is detected, for example. Further, when the button operation is detected, the lighting color of the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f may be changed.

The button operation may be detected not only when the effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25 is pressed, but also when the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25 is touched. Good. Further, the touch sensor 530 of the above-described seventeenth embodiment may be provided, and the player's operation may be detected by either the touch sensor 530 or the effect button switch 25a. In this case, as described above, the touch sensor 53 is used.
Regardless of whether 0 or the effect button switch 25a is detected, the predictive effect process and the affection level notification effect process are executed, and the types of operation effects are varied.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a button operation (B6103). When it is determined that there is no button operation (the result of B6103 is “N”), the production control device 30
If 0, the process proceeds to B6104. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a button operation (
When the result of B6103 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 shifts the process to B5602.

Further, the effect control device 300 sets the button operation detection to be invalid before ending the effect button input process (B6104). Therefore, the button operation can be detected from the process of B6102 to the process of B6104 as long as the operation is valid.

[Second Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described.

[Game board according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 187, a game board 30 according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a front view of a game board 30 according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment.

In the game board 30 according to the second modified example of the seventeenth embodiment, the character effect unit 40f and the touch sensor 530a (530) are arranged at the upper left part of the center case 40 as in the seventeenth embodiment.
And are provided. Furthermore, the game board 30 according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment is provided with a character effect unit 40g and a touch sensor 530b in the upper right part of the center case 40. Further, a character effect unit 40h and a touch sensor 530c are provided at the upper part of the center case 40, and a character effect unit 40i is provided at the lower part of the center case 40.
And a touch sensor 530d. As described above, the game board 30 according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment includes four character effect units (character effect units 40f and 40f).
g, 40h, 40i) and four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 53).
0c, 530d) are provided in a substantially cross shape around the center case 40, respectively. 4
The two touch sensors are infrared sensors that detect objects to be detected in respective predetermined detection ranges, but a touch panel provided on the cover glass 14 (transparent member) of the glass frame 15 can be substituted.

[Touch Game Processing According to Second Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, touch game processing according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a touch game process procedure according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment.

The presentation control apparatus 300 according to the second modification of the seventeenth embodiment first determines whether or not it is during the touch game period (B6301). The touch game period is set to a period during which it is difficult for the player to perform a handle operation on the operation handle 24, such as when waiting for a customer or when the starting memory is held to the upper limit. Note that a predetermined period during reach in the variable display game may also be set as the touch game period. When it is determined that the touch game period is not in effect (the result of B6301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the touch game process.

When it is determined that the touch game period is in progress (result of B6301 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 proceeds to the process of step B6302 and determines whether or not the touch pattern has been set (B6302). . The touch pattern includes four touch sensors (touch sensor 5
30a, 530b, 530c, 530d) in the order in which the player's operation can be detected (ie,
The order of the detection valid period). When the touch pattern has not been set (result of B6302 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 proceeds to the process of step B6303 and sets the touch pattern (B6303). The touch pattern may be set so that any one of the four touch sensors can simultaneously detect the player's operation (double touch pattern).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 first sets a detection valid period of the touch sensor that can detect the player's operation based on the touch pattern (for example, 2 sec), and causes the corresponding light emitting member to emit light. For example, when the touch sensor 530b in the upper right part of the center case 40 can first detect the player's operation, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40g corresponding to the touch sensor 530b emits light over the detection valid period. Thereafter, the production control device 300
Ends the touch game process.

On the other hand, when the touch pattern has been set, the effect control device 300 (B630).
If the result of 2 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B6305, and it is determined whether or not there is an input from any of the four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, and 530d) (B6305). When there is no input from the touch sensor (the result of B6305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the touch game process, and when there is an input from the touch sensor (the result of B6305 is “Y”). ”), The process proceeds to step B6306, and it is determined whether or not it is during the detection valid period of the input touch sensor (B6306).
.

When the production control device 300 is not in the valid detection period of the touch sensor with the input,
If the result of B6306 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B6307, the number of mistouches is updated by +1 as the number of mistouches (B6307), and then the process proceeds to step B6308. The production control device 300 is in the detection valid period of the touch sensor with the input (
If the result of B6306 is “Y”), the process proceeds to B6308, and it is determined whether or not the touch sensor input is the last touch sensor input in the set touch pattern (B630).
8).

The effect control device 300 determines that the input is not the last touch sensor (B63).
The result of 08 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step B6309, the detection valid period of the next touch sensor is set based on the touch pattern, and the corresponding light emitting member is caused to emit light (B6309).
Then, the touch game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when determining that the input is the last touch sensor (the result of B6308 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the number of mistouches is 0 (B63).
10). Note that it may be determined whether the number of mistouches is equal to or less than a predetermined number. When the number of mistouches is 0, that is, when there is no mistouch (the result of B6310 is “Y”
), A special effect is set or executed (B6311). The effect control device 300 can execute, as a special effect, an effect that cannot be confirmed during a normal game, for example, an effect of congratulating that there was no mistouch in a touch game. When the special effect is set, the special effect can be executed at a later desired timing instead of immediately. Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the touch game process.

[Game board during a touch game period according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the gaming board 30 during the touch game period according to a second modification of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a front view of the game board 30 during the touch game in the second modification example of the seventeenth embodiment.

For example, when the touch sensor 530c above the center case 40 is in the valid detection period, the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40h above the center case 40 corresponding to the touch sensor 530c is indicated by hatching in FIG. So that it emits light. Then, during the detection valid period, the touch sensor 530c can detect the player's operation by touching the portion of the cover glass 14 facing the character effect unit 40h (B6305). When the player touches the character effect units 40f, 40g, and 40i other than the character effect unit 40h during the detection valid period, that is, the touch sensors 530a, 530b, and 530d other than the touch sensor 530c perform the player's operation. If it is detected, it is determined as a mistouch, and the number of mistouches is updated by one (B6307).
).

The production control device 300 includes four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a and 530b).
530c, 530d), the touch game process can be similarly advanced when the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 is touched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when the light emitting member of the character effect unit 40 h above the center case 40 emits light, the upper side (back side) of the touch panel 25 b is touch-operated, The effect control device 300 can advance the touch game process in the same manner as when the touch sensor 530c detects the player's operation.

In addition, the production control device 300 adjusts the operation guide first image 725 and the operation guide second on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG.
An image 726 can be displayed.

The first operation guidance image 725 is an image displayed at the end of the display screen of the display device 41 corresponding to the position of the touch sensor that is in the valid detection period. For example, as the operation guidance first image, one side of the end portion of the display screen can be switched to a predetermined color, or a character guiding the operation can be displayed. For example, when the touch sensor 530c in the upper part of the center case 40 is in the detection valid period, the operation guidance first image 725 is displayed on one side of the upper end portion of the display screen, as indicated by hatching in FIG.

The operation guidance second image 726 includes four touch sensors (touch sensors 530a, 530b,
Displayed when using the cross key provided in the upper plate unit or the like instead of 530c and 530d). The operation guidance second image 726 is an image that is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in a cross key shape, for example, and highlights the key corresponding to the position of the cross key that is in the detection valid period. For example, if the upper key (back side) of the cross key is the detection valid period,
As shown in black in FIG. 189, the operation guidance second image 726 on the display screen is displayed with the upper (back) key highlighted.

For example, when the light emitting member of the character rendering unit 40f in the upper left part of the center case 40 emits light and the touch sensor 530a is in the detection valid period, the left side of the display screen of the display device 41 is on one side. The operation guide first image 725 may be displayed, or the operation guide first image 725 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

The detection valid period may be selectable by the player in advance, for example, when waiting for a customer or before starting a touch game. In this way, by making it possible for the player to select the detection valid period, the difficulty level of the touch game can be changed according to the player's age, ability, etc., so that various players can enjoy the touch game. Can improve the interests of the game. Further, the detection valid period selected by the player may be stored. Thus, by storing the detection effective period selected by the player, statistical information such as the age group of the player who plays the game on the gaming machine 10 can be acquired, and the statistical information can be used for hall events and product development. Can be utilized.

[Operations and effects of the seventeenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment is a predetermined game related to a variable display game (special map variable display game) in which identification information (identification symbol, special ornament symbol, ornament first symbol AC, special special symbol) is variably displayed. Production control means (production control device 300) capable of producing a production is provided. The gaming machine 10 includes operation detection means (touch sensor 530) capable of detecting the player's operation. The effect control means includes an operation value calculating means for calculating an operation value (degree of love) as a value that changes in response to the operation detecting means detecting the player's operation, and the operation detecting means detects the player's operation. Execution of a predictive effect capable of executing a predictive effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variable content notification effect, continuous suggestion notification effect) It functions as a means. The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value.

For example, in the predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) uses the notice effect and the variable effect information set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182) at the time of starting the change of the variable display game being executed. Based on the pre-reading effect information set in the pre-reading fluctuation command processing (FIG. 181), the predetermined effects (notice effect, variable effect, pre-reading effect) executed in the variable display game are predicted. To inform you. Here, the notice effect is a first half notice before reach or a second half notice after reach (during reach). The variation effect is a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. The pre-reading effect is a pending change notice.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the content of a predetermined effect is predicted according to the player's operation, the execution ratio of the prediction effect changes according to the operation value. It can be experienced and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, while performing the prediction effect according to the player's operation, the predetermined display of the variable display game is performed even when the player does not operate, so even the player who does not operate the variable display game You can enjoy the original production of the game itself and improve the fun of the game. Furthermore, in addition to an increase in the operation value (degree of love) according to the number of touches, the execution ratio of the prediction effect changes according to the operation value, and for example, the appearance rate of a hot effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to feel the significance of the player's operation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a plurality of light emitting members capable of emitting light (light emitting members of the character effect units 40f, 40g, 40h, and 40i). A plurality of operation detection means (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, 530d) are arranged in the gaming machine. The plurality of light emitting members are positioned corresponding to the respective operation detecting means (the upper left portion, the upper right portion of the center case 40
(Upper and lower) respectively. The effect control means emits a light emitting member corresponding to the detectable operation detecting means when at least one of the plurality of arranged operation detecting means is capable of detecting the player's operation (during the effective detection period). Let According to such a gaming machine 10, various operations can be performed by the plurality of operation detection means and the light emitting members, and also a touch game that can be performed by a player can be performed. Interest can be improved. In addition, since the player can perform effects using the player's hands at the timing when the player does not handle the ball to launch the game ball, the situation where the player only sees the video is avoided, and the game is interesting. Can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured such that a plurality of operation detection means (touch sensors 530a, 530b, 530c, 530d) perform player operations in a predetermined order. It is controlled so that it can be detected, and a special effect can be executed when a predetermined condition (number of miss-touches = 0) is satisfied regarding the operation detection result. According to such a gaming machine 10, a special effect can be seen according to the result of the touch game in which the player has participated, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, based on the establishment of the start condition, the start storage means (the game control device 100 or the game control device 100 or Effect control device 300) and prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining execution information of the variable display game related to the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start memory means is executed. Or the production control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) executes a pre-reading effect (prefetching notice effect (holding change notice)) for notifying the determination result of the predetermining means as a predetermined effect, and a predictive effect ( A one-shot notification effect, a hold content notification effect, an SP reach content notification effect, a variable content notification effect, and a continuous suggestion notification effect) are executed. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to perform the effects related to the game by combining the various effects by executing the prediction effects before the execution of the pre-reading effects, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the prediction effect executing means (the effect control device 300).
) Changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variable content notification effect, continuous suggestion notification effect) according to the operation value (degree of affection). In at least one of the first predictive effect (variable content notification effect, continuous suggestion notification effect) for predicting and notifying the content of the predetermined effect related to the variable display game being executed, and at least one of the plurality of variable display games A second foreseeing effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP) that predicts and informs the content of the predetermined effect that appears based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) Reach content announcement effect). According to such a gaming machine 10, the prediction effect is a first that is completed within one variation (single variation display game).
Since the prediction effect and the second prediction effect that can be executed over a plurality of variations (variation display game) are included, various aspects of the prediction effect can be performed as effects related to the game, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

For example, in the first predictive effect, the effect control device 300 (predictive effect executing means) provides information on the notice effect and the variable effect (set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 182) at the start of the change of the variable display game being executed ( These predetermined effects (notice effect and variable effect) executed in the running variation display game are predicted and notified before execution based on the effect execution timing). For example, the second
In the prediction effect, the effect control device 300 (prediction effect execution means) performs a predetermined effect (prefetching effect) executed in the variable display game based on the information of the prefetching effect set in the prefetching variation command processing (FIG. 181). ) And foresee it.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the prediction effect executing means (effect control device 300)
When the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect) is executed, the fact that the second prediction effect has been executed is used as a prediction effect execution completed flag (second predetermined flag). Stored when the variable display game is executed based on the start memory (hold corresponding to the hold display 633a) determined by the predetermining means (the effect control device 300) as a target of the second prediction effect. Erase the prediction effect execution completed flag. According to such a gaming machine 10, the same second prediction effect is prevented from being repeatedly executed for the same start-up memory by prohibiting the second prediction effect when there is a prediction effect execution completed flag. it can. And the content of the 2nd prediction effect performed previously and the content of the 2nd prediction effect performed later do not overlap with respect to a certain starting memory, and a new prediction effect is always performed with respect to the said starting memory. It will be. Therefore, the player can enjoy various effects, and can determine whether or not the variable display game based on the start memory can be expected without duplication from a plurality of prediction effects, The interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the prediction effect executing means (effect control device 300)
When the second prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect) is executed, the fact that the second prediction effect has been executed is used as a prediction effect execution completed flag (second predetermined flag). Memorized and memorized start memory (hold display 6) when the second prediction effect is executed
When all the variable display games based on the starting memory (up to 33b) are executed, the stored prediction effect execution completion flag is deleted. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the start prediction memory (one or more stored when the second prediction effect is executed) is prohibited by prohibiting the second prediction effect when there is a prediction effect execution completed flag. It is possible to prevent the same second prediction effect from being executed many times for a group of starting memories). And the content of the second prediction effect performed before and the content of the second prediction effect performed later do not overlap with respect to the start-up memory stored when the second prediction effect is executed, A new prediction effect is always performed for the start-up memory. Therefore, the player can enjoy various effects, and can determine whether or not the variable display game based on the start memory can be expected without duplication from a plurality of prediction effects, The interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) predicts the content of a predetermined effect when the operation detection means (touch sensor 530) detects a player's operation. It has a prediction effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a notification effect to be notified (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variation content notification effect, continuation suggestion notification effect). When the operation detecting means detects a player's operation, the prediction effect executing means executes a specific effect (a speech effect) even when the prediction effect is not executed. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, when the operation detecting means detects the player's operation, the prediction effect or the specific effect is always executed, so that the player can surely experience the enjoyment of the operation. Can improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the player performs an operation, a prediction effect or a specific effect is always executed. Therefore, when the operation detection unit or the like does not operate due to a problem, the problem can be quickly grasped.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and a light emitting member that can emit light (light emitting member of the character effect unit 40f). The effect control means (effect control device 300) is an operation value calculation means (effect control device 3) that calculates an operation value (degree of love) as a value that changes in response to the operation means detecting a player's operation.
00) and when the operating means is operated by the player, a prediction effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variable content notification effect) for predicting and notifying the content of a predetermined effect And a prediction effect executing means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a continuation suggestion notification effect). The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value. The effect control means causes the light emitting member to emit light when the operation of the operation means can be detected (button operation effective period). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the prediction effect can be executed using the operation means used for other effects, it is not necessary to provide a new operation means, and the gaming machine 10 can be manufactured at low cost, and the operation means Since it is possible to easily recognize the timing when the light emitting member emits light when the operation can be detected, the player can experience the enjoyment of the operation, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, setting values (settings 1 to 6) corresponding to the settings relating to the game.
) That can be changed (setting key switch 93, setting value change switch 102);
Operation detection means (touch sensor 530) capable of detecting a player's operation. The effect control means (effect control device 300) includes an operation value calculation means (effect control device 300) that calculates an operation value (degree of love) as a value that changes in response to the operation detection means detecting a player's operation. ,
When the operation detecting means detects a player's operation, a prediction effect for predicting and notifying the content of a predetermined effect (one-shot notification effect, hold content notification effect, SP reach content notification effect, variable content notification effect, continued And a prediction effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the suggestion notification effect). The prediction effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the prediction effect according to the operation value. The operation value calculation means calculates the operation value according to the set value. According to such a gaming machine 10, the operation value calculated according to the set value changes, and the execution ratio of the predictive effect changes according to the operation value. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Eighteenth embodiment]
The eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 194. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to seventeenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to seventeenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The eighteenth embodiment relates to a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time as effects, and a voice output that reads out the characters of the character display. Upper speaker 19a and / or lower speaker 19
b functions as a sound output means capable of outputting (generating) sound.

[Variation production setting processing]
Referring to FIG. 190, the variation effect setting process according to the eighteenth embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43).
Details will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. 190, steps B2014a and B2014b are added to the variation effect setting process of FIG. Note that FIG.
The processes having the same contents as those in FIG.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not there are a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time (simultaneously) after the display settings of the change effect (B2013) and the notice effect (B2014).
2014a). Here, it may be determined whether or not there are a plurality of types of character display instead.
If there is no display of a plurality of characters displayed at the same time (the result of B2014a is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2015 without doing anything. When there are a plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time (the result of B2014a is “Y”), the priority order of the plurality of character displays that are displayed at the same time is determined according to the presence or absence of a read-out speech output. And adjusting the display time (B2014b), the process proceeds to step B2015.

FIG. 191 is a table showing the priority order of displaying a plurality of characters displayed at the same time. By setting the priority order, even when the display ranges of a plurality of character displays displayed at the same time overlap, it is possible to display them appropriately superimposed. That is, the character display with higher priority is displayed with priority on the front side (upper layer), and the character display with lower priority is displayed on the rear side (
Displayed with no priority on the lower layer.

〔Priority〕
As shown in FIG. 191, in this embodiment, the character display without the reading voice output (character display without reading) has a higher priority than the character display with the reading voice output (character display with reading). For this reason, when the character display without reading and the character display with reading are displayed in an overlapping manner, the character display without reading is displayed on the front side in preference to the character display with reading. Accordingly, the character display without reading is difficult to be recognized by the player because there is no reading voice output, but it can be easily recognized by the player by displaying it preferentially.

For example, the non-reading character display includes a pseudo-continuous number which is the number of executions of pseudo variation in the pseudo-continuous production, the number of steps executed in the step-up notice, and a speech notice without reading-out. Also, for example, as character display with reading, there are character display “reach” displayed when a reach occurs, character display “high heat” as an effect with high expectation, and serif notice with reading. Both the character display without reading and the character display with reading notify the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and are effects related to the degree of expectation.

The pseudo-continuous production is a pseudo-variation (single-stop display) in which a decorative special symbol that is variably displayed is quasi-temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop display) from the start to the end of a single special-figure display game. Production, production, sub-production, and sub-variation) are performed continuously a predetermined number of times. Note that, during the pseudo stop display, pseudo continuous symbols suggesting pseudo continuous effects may be stopped and displayed. Step-up notice is a single stage (sub stage) set in multiple stages from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (
It is an effect that is executed in sequence up to step). As described above, the pseudo-continuous production and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of continuous single effects, and the greater the number of the multiple times, the greater the degree of expectation for the big hit.

[Expectation of character display (reliability)]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the expectation of jackpot between the character display without reading and the character display with reading, taking the character display of lines (character strings) as an example. For example, the line (string)
There are lines A, B, and C, and there is a case where no reading is performed for each line and a case where reading is performed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of sync, the line without reading has a higher selection rate (distribution rate) than the line with reading out, and conversely, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit In addition, lines with reading are more selective (distribution rate) than lines without reading.
Becomes higher.

Therefore, the expectation of the big hit is higher in the character display of the speech with the reading than the character display of the speech without the reading. Similarly, the expectation level is as follows: lines A <line B <line C
It becomes large in order. Note that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot corresponds to the probability of winning the jackpot when the notice (character display) appears, and is calculated based on the selection ratio of the notice in the case of a jackpot and the selection ratio of the notice in the case of a loss. it can.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, as an effect that has a higher degree of expectation than the speech C with reading, an effect that surprises the player by reading a speech that is different from the speech displayed as a character display may be performed.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 193A and FIG. 193B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eighteenth embodiment.

(S) in FIG. 193A is a display screen at the time of starting the decorative special figure variation display game. First
The hold display 633 in the first hold display unit 630a that displays the start-up memory as the first hold display.
While (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), the hold frame 6 in the rectangular frame
40, the hold display 633 on the right end of the first hold display section 630a moves. 2nd start memory
At the present time, the second hold display unit 630b that displays the hold display (second start-up storage display)
The hold display 633 is not displayed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game started here, a pseudo-continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number (three times) of pseudo variation is executed. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of times of pseudo variation may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 190).

After that, in (S), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed as the identification information in the variation display area 610, and the variation of the decoration reduced symbol (small symbol) is (↓↓) as the identification information. ↓
) Is being executed in the variable display area 615. The left symbol (first symbol A), the right symbol (decoration first symbol B), and the middle symbol (decoration first symbol C) vary in the left region 610A, right region 610B, and middle region 610C of the variable display region 610, respectively. is doing. In addition, a pending change display 633a indicating a hold relating to the currently executing special figure change display game (starting memory that has been the right to execute this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digest area 640. In the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a number “2” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are respectively displayed. The number “0” is displayed.

In (S), the first pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is finished, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle region 610C is a pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect. Is stopped. Furthermore, the text display 755 “chance” of the speech with reading aloud
However, the character 754 is displayed as if the line is emitted, and a voice output that reads out “chance” and the characters in order corresponding to the line is executed via the speaker (sound output unit). At the same time, a character display 752 “pseudo 2 times” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuations to be started (number of times of pseudo continuous operation) is displayed without reading out the voice.

Thereafter, in (C), the second pseudo fluctuation starts. Here, the character display 755 “chance” with reading is erased when reading is finished, but the character display 752 “pseudo twice” without reading is maintained. That is, the character display 752 without reading is
It is displayed for a longer time (longer period) than the character display 755 with reading displayed at the same time. Therefore, the character display 752 without reading is difficult to be recognized by the player because there is no reading voice output, but it is easily recognized by the player by displaying for a long time. Note that the character display 755 with reading may be deleted before the end of reading, or may be displayed and deleted for a predetermined time after the end of reading. Further, the display times of the character displays 752 and 755 displayed at the same time are adjusted in step B2014b of the variation effect setting process.

Note that, in exceptional cases, when the time required to read out the character display 755 with reading is very long, the character display 755 with reading may be displayed for a longer time than the character display 752 without reading.

Next, in (So), the character display “pseudo two times” without reading indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo fluctuation (number of times of pseudo ream) is deleted. The character display “pseudo 2” is always displayed during the execution of the second pseudo variation.
“Times” may be displayed.

Then, in (T), the second pseudo variation is finished and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, pseudo continuous symbols suggesting pseudo continuous effects are stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, the character display 755 “Large chance” of the speech with reading is displayed as if the character 754 is uttering the speech, and the voice output is read in the order of “Di Chance” corresponding to the speech. Is executed through the speaker. At the same time, a character display 752 “pseudo 3 times” indicating the number of times of pseudo fluctuations to be started (the number of times of quasi-continuous operation) is displayed without reading aloud.

Here, character display 755 “Large chance” with reading and character display 75 without reading.
2 “Pseudo 3 times” is displayed with overlapping display areas at the same time, but the character display 752 “Pseudo 3 times” without reading is more than the character display 755 “Large chance” with reading. Displayed preferentially on the front side (upper layer). The non-reading character display 752 “pseudo three times” is difficult to be recognized by the player because there is no read-out voice output, but it can be easily recognized by the player by displaying it preferentially. The character display 75 displayed at the same time
The priority order of 2,755 is set in step B2014b of the variation effect setting process.

Next, in (h), the third pseudo fluctuation starts. Here, text display with reading out 7
55 “Large chance” is erased when reading is completed, but the character display 752 “pseudo three times” without reading is maintained. That is, the character display 752 without reading is
It becomes easy to recognize by being displayed for a longer time (longer period) than the character display 755 with reading displayed at the same time.

In (u), the character display “pseudo 3 times” without reading indicating the number of times of execution of the pseudo fluctuation (number of times of pseudo continuous) is deleted. Note that the character display “pseudo three times” may always be displayed during the execution of the third pseudo variation.

Next, in (T), the reach state is reached, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, since the pseudo-continuous production has ended, the pseudo-continuous design is not displayed. Furthermore, the text display 755 “reach” of the speech with reading is displayed as if the speech is emitted from the character 754, and the speech output that reads out the speech characters “reach” in order is output from the speaker (sound output). Means). At the same time, the character display 753 “Ya-ta” of the speech without reading that informs the degree of expectation of the jackpot is displayed as if the speech is emitted from the character 754, but the speech that reads the character of the speech is read. There is no output.

It should be noted that the character display 755 “reach” with reading is the character display 753 “without reading”.
It may be highlighted so that it is conspicuous, for example, by making it larger than “Ya-ta” or by making it a color different from the text display 753 “Ya-ta” without reading out. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read out, and the interest of the game is improved.

After that, in (g), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to the SP reach, and a movie production (video production) is executed at the center of the display screen, and the left design and the right design are in the upper corner of the screen. Moving. Here, the text display 753 “Ya-ta” without reading is (T)
The display has been maintained for a long time. However, the character display 755 “reach” with reading is erased when the reading ends, and then the character display 755 “extreme heat” with reading is displayed instead. Then, a voice output that reads out the words of the words in the order of “Gekiatsu” is executed via the speaker.

The character display 755 “Intense heat” with reading is erased when the reading is finished, but the character display 753 “Yow” without reading is maintained or simultaneously deleted. In this manner, the character display 753 “Ya-ta” without reading is easily recognized by being displayed for a longer time than the character display 755 “Leach” and “Fever” displayed at the same time. Note that the display times of the character displays 753 and 755 displayed at the same time are adjusted in step B2014b of the variation effect setting process.

In exceptional cases, when the time required to read out the character display 755 with reading is very long, the character display 755 with reading may be displayed for a longer time than the character display 753 without reading.

It should be noted that the character display 755 “Intense heat” with a reading degree having an expectation level equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree (for example, the expectation level of SP reach) is assumed that the display area overlaps with the character display 753 without a reading point at the same time Even when they are displayed in a superimposed manner, they may be preferentially displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the character display 753 without reading. Further, the character display 755 “Intense heat” with reading is expected more than the character display 753 without reading even when the character display 753 without reading and the display area overlap and are displayed at the same time. If the degree is large, it may be preferentially displayed on the front side. In addition, if the expectation is higher than the character display 753, the character display 755 “Intense heat” with a high expectation is displayed in a larger size than the character display 753, or highlighted with a different color from the character display 753. Also good.

After that, in (na), the special figure fluctuation display game is over and the jackpot stop symbol “3, 3, 3”
Is displayed in the fluctuation display area 615.

Subsequently, in (d), the big hit round game starts, the big hit state (special game state) is entered, and the big hit round effect is started.

[Screen transition diagram (modification)]
FIG. 194 is a modification of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eighteenth embodiment. (C) and (c) in FIG. 194 are the same as (c) and (b) in FIG. 193A.

In (f) of FIG. 194, during the decoration special figure variation display game, the production of the first step (step 1) of the three-step step-up notice starts. At the same time, the current step (
A non-reading character display 756 indicating “stage” is displayed as “Step 1”. In this modification, the step-up notice (step-up effect) is a window step-up notice, and for example, a different image (such as a character) is displayed for each step in a window (frame) set in the center of the display screen. Is.

Although no character is read out to the character display 756 “step 1” without reading,
Corresponding to the number of executions of step-up notice (number of steps) “1” in “Step 1”, the sound effect “Cuin” is output from the speaker only once. In this way, the number of executions of the step-up notice can be notified to the player with less sense of incongruity depending on the number of sound effects. Note that if the number of executions of the step-up notice is read and notified as it is, there is a possibility that the player may feel a great sense of incongruity.

Also, in (F), two characters 754 and 757 are displayed, and a speech advance notice is executed so as to have a conversation on the screen. Note that, as shown in FIG. 192, the degree of expectation differs for each line.
A text display 758 of the speech with reading is displayed as if the speech is emitted from the character 757, and a text display 7 of the speech with reading is displayed.
55 “Excellent” is displayed as if the line is emitted from the character 754. In this case, a voice output that reads out the characters in the character display 758 in the order of “Chocolate” is executed via the speaker. The symbol “?” That is not normally pronounced in the character display 758 “how is it?” Need not be read out.

Also, the character display 758 “How is it?” Read out at the present time is made larger in size than the character display 755 “Great state” not read out at the present time, or is made a color different from the character display 755 “Perfect state” that is not read out. For example, it may be highlighted so as to stand out. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read out at the present time, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the character display 756 “step 1” without reading may be easily recognized by being displayed for a longer time than the character display 758 with “reading” displayed at the same time.

After that, in (f), during the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the production of the second step (step 2) of the three-step step-up notice (step-up production) is started. At the same time, a non-reading character display 756 indicating the current step (stage) is displayed as “Step 2”. The character display 756 “Step 2” without reading is not read out, but the sound effect “Cuein” corresponds to the number of executions of step-up notice (Step number) “2” in “Step 2”. Is output from the speaker only twice.

In (f), a character display 75 with a reading that is a speech from the character 754 is displayed.
5 “Excellent” is read out through the loudspeaker as “Beckfish”, and voice output is executed. As a result, the character 75 has the voice 75
An effect such that 4 responds with a voice saying “Butterfly” is realized.

Further, the character display 755 “excellent” read out at the present time is larger in size than the character display 758 “how is it?” That is not read out at the current time, or is different from the character display 758 “how is it?” Not read out at present. It may be highlighted so that it stands out. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which character display is being read out at the present time, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the character display 756 “step 2” without reading is longer than the character display 755 “excellent” with reading (long period) displayed at the same time.
It may be easy to be recognized by being displayed.

Thereafter, in (e), during the decoration special figure variation display game, the production of the third step (step 3) of the three-step step-up notice (step-up production) is started. At the same time, an unread text display 756 indicating the current step (stage) is displayed as “Step 3”. The character display 756 “Step 3” without reading is not read out, but the sound effect “Cuin” is corresponding to the number of executions (step number) “3” of the step-up notice in “Step 3”. Is output from the speaker only three times.

In (e), the character display 755 “Intense heat” of the speech with a reading is displayed as the character 7.
The speech is displayed so as to be emitted from 54, and voice output is performed through the speaker in such a manner that the characters are read in the order of “Gekiatsu” corresponding to the speech.

Here, the character display 755 “Intense heat” with the reading and the character display 756 “Step 3” without the reading are overlapped and displayed at the same time, but the character display 756 “Step without reading” is displayed. 3 ”is the front side of the character display 755“ Intense heat ”
It is displayed with priority on the upper layer. Character display 756 “Step 3” without reading
Is difficult to be recognized by the player because there is no read-out voice output, but can be easily recognized by the player by displaying it preferentially. Further, the character display 756 “Step 3” without reading may be easily recognized by being displayed for a longer time than the character display 755 “Intense heat” with reading displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 194, the sound effect “cuein” is output from the speaker the number of times corresponding to the number of executions (step number) of the single effect (here, step-up notice), and the character display is performed as the number of single effects is increased. The mode of the output sound other than the reading sound is changed. However, instead, BGM (music) corresponding to the number of executions of single effects (number of steps) may be output from the speaker, and the expected degree of jackpot that increases as the number of executions of single effects increases.

[Operations and effects of the eighteenth embodiment]
According to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying on the display device an effect related to a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner. When the stop result is a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) that can output sound. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display a plurality of character displays at the same time as a notice effect that can notify the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result. The effect control means performs an audio output that reads out a character on a part of the character display (for example, the character display 755) of the plurality of character displays to notify the expectation degree.
The effect control means may display other characters among the plurality of character displays (for example, character displays 752, 75).
3, 756), the expected degree is notified only by displaying the other character without executing the voice output for reading out the character.

Therefore, the player can see that some of the character displays that should be read out of the character display should be noted, and can improve the interest of the game without being confused about which character display should be noted. it can. In addition, when the character display that reads out the character has a higher expectation level (for example, FIG. 192) than the character display that does not read out the character, the player pays attention to the character display with a high expectation. Can do. Further, with respect to a part of the character display that reads out the characters, the character display can be confirmed even if it is difficult to hear the voice output that reads out the characters, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, other character displays can be displayed for a longer period than some character displays. Therefore, since it is possible to display a character display that is not read out (other character display) over a longer period than a character display that is read out (partial character display), will the player have an increased opportunity to pay attention to character display that is not read out? Or, the possibility of overlooking the character display that is not read out is reduced. For this reason, the interest of a game can be improved.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of character displays (for example, character display 75) displayed at the same time.
3, 755) is a line representing the degree of expectation, and the production control means performs an audio output that reads out the line for a part of the character display and notifies the degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 193B (te) (g)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention by executing a voice output for reading out the words from some words with high expectation. In addition, by displaying a plurality of character displays as lines, for example, it is possible to produce a conversation between a plurality of characters, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the effect control means emphasizes a part of the character display (for example, character display 755) during voice output over the other character display (for example, character display 753, 758). It is displayed (for example, see FIG. 193B (te) and FIG. 194 (f)). Therefore, the player
It is possible to easily grasp for which character display voice output is being executed.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, step-up notice) is composed of a plurality of continuous single effects, and the greater the number of times, the greater the degree of expectation. Then, the effect control means displays the number of times that the single effect is executed in the notice effect by the other character display (for example, character display 752, 756). Therefore, it is possible to read a part of the character display more important for the production than the number of times of executing the single production, and to improve the fun of the game.

According to the eighteenth embodiment, the effect control means displays the number of executions of executing the single effect in the notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, step-up notice) by the other character display and from the sound output means (speaker). A predetermined number of sound effects corresponding to the number of executions is generated. Therefore, even if the player feels uncomfortable when the number of executions of the single effect displayed by the character display (the other character display) is read as it is, an aspect that does not give a sense of incongruity by generating sound effects for the number of executions. Thus, the player can be notified of the number of executions using sound effects.

[Nineteenth Embodiment]
The nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighteenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to eighteenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The nineteenth embodiment relates to sound output, no operation effect, and operation effect. The upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b function as sound output means capable of outputting (generating) sound. The presence operation effect is an effect in which the operation of the operation means is validated, and the no operation effect is an effect in which the operation of the operation means is invalidated. The effect button 25 functions as an operation means. The presence operation effect includes a pre-operation effect (operation request sound or operation promotion display) that prompts the player's operation and / or a post-operation effect (operation-related effect) corresponding to the player's operation. In the present embodiment, the no-operation effect and the operation-enabled effect both involve sound output. In the no-operation effect, since the operation valid period (operation detectable period) is not set, the operation cannot be detected and the operation becomes invalid. On the other hand, in the presence operation effect, an operation valid period (operation detectable period) is set, and the operation becomes valid.

[Variation production setting processing]
Referring to FIG. 195, the variation effect setting process according to the nineteenth embodiment (B1905 in FIG. 43).
Details will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. In FIG. 190, steps B6501 to B6505 are added to the variation effect setting processing of FIG. The processes having the same contents as those in FIG. 44 are denoted by the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted as appropriate.

In step B2011, the effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice, and then draws the presence / absence of the operation effect for each notice (B650).
1). Next, when there is an operation effect by winning, an operation valid period and an operation type corresponding to the operation effect of each notice are set (B6502).

Thereafter, when there is an operation effect, the effect control device 300 performs steps B2012-B2.
After 014, an operation promotion display display setting for prompting the player's operation (B6503), an operation request sound for prompting the player's operation (B6504), and an operation corresponding effect display setting corresponding to the operation (B
6505).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type (B2015). The display setting here also includes reading out setting information (set in step B1720, which will be described later) relating to the hold change notice during the hold shift. In addition, the hold change notice in the hold shift includes a hold change notice in the hold digest area 640.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
With reference to FIG. 196, the look-ahead variation command processing (B1 in FIG. 38) according to the nineteenth embodiment.
216) will be described in detail. FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by the effect control device 300. Note that FIG. 196 is the same as FIG.
Steps B1720-B1723 are added to the process 1, and processes having the same contents as those in FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect (B1716) when the prefetch notice effect (holding change notice or the like) to be generated is an effect that immediately starts (the result of B1715 is “Y”). . An effect that starts immediately is, for example, a hold change notice when a hold occurs. Here, the display setting of the hold change notice when the hold occurs is also executed. As the hold change notice, display setting for changing the hold form is performed. For example, the color of the hold display is changed from a normal color (for example, white) to black, blue, green, red, or the shape of the hold display is changed to a shape different from the normal shape according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. .

When the pre-reading notice effect to be generated is not an effect that starts immediately (result of B1715 is “N”)
) That is, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect that is executed at the time of the hold shift, display information corresponding to the pre-read effect at the time of the hold shift (movement of the hold display 633) is set and stored (
B1720). Here, the display information of the hold change notice in particular at the time of the hold shift is set and stored. The hold change notice in the hold shift includes a hold change notice in the hold digest area 640. Display information for changing the hold mode (color, pattern, shape, etc.) is set as the hold change notice.

And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs the lottery of the presence or absence of the operation production with respect to the pending | holding change notice at the time of a pending | holding shift (B1721). That is, in connection with the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift,
A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an operation effect. Then, when there is an operation effect after winning, an operation valid period and an operation type corresponding to the operation effect are set and saved (B1722), and the player operates as an effect before the operation effect for the pending change notice. Set and save information for operation promotion display such as an operation promotion image for prompting the user, and set and save information for operation request sound (B17).
23). Thereafter, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Direction button input processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect button input process according to the nineteenth embodiment. The effect button input process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B0010 of the main process (FIG. 36).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is a button operation effective period (operation detectable period) in which an operation of the effect button switch 25a (effect button main body) can be detected (B6).
701). The button operation valid period is step B6502 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 195).
And the operation valid period set in step B 1722 of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (FIG. 196). If it is not the button operation valid period (result of B6701 is “N”), the button operation (
The detection of the operation of the effect button switch 25a is set to be invalid (B6702), and the effect button input process is terminated. In this case, if the operation promotion display is being displayed and an operation request sound is being generated (outputting), the operation promotion display and the operation request sound are terminated. Note that the operation request sound may be terminated within a button operation effective period if a second period described later elapses.

If it is the button operation valid period (result of B6701 is “Y”), the button operation detection is set to be valid (B6703). That is, the operation promotion display and the operation request sound are started or continued.

Then, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a button operation is detected (B670).
4). When there is no button operation (the result of B6704 is “N”), the effect button input process is terminated. If a button operation is detected (the result of B6704 is “Y”), the button operation type is determined and stored for the button operation of the effect button switch 25a (B6705).

Button operation types include single-press operation, long-press operation, and continuous hit operation. Although the determination method of these operations is well-known, for example, a single press operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is pressed and turned on only once in a predetermined short time. For example, the long press operation can be determined when the state where the effect button switch 25a is pressed (on state) is maintained for a predetermined long time. For example, the continuous hitting operation can be determined when the effect button switch 25a is turned on and off a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When the effect button switch 25a is pushed and moved, it is detected by an optical sensor, a magnetic sensor, or the like, and is turned on, and when it is not pushed, the off state is maintained.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation valid period of step B6701 (B6706).
. In steps B6502 and B1722 described above, the button operation effective period and the button operation type are set in association with each other. If the determined button operation type is not the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation valid period (the result of B6706 is “N”), the effect button input process is terminated.

In the case where the determined button operation type is the button operation type set corresponding to the button operation effective period (result of B6706 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the button operation (operation of the effect button switch 25a). Set the execution information for executing the accompanying operation-related effects (B
6707), the button operation detection is set to be invalid, and the operation promotion display and the operation request sound are terminated (
B6708). For example, the operation corresponding effect here is a display of a predetermined image on the display device 41 (
Including a change of the hold display regarding the hold change notice) and the movement of the movable accessory. Thereafter, the effect button input process is terminated.

In the above-described effect button input process (FIG. 197), the button operation is an operation of the effect button switch 25a (the main part of the effect button), but the button operation is the touch panel 25.
b operation (swipe operation etc.) may be sufficient.

[Screen transition diagram]
198A and 198B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the nineteenth embodiment.

In (M) of FIG. 198A, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed as the identification information in the variation display area 610, and the variation of the decoration reduced symbol (small symbol) is used as the identification information (↓).
↓↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left display area 610A, the right display area 610B, and the middle display area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left design (first design A) and the right design (decoration first), respectively.
The symbol B) and the middle symbol (decoration first symbol C) vary.

In (M), a movement effect in which a character image 761 simulating a tank moves is started as a no-operation effect. This no-operation effect is executed only for a predetermined first period. It should be noted that the operation of the operation means is invalid during the no-operation effect. The no operation effect here is a speaker (sound output means)
Generating (outputting) sound effects from the sound and notifying the expectation level of jackpot. The sound effect here is of a different type from BGM (music).

For example, as the moving sound of the character image 761 simulating a tank, the expectation level of jackpot is different for each sound effect, such that the sound effect “go” has a high expectation level and the sound effect “caracara” has a low expectation level. Therefore, the degree of expectation can be notified by sound effects. Note that the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot corresponds to the probability of a big hit when the notice (in this case, a sound effect) appears, and the selection ratio of the notice in the case of a big hit and the selection ratio of the notice in the case of a loss Can be calculated.

The effect control device 300 draws the notice effect (B2006) drawn in the change effect process (FIG. 195).
, B2009, B2011, B2014), a no-operation effect can be displayed and set. Other non-operation effects that generate sound effects include reach effects, pseudo-continuous effects, and cut-in effects.

In (ma), the on-change on-hold display 63 indicating the on-hold associated with the special figure change display game being executed.
3 a is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. A hold display 633 (first hold display) corresponding to the hold generated by winning at the start winning opening 36 is displayed on the first hold display section 630a. And the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41
In the number-of-holds display section 660, a number “1” indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 and a number “0” indicating the number of reserved special figure 2 are displayed.

In (mi), a hold display 63 is displayed as a hold change notice (B1716) when a hold occurs.
3 changes from a normal hold display (circle) to a hold display 633b having a shape (aspect) imitating the effect button 25 immediately after the occurrence of the hold. It should be noted that the hold display 633 may be displayed as a hold display 633b shaped like the effect button 25 from the occurrence of the hold of (ma).

Thereafter, in (M), the character image 761 simulating a tank is stopped, the no-operation effect with the sound effect “go” is ended, and the operation effect is started. An operation promotion display 636 (operation promotion image) that prompts the player to perform an operation is displayed as a pre-operation effect of the presence operations. The operation promotion display 636 is an image display 6 that requests the player to press the effect button 25.
36a and a gauge 636b representing an operation effective period. The image display 636a includes a character display such as “Press the button” or “PUSH”. In addition, as a pre-operation effect among the operation effects, an operation request sound “Bee” requesting the player to operate is generated (output) from the speaker. The effect control device 300 can set the operation promotion display 636 of the operation effect and the operation request sound in response to the advance notice drawn in the variation effect process (FIG. 195) (B6501-
B6505). Note that the operation request sound may be a voice that informs the player of the type of operation (such as “press”, “continue hit”, “long press”, etc.).

The effect control device 300 sets the second period in which the operation request sound can be continued shorter than the first period in which the no-operation effect (that is, the sound effect) continues. The second period is set, for example, when the operation request sound is set (B6504, B1723) in the change effect setting process or the prefetch change command process. In this way, by making the operation request sound and the sound effect different, the player can
The operation request sound and the sound effect are not confused, and the operation request sound can be easily recognized and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, the production control device 300 sets, for example, the operation request sound as a high sound and the sound effect as a low sound, and makes the operation request sound different from the sound effect. This also makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the operation request sound and the sound effect, and can improve the interest of the game.

The period during which the operation request sound is actually continued is the period from the start of the operation effective period to the operation when the effect button 25 is operated within the set second period. 2
Shorter than the period. Further, the period during which the operation request sound continues is equal to the second period when there is no operation during the operation effective period. The production control device 300 sets the second period equal to or shorter than the operation effective period. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 sets a 2nd period shorter than a 1st period by setting an operation effective period (operation detectable period) shorter than the 1st period when a no-operation production (namely, sound effect) continues. Can be set.

Next, in (Me), when the player performs a button operation corresponding to the set operation type (B6502) (B6706), an image 762 (here, cloud or smoke) is displayed as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation. Is displayed (B6505, B6707). As an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation, a sound may be generated (output) from a speaker in addition to the display of the image 762.

Subsequently, in (M), as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation, another image 763 (here, a character image of a speech) is displayed after the image 762 to notify the degree of expectation of jackpot. For example, the degree of expectation is low if the line is “chance”, and the degree of expectation is high if the line is “extremely hot”. In addition, the degree of expectation may be notified by sound accompanying the image 763 (such as reading a speech).

It should be noted that a vague expectation degree may be informed in an unclear manner by an image or an operation request sound in the pre-operation effect before clearly informing the expectation degree in the operation-corresponding effect (two-stage expectation notification) ). For example, a plurality of types of operation request sounds that are difficult to distinguish unless they are listened to carefully are provided, and different expectations are notified for each type of operation request sound. In this way, the player's expectation is gradually increased step by step, and the player's willingness to operate the effect button 25 can be improved.

Next, in (YA), after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished and the stop symbol is displayed,
The next special figure variation display game starts. Here, the holding display 633b of the first holding display section 630a moves to the holding frame area 640 having a rectangular frame (holding shift).

  In (U), the hold display 633 is generated immediately after the start of the special figure variation display game.

Further, in (Y), immediately after (Y), the hold display 633 is displayed in a different manner (color) from the normal hold display (for example, white) as the hold change notice (B1716) when the hold occurs.
It changes to 3c (for example, red). The hold change notice at the occurrence of the hold is a no-operation effect in which the operation of the operation means is invalid. It should be noted that a hold display 633c (for example, red) having a different form from the normal hold display (for example, white) may be displayed since the occurrence of the (u) hold. In addition, a hold change sound “Cuen” indicating that the hold has changed is generated (output). Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot may be different for each type of on-hold change sound, and the on-hold expectation degree may be notified by the on-hold change sound.

Thereafter, in (La), the operation effect related to the hold change notice at the time of the hold shift starts. For this reason, the operation promotion display 636 (the image display 636a, the gauge 636b, as in (M)).
) Is displayed and an operation request sound “beep” is generated (output) from the speaker. In addition,
The occurrence timing of the hold is random, and the occurrence timing of the hold change sound and the operation request sound may overlap, but in order to prevent confusion, only one of them is generated with priority.

The production control device 300 sets the second period in which the operation request sound can be continued shorter than the first period in which the non-operation production (that is, the holding change sound) continues. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the operation request sound without confusion between the operation request sound and the sound effect. In addition, the production control device 300 sets, for example, the operation request sound as a high sound and the sound effect as a low sound, and makes the operation request sound different from the sound effect. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the operation request sound and the sound effect.

Next, in (i), when the player performs a button operation corresponding to the set operation type (B1722) (B6706), the reserved digest area 640 is used as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation.
The mode of the change pending display 633a changes. For example, the shape of the changing hold display 633a changes from a button shape (a shape imitating the effect button 25) to a round shape,
The color of the on-change display 633a changes from white (normal color) to green, for example. Here, a new hold display 633 is generated.

Thereafter, immediately after (Li), the hold display 633 changes to a hold display 633c (for example, blue) in a different form (color) from the normal hold display (for example, white) as a hold change notice (B1716) when the hold occurs. . Note that a hold display 633c (for example, blue) having a mode (color) different from that of the normal hold display (for example, white) may be displayed from the time of occurrence of the hold in (i). In addition, a hold change sound (explosive sound “docan”) indicating that the hold has changed is generated (output). Note that the hold change sound here (explosive pronunciation “Docan”) is more than the hold change sound “Queen” in (Yo),
Expectation of jackpot is low. The first period in which the hold change sound as a no-operation effect continues is longer than the second period in which the operation request sound can be continued.

Next, in (Le), after the special figure change display game is finished and the stop symbol is displayed,
The next special figure variation display game starts.

Note that the screen transition diagram of FIG. 198 is merely an example. For example, (Y) (Y) is deleted and immediately after the start of the special figure variation display game, (LA) (RE) is operated. May be.
Moreover, although the hold change notice at the time of a hold shift was shown in the hold digestion area 640,
It may be executed by the first hold display unit 630a or the second hold display unit 630b.

Further, in FIG. 198 (ma) (mi), the movement effect in which the character image 761 moves is executed as the no-operation effect. However, when the lottery is selected and won with a predetermined probability, only the operation effect is lost. You may perform as a no-operation production. That is, in the same type of effect (movement effect), the same effect sound may be output by providing the operated effect and the no-operation effect at a predetermined ratio (appearance rate). If it does in this way, the variation of production will increase and the interest of a game will improve.
In the case of a big hit, the ratio (appearance rate) of the operation effect may be increased as compared to the case of a loss.
In addition, the ratio (appearance rate) of the operated effect and the non-operated effect may be changed according to the game state (normal state, probability change state, short time state, latent probability change state, etc.). Even if it does in this way, the variation of production will increase and the interest of a game will improve.

〔Timing chart〕
FIG. 199 is a timing chart illustrating a no-operation effect and an operation effect in the nineteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 199, in one special map fluctuation display game, an effect capable of notifying the degree of expectation that the special map fluctuation display game is a big hit can be executed a plurality of times. A plurality of effects include a no-operation effect and an operation effect.

At time T1, the special figure variation display game starts. Thereafter, at time T2, a no-operation effect starts. In the no-operation effect, a sound effect (or on-hold change sound) is generated (output) from the speaker in the first period (T4-T2). A sound effect (or on-hold change sound) notifies the degree of expectation that a special figure variation display game for this time or next time will be a big hit. Even if the effect button 25 (operation means) is operated at time T3 while the no-operation effect is being performed, the operation becomes invalid because the operation valid period (operation detectable period) is not set. . At time T4, the no-operation effect ends.

After that, at time T5, the operation effect starts. In the presence effect, the operation request sound can be generated (output) from the speaker in the second period. The operation request sound prompts the player to operate the effect button 25 (operation means). Since the second period is the same as or shorter than the operation effective period and the operation effective period is shorter than the first period (second period ≦ operation effective period <first period), the second period is Shorter than one period.

In the period (T7-T5) in which the operation request sound actually continues, if the effect button 25 is operated within the set second period, the operation is started from the start of the second period (start of the operation effective period). However, if there is no operation within the second period, it is equal to the second period. A configuration in which the operation request sound is continued for the set second period regardless of the presence or absence of the operation is also possible.

Then, when there is an operation on the effect button 25, the operation request sound ends at time T7.
At the end of the operation request sound (at the end of the second period), the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25 starts.

In addition, even if the operation request sound ends after the set second period has elapsed and the operation is within the effective period, the operation corresponding effect starts when the effect button 25 is operated.

[Operations and effects of the nineteenth embodiment]
According to the nineteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes the effect control means (effect control device 300) that can display on the display device a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the stop result of the variable display game is special. When the result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) that can output sound, and operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player. The effect control means is capable of executing an effect capable of notifying the expectation degree that the variable display game has a special result in a single variation display game, and that the operation of the operation means is invalid as a plurality of effects. It is possible to execute the no-operation effect that is performed and the operation effect that enables the operation of the operation means. In the no-operation effect, the expectation is notified by outputting a sound (for example, sound effect, hold change sound) from the sound output means in the first period, and in the operation effect, the second period is shorter than the first period. The sound output means (speaker) outputs a sound (operation request sound) to prompt the operation of the operation means (effect button 25), and the degree of expectation is notified when the operation means is operated.

Therefore, since both the operational effect and the non-operational effect can be executed in a single variable display game, the effects are varied and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, a sound (
The second period during which the operation request sound) continues is shorter than the first period during which the non-operation effect continues, and the player outputs a sound (operation request sound) prompting the operation of the operation means and a non-operation effect. Sounds (that is, sound effects, on-hold change sounds, etc.) are not confused, making it easier to recognize operation request sounds. in this way,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the output request sound different from the operation request sound and the sound output in the no operation effect.

According to the nineteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) that can store start memory that is the right to execute a variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition.
Prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining execution information of the variable display game related to the start memory before the variable display game based on the start memory stored by the start memory means is executed. The effect control means (the effect control device 300) notifies the determination result of the prior determination means as the no-operation effect and the operation-enabled effect. Therefore, notification (prefetching effect) of the determination result of the predetermination means, such as a hold change notice, can be executed by both the non-operation effect and the operation effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 Production buttons 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board effect device 44a, 44b Internal character (inner movable member)
46 Panel decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
51 First special figure change display (Special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second Special Figure Change Display (Special Figure 2 Display)
80 Lamp display device 82 Lucky number display device 93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outside movable member)
102 Setting Value Change Switch 143 Probability Setting Value Display Device 150 Driver 152 Status Display Device 153 LED Driver 100 Game Control Device (Main Board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub-board)
400 Power Supply Device 510 Parts 513 Identification Board 516 Parallel Serial Conversion Unit 519 Wiring (Wire)
530 Touch sensor 630 On-hold display unit 640 On-hold digestion area 640A Start memory display background 641 Production display area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect relating to a game,
A setting changing means capable of changing a setting value according to a setting relating to a game;
An operation detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation,
The production control means includes
Operation value calculating means for calculating an operation value according to the set value as a value that changes in response to the operation detecting means detecting a player's operation;
A predictive effect executing means capable of executing a predictive effect for predicting and notifying the content of the predetermined effect when the operation detecting means detects a player's operation;
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the prediction effect executing means can vary the execution ratio of the prediction effect in relation to the set value.

Images